TheLifeandTimes19

All are equal before the Stranger

Drinks at a Wedding

Drinks at a Wedding

“It was a beautiful ceremony.” 

Harry nodded politely. ” It sure was my lady, Catelyn outdid herself with the arrangements.” 

“Oh and Lady Mormont looked wonderful. I must know where she got the material to make her dress. “ 

“I'm afraid I don't know much about fashion, my lady. I can ask for you if you like?” 

“No, No. Don't worry my Lord. I will ask her when I get a chance. I want to ask about what she used to wash her hair to make it so shiny anyway.” 

“As you say my lady.” 

“What about you my Lord? When are you looking to get married? My sister would-” 

“Lord Stark!” Harry looked up across the hall to where the Greatjon called him from where he was sitting with a few other lords. 

Harry was only too happy to take the out when it was given. He bowed his head. ”Apologies my lady. It seems like the Greatjon is drunk and trying to get my attention. I best see what he wants before he causes a scene.” 

She sniffed. “Very well my Lord. Thank you for the conversation. Maybe we can continue this more in depth later?” She finished with a purr. 

Harry smiled weakly. “Perhaps.” 

With that he spun on his heel and marched towards the Greatjon while trying to make it look like he wasn't running away. 

Greatjon laughed when Harry sat at the table. “ Ha Ha. The look on your face lad! You seemed like you wanted to die talking to that lass.” 

Harry grimaced slightly. “She was very...spirited.” 

“Ha!” He took a big gulp from his tankard. “Who is she anyway? I don't recognize her.” 

Harry shrugged and waved for one of the servants to bring him a drink. It was a celebration, he might as well join in. “You wouldn't. She's Lord Blackwoods younger cousin, Sara. She came with the rest of his household that sought sanctuary from the war Blackwood is fighting in the Riverlands. They arrived only a few days ago.” 

Lord Umber grimaced. “Nasty business that. So what's the plan lad, you giving them land in the North?” 

This was something Harry admired about Umber. He was an extremely straightforward person. If he liked you, you would know. If he didn't, you would know. Even now, most Lords would hesitate to question Harry so openly.  

His drink arrived and Harry took a small sip, with only a minor grimace at the taste, before answering. “No, at least I don't plan to right now. Eventually, things will calm down in the South again and they will be able to go home. It might come in useful to have them owe the North a favor.” 

Umber grunted. “And if things don't calm down? Or if they lose their lands?” 

Harry frowned. “Then I highly doubt the Faith will keep their issues to the South. They will attempt to target the North eventually. Then we will need to retaliate. Having some Lords who can take control of portions of the Riverlands will be useful.” 

Then he shrugged. “Worse case scenario is I give them land that needs to be developed. There is a lot of land in the North that would work. But I don't think it is going to come to that.” 

“Do you know what the King is planning?” Wyman asked between bites of his steak. 

Harry spared a glance at the feast in front of the Lord and decided he was feeling slightly hungry himself. “He has finally assembled an army. Crownlanders, Stormlands and Westerlands soldiers are going to march into the Riverlands to put the Faith Militant to the sword. ” He answered while waving for another servant to bring him some food. 

“Finally.” Lord Karstark grunted from his place next to Wyman where he was nursing a jug of ale. 

Harry nodded. “Aye, it would have been better to stamp this out earlier. But at least it's getting done. “ 

“And the North?” Umber asked.  

He shook his head. “Weve been asked not to interfere. Which is alright with me. The Riverlands should be easy to clean up with their numbers, but its going to be a slog. I doubt the Faith is going to meet them as an army. They will attack weak points and disappear into the population. Catching them all is going to be difficult. “ 

There were grimaces all around the table. War was bad enough. A war where your enemy could be literally anybody and there is no way to tell for sure? That's going to be terrible. 

Lord Karstark looked like he swallowed a lemon. “That's going to cause hell. Then there is the Vale. That's going to be even worse.” 

“Much worse.” Harry agreed. The Vale was where all of this started. The Faith Militant has had time to consolidate in the region. It is one of the more faithful kingdoms in Westeros. Many Lords there seem to even be supporting the Faith Militant in some capacity as they hunt for the Mountain clans. Including Lysa Arryn. 

A hunt that is going poorly. Harry estimates that it won't be long before many of the conscripts give up and start heading to the Riverlands to support the Faith there. Which is just going to cause even more chaos.  

It was at times like this that Harry regretted not having Baelish assassinated. He could have ended things before they got to this point. 

But it was too late now. Even if he assassinated Baelish, he would become a martyr. Someone else would take over or the Faith Militant would split up into lots of different groups that would cause chaos all on their own. It was better to have a centralized leader of the movement that he could spy on to make sure there are no moves made against the North. 

Still, its not like Harry helped him. Harry just turned a blind eye. The South wasn't his responsibility. He already spent a lifetime trying to save everyone he could. At the end of the day, he wasn't able to save anyone. He had decided long ago that this life he would look out for those he cares about first. Then he would look to strengthening magic second.  

Everyone in the South wasn't his responsibility. Even if he did feel guilty. 

“How is Lady Catelyn taking things?” Lord Manderlys question brought him out of his musings. 

Harry grimaced and picked up a piece of bread from the plate the servant brought and having a bite before answering. “Poorly. Her brother was brutally murdered. Her home is going through a civil war and her father has fallen dangerously ill.” 

He took a breath. “This wedding was good for her. Arranging everything took her focus away from those problems. And I would say she has done a really good job.” 

It also helped that Harry promised he would try keep her house name alive if her father was to die. He told her that he would see about getting Robb or one of her other children sworn in as the Lord of Riverrun eventually. Harry wasn't sure how he would go about doing that just yet and he sure as hell wasn't going to do it anytime soon. But he would put effort into getting it done. It was the least he owed his uncles wife. 

“Bah! Enough of this depressing shit!” Greatjon slammed his fist on the table. “This is supposed to be a celebration. So we should be celebrating!” 

Harry smiled. “Very well Umber. These problems can wait. “ 

The large lord reached over and gave him a clap on the shoulder. “Hah. That's what I'm talking about.” With that he turned and called to a servant. “You, lad! Yes, you! Bring us fresh drinks for the table and keep them coming.” 

Before he left Harry added a few instructions. “Tell Poole to bring out a bottle of the special drinks I reserved. One for each table for now.” 

The servant bowed. ”Yes my lord.” With that he turned and quickly walked away. 

The lords gave him curious looks.  

Harry just smiled. “You'll see in a bit my lords.” 

Jon grumbled. “Fine keep your secrets. For now, we drink!” 

Wyman lifted his mug. “Aye!” 

Even Lord Karstark, the normally dour man, lifted his mug with a small laugh.  

Harry scoffed and rolled his eyes. “I'm still too young to drink like that. You enjoy yourselves though.” 

Greatjon scoffed. “What are you saying laddie? I was getting drunk off my arse at half your age and I turned out fine!” 

Harry just gave him a skeptical look.  

He released a booming laugh. “You little shit! I'll have you know that I'm plenty smart!” 

Wyman cut in. “Jons delusions aside.” “My what now?” “You should take this opportunity to relax my lord. One night of fun won't cause any harm.” 

Lord Karstark just stared at him. 

Harry grumbled. He didn't think he would be subjected to peer pressure with his position. Never the less actually fall for it, but here he was.  

“Fine!” He huffed. “But I'm not going to try and keep up with you lot.” 

The was another booming laugh. “As if you could. Now lads, I see the servant is coming back. Finish your mugs!” 

Harry lifted his mug up to his face and tried to down it as quickly as he could. The taste wasn't pleasant. He had never been a big fan of alcohol. By the time he finished his mug Harry was practically gagging, and his face was scrunched up into an expression of disgust. 

The others had already finished long before him and were just waiting patiently. 

Once he set his mug down Lord Manderly was quick to catch his attention. “What is this?” He asked holding a clay pot with the lid open. His nose scrunched up as he smelled the contents.  

Harrys lips twitched slightly. “It's a new drink I have been working on. I'm still perfecting it but this batch came out pretty well. Wait, before you pour it, I'm going to call my uncles over. They should also have some.” 

Harry proceeded to do just that. He caught his uncle Neds eye, who was sitting at the high table next to Catelyn, and waved him over. His uncle Benjen was busy dancing with his new wife. Harry decided to leave him be. 

It seemed this wedding had even managed to put his uncle Ned in a good mood. When he sat down at the table he had an uncharacteristically large smile on his face. 

“Ned, glad you could join us. Your nephew was just telling us about this new drink he made.” 

His uncle gave him a disapproving look. Harry just shrugged. “I was just experimenting. This is only one of the recipes i have come up with. The others aren't as close to completion yet though.” 

Ned sighed. “Still, this isn't something you should be spending your time on.” 

Harry rolled his eyes. Which was uncharacteristic. Huh am I tipsy already? 

The Greatjon came to his defense. “Oh lay off the lad Ned. This is a perfectly fine hobby. Why the things I used to get up to when I was his age... “ 

Ned just coughed uncomfortably and moved the conversation along. “So this new drink?”  

The Greatjon was only too happy to comply. He gathered five cups and opened the jar properly. 

Harry interjected before he could pour though. “Don't pour a lot. This stuff is very strong.” 

He just scoffed. “Lad, I can handle my alcohol. Theres no need to worry.” 

With that he began to pour. Quite a generous amount went into his cup and the rest of the adults but Harry was pleased to see that there was only a small portion added to his. 

He didn't even bother hiding his amusement when he noticed that all their cups were half filled. He didn't know how they were going to get through that much vodka but he figured it would be funny to watch. 

Harry took a breath and forced himself to quickly down the entire drink. He hated the taste, so he wanted to get it all down at once. He cringed once he had finished it and placed his cup on the table. Afterwards he had a sip of water to try wash his mouth out. 

“Gods! That is strong!” The Greatjon exclaimed after he slammed his cup down. The rest of the tale murmured their agreement after they placed their cups down. 

His uncle Ned and Lord Manderly both broke into coughs. “Gods, how are you meant to drink this?” Ned exclaimed. 

Harry laughed. “I did warn you it was strong. Your supposed only have small amounts at a time.” 

His uncle shot him a look of disbelief. “It tastes terrible.” 

Umber interjected. “Bah don't be a baby. I think it has potential. A proper mans drink this is!” 

He smiled. “It isn't supposed to taste great. The idea was that it was meant to get you drunk. It's mostly for the smallfolk. They can have a cup or two and easily become drunk. It's cheap to make. So, it can be cheap to sell.” 

While Harry was talking Umber already started pouring more into all their cups. This time, he at least kept it at a much smaller volume. 

Harry refused to have any and just watched with amusement as the rest of the adults forced it down. Except for Umber who looked like he was having the time of his life. 

“That was better than the last time. ”Wyman commented. 

“It was.” Ned agreed. 

“This is the perfect drink to play drinking games with.” Lord Umber commented. Without wasting anymore time he poured them more.  

His uncle looked like he wanted to refuse, but seeing the challenge in the Greatjons eyes when he handed over the cup made him straighten his shoulders and accept it with a grimness that didn't belong in such a setting. 

“The first man that passes out loses!” Umber declared with full seriousness. 

Harry burst into laughter. He couldn't help it. He wasn't sober. Even just the alcohol he had was too much for his young body. 

After downing another cup. Jon turned to Harry his face slightly flushed. ”Say lad, what did you call this drink again?” 

“Vodka.” Harry replied. 

“Vodka. Vodka. That's a terrible name lad. It needs to be more catchy. Firewater. That's a better name.” He said to ayes from around the table. 

Harry just scoffed. “Whatever. I don't really care about the name.” 

They each drank another small cup. 

Wyman turned to him next. “How many barrels of this can you sell my lord. I think-thinks it would do good in some markets.” 

Harry had make a conscious effort to hide his amusement. They were starting to get really drunk now. 

“Not many. I only just figured out how to make it two moons or so ago. I need to first grow the ingredients in large enough batches and set up a whole distillery. It will be moons or even a year or two of work before i can start selling it in even limited amounts.” 

“What ingredients does it need?” 

“Potatoes. It's something that Benjen picked up for me on his voyage. Apparently they can be found in Sothorys ,so they are rare right now. Benjen told me he had a very difficult time finding them. Apparently, there was a trader in Lys who just got back from a trip from there that had a few that he was able to buy, but he wasn't able to find them from anywhere else. It was just luck that we got them at all.” 

It really was pure luck that they got them. Harry wasn't expecting Benjen to find them at all. Especially not with just a description to go by. 

Wyman grimaced. “Aah. So there is only a certain amount of them.” 

Harry nodded. “For now. They aren't that difficult to grow. I'm working on expanding the amount we have as quickly as possible, but it is still going to take a long time. But I want them to eventually become somewhat common. They will really help feed our people. They are remarkable plants.” 

Umber grumbled. “Just going to have to wait then. Pity. This Firewater does more to me than anything else I've ever had.” 

“I can give you each a small barrel when you leave. But that probably it for the next year or so.” 

Truthfully even that would push his stock to nearly empty. 

Jon nodded gratefully. “I appreciate it. Gonna have to make it last.” 

With that he returned his focus back on the drinks. “Drink!” He called. 

Everyone at the table besides Harry drank. After that his uncle stood. “That's it for me. I'm well and truly drunk.”  

Harry could see that from the way he swayed slightly where he stood.  

“Ned! Your still standing! You can't be that drunk.” 

His uncle just waved a hand and started walking off. “No, I'm done.” 

“Tch. I guess he loses then. Who wants to see who comes in second last?” Both Karstark and Manderly groaned. But neither refused to take part either.  

Harry watched the Lords getting increasingly drunk over the next few rounds. By the end of the fifth round, Lord Manderly was balancing his chin on one hand while slurring when he spoke. Lord Karstark had his head resting on the table looking dead the world and Lord Umber was having a conversation on his own that Harry gave up deciphering a while ago. 

“Thens is’ tellsa that this is my horse! You cant take my horse! He don let nobody but me ride im’. Ehs a loyal one my horse.” 

“Bedding!” The shout came echoed loud in the hall. There was a moment of silence before the chant picked up. “Bedding! Bedding! Bedding!” 

Lord Umber shot to his feet, knocking his chair down and stumbled his way past Harry with the chant on his lips. “Beddin’!” 

Harry turned to watch the commotion and saw as Dacey was swarmed by men and stripped down.  

He wasn't sure he agreed with this tradition but his uncle Benjen didn't refuse and Dacey didn't seem to be making a big deal of it, so Harry let it go.  

Harry stuck around the hall for another ten minute after the couple was escorted to their chambers before he left and made his way to his own chambers for the night. Nearly tripping on a snoring Jon Umber who was passed out under the archway just above the stairs entering the main castle.  

He couldn't help but laugh. This was a good night. 

Hanging Tree

“Another!” Patrick exclaimed whilst slamming his mug onto the table. Drops of wine poured down his chin, and he was visibly swaying slightly in his seat.  

Not that Edmure had the right to judge his friend. He was only slightly better off himself.  

They were spending their afternoon at a tavern about half an hour ride from Riverrun. Edmure, Patrick, Jason, Marq, Robert and a few more of his noble friends were taking the opportunity to enjoy themselves. They had been there for a few hours now and were well and truly in their cups.

“So, I said to her that she had the nicest tits I had ever seen. It didn't take her long after that to show them to me.” Patrick laughed.

Edmure joined in before asking. “Did she?”

A frown of confusion came onto his friends' face. “Did she what?”

“Did she really have the nicest tits you had ever seen?”

Patrick smirked. “They were average.”

The whole table burst out laughing again.  

Edmure gestured for another drink before gulping the remainder of his cup down in a few strong sips. Then he jumped back into the conversation that moved onto Jasons latest conquest.

It wasn't long before his drink arrived.

Unfortunately he didn't get a chance to enjoy it.

A boy walked up to their table, panting. Edmure recognized him as one of the servants from the castle.

Even in their drunken haze, his presence was enough to bring silence to the table.

“Milord!” He bowed. “Lord Hoster demands your presence in his solar.”

Edmure sputtered. “What? Now?” Doesn't his father know that he is busy?

The boy shifted, looking uncomfortable. “I was told to bring you as soon as possible.”

His shoulders slumped and he turned back to his friends. ”Sorry lads. I've got to go.”

He was waved off. His friends look remarkably less cheery now.  

Edmure couldn't have that. He didn't want to be responsible for bringing down the mood. “Next round is on me!” He called out to the tavern as he stood.  

He smiled at the cheers as he left.  

The ride to the castle was a lot more difficult than he was expecting. Edmure was much drunker than he thought. He rode his horse into a wagon, almost fell off and even rode in the wrong direction for a bit.  

Luckily, his trusted guards were there to direct him. Otherwise he doubted he would be seeing his father that night.

Time seemed to blur for Edmure and before he knew it, he was entering into his fathers solar.

Hoster Tully took one look at him, frowned and issued an order. “Sober him up.”

Edmure didn't even try to defend himself as he was dragged out of the room into the courtyard outside where the guards proceeded to pour cold water over his head.

His head immediately felt clearer. He wasn't completely sober, but he was definitely better off than before.  

He took a small detour to his room to change his clothes before going back to his fathers solar.  

Hoster nodded. “Better.” He then gestured to bread and pork on a plate on the table. “Eat.”

Edmure wasted no time. He didn't even bother asking any questions. This isn't the first time this routine has happened. He knows his father won't speak to him until he has eaten and is in a better state of mind.

Ten minutes later, Edmure downs a cup of water before leaning back and waiting for his father to speak.  

Hoster who had been patiently waiting for him this whole time, looks up from the parchment he is writing on to stare hard at him for a few moments, before giving a sigh. “Must we do this so often Edmure?”

He just chuckles awkwardly. “How was I supposed to know you would have need of me? I thought I could relax the rest of the evening.”

His father didn't look impressed. “This wouldn't be such a problem if you limited yourself. You are to be lord one day. You need to spend more time working and less drinking with your friends. You need to take your duties more seriously.”

Edmure frowned, genuinely offended. “I have been taking my duties seriously father. I've spent more time on politics in this last year than the rest of my life combined. Even the drinking serves a purpose. I'm building a friendship with my future vassals.”

Hoster sighed and rubbed his temples. “Youve been doing better. I will give you that. I am proud of you for that, but sometimes you still worry me.”

“What did I do?”

“Friendships. That's the word you used, my son. While I don't deny that it is a good thing that you are building up those relationships, I fear you don't see the cost of the way you go about it.“

He frowned in genuine confusion. “What do you mean?”

Hoster looked tired. “Those boys see you as a friend first Edmure. They like you. Some might even have loyalty towards you and genuinely care for you; but they don't respect you or have any fear of you. Not truly. ”

He felt like he had been slapped. “They do respect me! And why would I want them to fear me anyway?”

His father looked dead serious. “They see Edmure their friend when they look at you. They don't see Edmure the Lord. They see a man who can make them laugh. Who can brighten up their moods or who is fun to drink with. They don't see a man who can lead them through war. Or if they do, I can assure you the veteran lords don't. They don't see a man who they must obey before all else. They see a friend they can argue with. It might earn you a few good friends my son, but it makes you look weak to most.”

He opened his mouth but nothing came out.

Hoster sighed but kept going. “A few of those boys are genuine with their friendships. Mallister, for one, seems to genuinely care for you and would no doubt make for a potent ally in the future. There are a few more like that. But there are also the snakes in the grass. Some of those boys just want to use you to advance themselves. They would happily sacrifice you for their own ambition.  You need to learn to identify them. The trust, true trust, of a lord is a precious thing. You need to learn to spend yours more sparingly my son. Because trust can become a deadly poison if you aren't careful.”

He just nodded numbly. Not knowing what else to say.  

Hoster sighed and leant back. “Don't get me wrong, Edmure. Youve been doing well. Youve taken my lessons far more seriously since you came back from the North.”

Edmure grimaced at the reminder of his journey North. At the humiliation he was forced to suffer at the hands of Hadrian Stark. His hands clenched at the memory before he forced them to relax and he calmed his breathing.

As much as he hates to admit it. He knows that a good portion of the fallout from that trip is his own fault. His father sent him to Winterfell to open up discussions about fostering one of his nieces or nephews.  

Unfortunately, he was too cocky. Too confident. Too unused to speaking with an equal instead of one of his future subjects. He was too assured of himself and never even began proper negotiations. When he returned to Riverrun his father was livid with him, and in hindsight, after quite a lot of lessons on politics from his father he would admit that he was a fool.

Still, the current situation between Riverrun and Winterfell wasn't entirely his fault. Yes, he was a fool, but Hadrian Stark didn't have to escalate things so much.

Hoster saw the look on his face and softened. “Theres no use hanging on the past my son. What happened, happened. Best just to use the lessons it taught you in the future. “

He still couldn't help but grit his teeth. “Still...”

His father just waved him off. “Cat has been working on things on her side. It looks like Hadrian has started to soften his stance slightly. He won't be sending any family South any time soon but she has got him to agree to open up some trade. If for no other reason than to sell the things his fleet brings in.”

Edmure just took a deep calming breath.  

“Why did you call me here father? Surely not just to talk about my failures and the North?”

After watching him for several seconds it seems that his father mercifully decided to move on.  

“The issue with the Faith it becoming worse.”

Edmure snorted. “It's been growing worse for moons now father.”

He was about to continue before the sharp look in his fathers eye had him reconsidering.

After a moment of silence Hoster continued. “Yes, but not like this.”  

A feeling of dread came over Edmure. “What happened?”

“Lord Blackwood was attacked in his own lands while he was out dealing justice to a group of bandits.”

His stomach dropped. “Is he okay?”

Hoster nodded with a relieved expression on his face. “Yes, he had some light wounds, but he survived. Most of his guards died though.”

Edmure slumped slightly in relief.  

His father continued before he could speak. “Unfortunately, it seems that the group that attacked him were tracked to the Bracken lands.”

Instantly the feeling of dread returned. “Are you sure they were actually from there? Is it not just Blackwood throwing blame on Bracken like always?”

Hoster shook his head. “How I wish it were so my son. Unfortunately, some of my spies reported seeing quite a few Faith militant members on Bracken lands in the last moon. Lors Bracken has even been seen to meet with some of them.”

“Fuck.”

Hoster snorted. “Aptly put. This has the potential to spiral into an outright war between the two if we aren't careful. Which could drag the Riverlands into it as well. I fear that Bracken might actually have been involved in the attack. “

He turned his attention back to Edmure and studied him carefully. “What do you suggest we do son?”

Edmure thought hard. When he spoke, it was usure. “We can't let Bracken get away with this. Not only will it embolden him to be more direct next time. But it might give others the same idea of using the faith as a patsy.”

Hoster seemed to age before his eyes. “I agree. The problem is, if we move against Bracken and the Faith militant, it could cause us to be seen as traitors to those fanatics. It might stop the Faith or it might cause them to become even worse as they lose all restraint.”

“What about the King?”

Hoster snorted. “Robert Baratheon is only now starting to gather his banners. It will be at least a moon before he is ready to ride into the Riverlands at best. That's not even taking into account the fanatics that have started to pop up in Kingslanding, the Crowlands and the Reach. I fear this situation is only going to get worse before it gets better.”

The feeling of dread only grew. ”What do you suggest then?”

“We need to start preparing for war.” Edmure had never seen his father look so frail before. He was always a figure that seemed to loom large in his life, but now, he just seemed like a frail old man.

He felt fear at his father's words. After a few moments he gathered himself and straightened his shoulders as much as he could. “I will call the banners then.”

Hoster shook his head. “No, don't do it yet. It might just set off the spark to turn this into a full civil war. I fear that many houses might take this opportunity to settle old grudges if we don't navigate carefully. Many of them are still deciding which way to jump, if they go the wrong way then Blackwood and Bracken would be the least of our problems. No, I want you to get your friends to ride home in the morning and for them to slowly start building up their forces as quietly as they can. We will start doing the same. We will just gather our Knights for now. Once the King has properly started marching, then we will call the full banners. Fear of Roberts wrath should keep most houses from doing anything stupid. In the meantime I will write to Lord Blackwood to inform him of what we are doing and hopefully prevent him from marching on Bracken. Or at least delaying his march.”

Edmure felt tense. That didn't seem right to him. “Should we not march as soon as possible, before these fanatics cause anymore damage to our people?”

Hosters eyes softened. “You have a good heart Edmure. While I would like nothing more than to destroy these fanatics with the full power of the Riverlands, i fear the damage that can be done if we don't navigate carefully. A war always affects the smallfolk the worst. The longer it goes on, the more desperate they will become and the more will join up with the fanatics. No, i would rather the war be a short brutal one than one that drags on. When the Kings army is ready to join us, we will start scouring every river and hill for these fanatics and sweep them out of our kingdom as quickly and brutally as possible. In the meantime, i have written to my brother asking for him to return. His experience will be helpful.”

He felt some relief hearing the Blackfish would be helping but that still didn't get rid of the dread.

After a few minutes, he swallowed his pride to ask his next question. “What about the North? Shouldn't they send aid? They worship the Old Gods themselves?”

“Hadrian Stark has started to fortify his Kingdom, but has decided that he wont send any men South. He fears that it will only cause tensions to become worse. Leading more people to join the Faith Militant. For now, he has stated he would accept refugees from Old God worshippers. He will send ships to collect them at our ports during our trades but will provide no other aid.”

He grit his teeth. “Do you think he's right?” He bit out.

Hoster furrowed his eyebrows. “Possibly. It is difficult to imagine how a fanatic might react.”

It still sounded cowardly to him, but Edmure held his tongue.

“Was there anything else father?” He asked.

Hoster thought for a moment before shaking his head. “No that was all. You may go my son. Go back to the tavern and tell all your friends to have an early night. They must make haste home tomorrow to start building up their forces.”

Edmure just nodded and started making his way back to the inn. He didn't even think about getting more drinks or joining in on the fun. By now his mood had been thoroughly ruined.

He got back onto his horse and started riding back to the village. Luckily he was a lot more sober so the trip was much, much easier than before. Edmure didnt really pay much attention to his surrounding while he was riding, too caught up in his own head.

So it came as a suprise when he was flung off his horse when it was filled with arrows.

He landed painfully on his shoulder but, training and adrenaline made him rise fairly quickly.  

Unfortunately, three of his six guards were already dead due to arrows with a dozen men charging his position.  

Edmure wasted no time in turning to run as fast as he could. They were in a small forest of trees, blocking the view from the village. If he could just get clear, he might-

“AAAH!” He went down with a scream. Clutching his calf where an arrow had been embedded.

The pain was excruciating. White hot agony erupted in his mind, burning all thoughts except for the pain.

After a few seconds when he could pay attention again he found that he was surrounded.

Ten peasants wearing dirty clothes armed with knives and bows surrounded him. He knew then that his guards were dead.

“W-what do you want?” Edmure hated the crack in his voice.

The lead man sneered with a mouth that was missing half his teeth.  

“Jus’ your death milord.”

His breath hitched. “Why?”

“Dunno, some rich fella gave us coin. Told us where you would be an’ how they want you to die. We jus’ doing dis fer the coin.”

Edmure had never felt so afraid in his life. He swallowed before speaking and even that was a chore. “Why are you telling me this?”

He shrugged as he stalked closer. “My boys an i were curious. Wanted to speak to the man that was worth a thousand dragons. Must say i am disappointed.”

Edmure wanted to laugh. He wanted cry. A thousand dragons! His life was only worth a thousand dragons!

Then he felt rage. Rage like he never felt before. Along with determination.  

When the assassin got close enough he unsheathed his dagger and lunged at him. Ignoring the pain in his leg.  

He must have suprised him because he only widened his eyes before the dagger entered his thoat. He ripped the dagger out, turned and lunged at the next one. If he was going to die, it would be on his feet!

Unfortunately, he took a slash across his chest before he crashed into him. He stabbed at the man savagely before he was pulled off and thrown to the ground.  

“Careful lads! We have to string him up on the trees!”

While on his back he stabbed one man's leg, he went down with a cry. Unfortunately, that was when one of them kicked him in the head and everything went black.

When he next awoke, it was to the feeling of choking. His legs kicked at empty air, and his arms strained from where they were tied behind his back.  

His last moments didn't last long, but the one thought that never left his mind was the question of who betrayed him?

Experimentation

Experimentation 

“Fire-Air-Stone" 

Hadrian sat back and carefully inspected the runes he carved on the rock in front of him making sure that there were no imperfections in his writing.  

Once he was sure that the lines were clean, straight and that there were no cracks he applied a small amount of magic into the scheme using his hand. 

Afterwards he quickly took a few quick steps back. 

Just in time too, as the rock burst into flames. The flames burnt for a few moments before the entire rock exploded showering debris all over the floor. 

Harry took his arms away from his face, where he instinctively put it to protect himself from any small stones that came flying his way, to more carefully inspect the remains. 

He released a groan when he found that powder was all that was left of the rock. 

He picked up the next rock and placed it onto the table. Before he could carve the next runes, there was a knock on the door. “Luwin and Leaf to see you, My Lord.” His guard called.  

Harry didn't take his eyes away from his current project. “Enter!” 

While they made themselves comfortable, he carried on with what he was doing. 

“Fire-Warmth-Stone"  

He carved the next set of runes onto the rock, while blocking out any sounds coming from his observers. 

The rock once again caught fire before it started to melt.  

He sighed. 

“I'm assuming that it was not supposed to do that My Lord?” Came the question from the resident Maester. 

Harry turned around and gave the old man a halfhearted glare for the, in his opinion, stupid question. 

Leaf, who was sitting next to the Maester, on one of the spare seats against the wall and waiting patiently, spoke up. “Lord Hadrian is trying to find a way to make the stone heat the air around it. “ 

“Fascinating.” Luwin muttered. “I'm assuming it is meant to be used to heat castles in winter instead of traditional hearths?” 

Harry nodded. “Yes, if the idea works not only can it be distributed around castles much easier than hearths would, there would be no smoke. It can also be used in glasshouses to raise the temperature higher than it would already be.” 

He grabbed another rock and laid it on the table before jotting down the results of his experiment in his notebook. “At least, that's the idea. If only I could get it to work.” 

Luwin nodded slowly. “If you don't mind my lord, what runes did you use?” 

Seeing no harm in telling the man, hell maybe Luwin would even give a fresh perspective as he is near fluent in First Men writing with all the studying he had done over the years, Harry replied. “Fire, Wind and Stone.” 

Luwin nodded. ”Fire for heat, Wind because you want to warm the air around it but why stone?” 

Leaf answered this one. “To give the runes permanence as stone can also mean unyielding.” 

Harry nodded. “Correct. There are multiple problems though. First, I don't want the stone to actually catch on fire, I just want it to heat up. Second, I don't know if the rock is exploding and melting because of air bubbles in the rock expanding or for some other reason.” 

Luwin nodded thoughtfully. “How long have you been working on this my lord?” 

Harry shrugged. “Not long. This is only my third attempt so far.” 

“I see. Have you considered using the rune for warmth instead of the rune for fire?” 

He tapped his fingers on the table. “I tried that first. The rock melted.” 

“Hmm. What about the rune for the sun? The sun gives off heat.” 

Harry shrugged. “I doubt it would work but why not?” 

Harry returned to carving.  

“Sun-Air-Stone" 

The rock suddenly started glowing extremely brightly. “Fuck!” Harry turned away and covered his eyes. Luckily the rock soon exploded returning the room to normal brightness. 

Harry blinked his eyes a few times to clear the spots from his vision.  

“Not that one.” 

Luwin was quick with another idea. ”What about-” 

“Oh for- You had it right the first time. You just forgot to regulate the heat it gives off. Its warmth-hearth-air and then stone. Hearth because that is what you want the temperature to be. Comfortable, like a hearth.” 

Harry opened and closed his mouth. Now he felt like a bit of an idiot. It was one of the most basic things about runes, you have to specify when you can. He knew that from Latin, Greek and Norse runes. He just forgot to apply it to First Men runes. 

He wasted no time in carving the new runes onto a rock. 

The rock got hot under his touch but remarkably didn't explode. First for a minute and then two. Before he could call it a complete success the rock cracked in half and the runes shut down.  

Leaf explained without any prompting. “That is from air in the rock expanding from the heat and breaking the rock.” 

Right, he thought so. So Harry would either need a way to get all of the air out of the rock or he would need to find a different material that had no air in it in the first place. 

Luwin turned a curious gaze onto Leaf. “If you knew the answer the whole time, why didn't you just say so?” 

Leaf looked a bit disgruntled. “ Because Hadrian asked me not to interfere with his rune experiments. According to him, the best way to learn the limits of runes are to experiment. I only explained now because i did not want to go blind again.” 

When Luwin turned to him, Harry shrugged. “It's true. I'm trying to find the limits and laws for the magic. As it is, I've now discovered a way to destroy stone and another way to blind my foes.” 

The Maester pursed his lips. “That seems dangerous my lord.” 

He shrugged. “Aye, there is some danger. But I've been keeping to basic schemes for a reason. They are easy to power and only have so many ways that they can go wrong. I'm also making them incapable of being powered by ambient magic for a reason. So that if they do cause an accident, the amount of magic I use is unlikely to cause a serious injury.” 

Luwin nodded slowly. “I see. Still, your health is of paramount importance my lord. Would it not be better to have someone else conduct these tests for you?” 

Did Luwin just ask him to stop playing with magic? 

“Not going to happen. For one, I don't trust anybody else to do these tests to my satisfaction and two, I love magic. I won't give up pushing boundaries with it.” 

Luwin sighed but seemed to know when he wasn't getting anywhere and let the argument drop. 

Harry wrote the new rune scheme into his notebook before placing a different stone on the table. Now that he has an idea for the warmth stone, he decided to move onto something else. The last failure gave him an idea. 

“Light-Dawn-Air-Stone" 

The rock started glowing brightly. Unfortunately, it wasn't very uniform. The brightness increased and decreased inconsistently. By the time the glow died down due to running out of magic, Harry was starting to feel like he was in one of those raves he had heard about. 

Harry chucked the rock into a bucket he had for failures and wrote his results into his notebook. The he placed another rock onto the table. 

Before he could get started on a slightly different scheme, Leaf interrupted him. “My Lord, I wanted to talk to you about the potions ingredients.” Her voice was slightly rushed. 

Harry turned to look at her. “Aye, what about them?” 

“We have had a good deal of success with the dittany plants and most of the others but the dragonsnouts are giving us problems. They have all died. No matter which type of soil we put them in.” 

He leant against his desk. “Even the soil I had brought from The Neck?” 

She nodded. “Yes, even then. We aren't a completely sure, but we believe those flowers require moving water. Which we aren't able to give them without a more complicated system.” 

Harry considered things for a few moments. “Very well. Stop trying to grow them for now. I will have to have something built at a later date for those, as they are important in a few fire related potions. Replace them with Wolfeye flowers for now. Hopefully those grow better. The rest of the plants?” 

She nodded hesitantly. “We have got most of the others to grow but some of them still aren't looking healthy. The Yellowpin flower seems like it is on the verge of dying, I believe sunlight is actually killing it. The snakepetals are doing slightly better, but I believe they require wind to actually grow healthy which is impossible in a glassgarden. The rabbitteeth root is growing quickly but refuses to bud properly. I think it requires something to gnaw on it from time to time and the bluelillies aren't growing to the size we want them. I believe the water we are giving them is wrong.” 

Harry ran a hand through his hair. Fuck. Starting up a proper greenhouse just to grow the ingredients for potions wasn't supposed to be this difficult. Madam Sprout made it look so easy. Then again, she had far more versatile magic helping.  

“There isn't much I'm going to be able to do for those for now. It seems like each of them are going to need special conditions to grow properly in a glassgarden. Unfortunately, I don't have the coin or the time to set something up right now. Scrap all the plants that aren't growing properly. Have your observations written down and replace them with different plants from The Neck. I will look at it again in a few moons and decide what to do.” 

She nodded. “Very well.”  

Harry massaged his temples. “While you are here, tell me about how my uncles training is going.” 

She cringed slightly.  

He sighed. “That bad?” 

“It has been almost a year since we began teaching him. Eddard has fully bonded to the hawk we gave him and has started having some success in seeing though its eyes. But he has not learnt how to make it follow his commands or how to see through the eyes of any other animal.” 

She shrugged. “I don't believe he will ever become talented at the art my lord. His mind is too firm. His control over his magic is poor and his personality is just not suited towards the arts. He is too straightforward. He doesn't know how to bend the world to his desires.” 

Harry slumped slightly. “Have his training continue for now. I want him to get to the point he can at least have some control over the hawk before the training can stop. Even just that will be a very useful skill to have.” 

She nodded. “Understood my lord.” 

“Benjen?” 

“He is slightly better my lord. He has only had a moon or so of training, but he has started to see through his hawk when he sleeps.” 

Harry sighed. That was still slow compared to him. “Have him trained as much as possible before the wedding. I fear whatever training he has by then will have to be enough.” 

Leaf shrugged. “Most of it is just mental exercises. As long as he knows what to do and what not to do, he should be able to figure it out for himself now that the process has been explained. As long as he only practices skinchanging and only uses it on his hawk, he shouldn't have any problems or be in any danger.” 

Harry nodded with pursed lips. He wasn't happy, but she wasn't exactly wrong. Benjen has had the entire process explained to him many times at this point. As long as he keeps his mind only in the singular hawk and follows the rules laid out, he shouldn't have any problems. 

“Anything else you needed?” 

She nodded slightly. “I wanted to get you permission to leave for our new home for a few moons my Lord. I want to see with my own eyes what my kin have managed so far.” 

Harry didn't even need to think about it. “Done. You may leave after Benjens wedding.” 

She smiled slightly. “Thank you.” 

Harry just waved her off. Leaf had been extremely helpful since she swore to him. This was the least he could do. Harry was thinking about making her a permanent position in his court. The Children of the Forest live for a very long time. Having her advice his descendants can only be helpful. 

Not only will his descendants have someone with a lot of wisdom to call upon, but it would also help ensure that they would keep the pact he has made with the Children. The Children would likewise not be in a position to threaten his descendants, and it will be in their best interest to do their best to keep the North stable as their numbers will always be fewer than men. A stable North and a strong Stark dynasty will only be to their benefit. 

After a few more words, she was dismissed. 

He turned to Luwin. “You had something you wanted to speak about?” 

Luwin cleared his throat. “A few things my lord. First, Lady Catelyn is asking what the budget is for Benjens wedding. She wants to start preparations as soon as possible.” 

He scrunched his eyebrows. “Never really thought about it to be honest. What's a good number?” 

“I believe ten thousand gold dragons should be enough. Northern weddings are much simpler than southern ones after all.” 

Harry shrugged. “Make it twenty thousand. The North has done well for itself this year. A large feast for the lords will make them happy.” 

Luwin wrote that down in the small journal he always carried. “Very well. Next, there was a letter from lord Blackwood. He said he would keep your offer of shelter in mind if the South becomes too dangerous. In the meantime, he asks if House Stark will be willing to host his daughter and spare son.” 

Harry nodded. “Tell him we would be happy to, and we will send a ship for them. Then write to Lord Manderly, tell him to send two ships to Seaguard for that purpose with adequate protection. I wouldn't trust the Freys with their safety, so they will have to journey by boat.” 

Luwin made a note. “Lord Manderly writes he had to kick a few more southerners out of White Harbour who snuck into the North to preach against the Old Gods. He writes that it is becoming more common as time goes by. “ 

Harry just nodded. It wasn't anything unexpected. “Thank him for letting me know. Then write that he should just keep doing what he has been doing. If it gets too bad, we will discuss closing our borders off to the south completely.” 

Luwin winced. “He won't be happy to hear that my lord. It will be bad for trade.” 

Harry shrugged. “Your right. Doesn't mean there is any better options and he can still trade with Essos.” 

Harry turned back to his projects while Luwin carried on speaking. “The Mormonts write that they are leaving Bear Island. “ 

“Have Benjen be prepared to ride out to meet them with a suitable escort once they have been spotted near Winterfell.”  

Luwin shuffled through a few more pages. “Lord Karstark asks if you will be willing to inspect the soldiers now that they have gotten back from Skagos. To make sure they meet your requirements.” 

He paid a bit more attention. “Tell him I will be there within the next fortnight. That should give me plenty of time to be back before the Lords arrive for the wedding.” 

“The rest is minor correspondence my lord. The letters are in your office.” 

Harry turned back to his projects. “I'll take care of those tomorrow. Was there anything else?” 

Luwin hesitated before speaking. “I also received a request from an old colleague of mine my lord. From the Citadel. He asked for permission to travel to Winterfell.” 

That was enough to bring his attention back to the Maester. “I'm not sure I'm interested in having a foreign Maester snooping around. What does a Maester want to travel here for anyway? Most of our innovations have probably made their way South by now.” Not that he was trying very hard to hide them. New farming practices and book keeping required you to teach others how to use the new methods after all. 

“Archmaester Marwyn was always... strange, my lord. He is obsessed with magic. He dedicated his entire life to learning all he could of the arts. It doesn't surprise me that he wants to come to Winterfell my Lord. I'm only surprised it has taken him so long. “ 

Luwin had his full attention now. “Did you say that he has dedicated his life to learning all he could of magic?” 

The poor man nodded hesitantly. ”Yes, My Lord.” 

“Yes, tell him he is welcome.” This was too good of an opportunity to pass up. Hopefully the man wasn't a fraud. Even if he couldn't use any magic himself, he might know quite a bit of the subject due to all the research he has apparently done. 

Hopefully he would be able to significantly improve Harrys own understanding. If so, he wouldn't mind teaching him a bit in return. 

Luwin looked like he was slightly regretting telling Hadrian about this but he complied. ”Yes my Lord. I will let him know. “ 

He folded up his notes before bowing slightly. “If that is all my lord, may i take my leave? “ 

Harry turned back towards the desk and waved dismissively. “Yes, thank you Luwin.” 

He was inspecting his next rock before the door clicked shut. “Now lets see what happens when I combine Sun-Dusk-Air-Stone." 

Progressing

Progressing 

“-made over two hundred thousand gold dragons from the sales so far, after Lord Manderly took his portion. Most of that comes from merchants from Braavos. A decent portion comes from the Westerlands  and a few of the other Free Cities.” 

Harry hummed happily and drummed his fingers on the table. “Good, so Lord Manderly avoided selling in the South.” 

He looked back at the Maester. “Did he say what sold the best?” 

Luwin went through his notes. “He said the silks were the most profitable item. Not only did they take up only a small amount of space, but nobles and wealthy merchants were desperate to get their hands on them.” 

He leaned back into his chair and cast a gaze at his two uncles who had a look of absolute shock on their faces. Harry allowed himself a brief smirk at sight of both of them rendered speechless, before he continued. 

“Send a letter to Manderly and tell him to start preparing for a second trip once the new warship is finished. Focus on what he found to be the most valuable this time around.” 

Luwin wrote a note for himself to do that before looking up. “Will Lord Benjen be joining the trip this time My Lord?” 

Both of his uncle's eyes snapped to him. Harry answered before they could speak. “No, he should have got a good amount of experience on ships from the one voyage.” He finished and raised an eyebrow at his uncle questionably. 

Benjen nodded slowly. “Aye I learnt a lot. But I wouldn't say I'm an expert at sea yet. Another trip would help though. I feel there is still much to learn.” He finished with a hopeful voice. 

Harry shook his head. He didn't even need to think about his answer. “No. Sorry uncle. But it's time for you to start taking on duties regarding your future castle. Anymore sailing can be done from or around Sea Dragon Point.” 

He smirked. “Besides, it also time for you to get married.” 

Harry burst into laughter at the almost haunted look on his uncles face. He had gone bone white and his pupils dilated. He found it hilarious that Benjen found marriage a genuinely more terrifying prospect than spending months at sea, dealing with pirates, storms and slavers with the only protection coming from a wooden boat that could be sunk in any number of ways. 

After taking a few moments to compose himself, Benjen spoke. “So it's happening then?” 

Harry nodded. “Aye. You will marry Dacey Mormont in three moons here in Winterfell. Afterwards you both will travel to Sea Dragon Point and start ruling. “ 

Ned smiled and pulled Benjen into a side hug. “No need to be so nervous Ben. Dacey is a good woman. I'm sure the both of you will be happy together.” 

Benjen smiled shakily and visibly gathered himself. After a few moments he looked back at Harry with a firm look in his eyes. If Harry didn't witness it himself then he would never have guessed Benjen was on his way to a panic attack a few moments ago. 

“If I'm going to be ruling Sea Dragon Point, I need to know the state of construction. How far along is the castle?”  

It was a fair question. Harry nodded at Benjen and gestured to Luwin to grab the binder with the information on Sea Dragon Point from the shelf and bring it over.  

In the meantime, he stood and poured himself another cup of water from his jug. When that was done, he called a servant to bring him another jug of boiled water and went back to his desk.  

Benjen had the binder open and was looking at some of the sketches that Harry had drawn up of the finished project. 

Benjen traced his fingers across the page. “I've seen this before nephew, and I will repeat myself. This is good. This is very good. Too good even. It will take over a decade, perhaps even over two to build something like this. It will also cost an incredible amount of coin.” 

Harry waved him off. “It should hopefully be finished within the next three years or so. Your taxes will be higher than most lords for a few decades after it is finished to help pay Winterfell back for its construction. But that shouldn't be too much of a problem once trade starts to pick up on that side of the North.” 

Benjen choked. “Three years?!” 

Hadrian snorted. “Aye. I started this project years ago if you recall. I went all in on it. Hired as many free hands as I could find. Still, what really spread up the construction was the Giants.” 

Benjen sputtered. “Giants? You're using them to build this?” 

Harry smirked when his uncle Ned just watched with amusement on his face. He already knew this after all. Being in far more meetings like this than Benjen, who seemed perfectly happy to spend his time messing around with Hadrians cousins. 

“Of course I'm using the Giants to build. What else would I use them for?” 

“I thought you would have them trained. To join that army you're so set on building.” 

He shook his head. “I would like nothing more than to have them join. But their numbers are too few right now. Once they've had some time to have some more children and the Giants have started to become more comfortable in the North, then I will slowly start adding them. I don't see that happening for a while though. Not a few years at least. Even then, the number of Giants in the army will remain low for decades. They aren't a resource I can risk losing so easily. Not when their gene pool is so low.” 

Benjen scrunched his eyebrows. “Gene pool?” 

Harry just waved him off. “Don't worry about it.” 

Benjen looked doubtful but let it go. “How far along is the construction then?” 

He took a sip of water. “The foundation of the castle is complete as well as the main hall. The barracks are done and one of the walls is beginning construction. The docks are finished for now. They are still small for now, as there isn't many ships coming in that way. That can be expanded in the future though. Other than that, most of the focus so far has been on building up a proper sewer system that can easily be expanded. That is almost complete as well. The rest hasn't been started yet.”  

Benjen leant back with a genuinely stunned look on his face. “Thats a lot more than i would have thought.” 

He smiled. “Truly, the giants are a blessing. The sewers weren't meant to be ready for at least another year or so. They have sped up construction massively.” 

Benjen nodded slowly. “It sounds like it.” 

He allowed his uncle a moment before he continued with a more serious tone. “There still aren't that many smallfolk besides the construction workers, but it is starting to fill up more. I can't leave another person in charge for much longer. So after the wedding you are going to have to take over your new duties.” 

Benjen looked at him with determination. “Aye, i will nephew. You can count on me.” 

Harry smiled and relaxed. “Good. Remember you also need to pick a new name.” He finished with a wink. 

Benjen groaned. “What about Pointer? For Sea Dragon Point?” 

Harry just stared at him while uncle Ned broke out into laughter. Even Maester Luwin, who had been keeping a respectful silence so far, let out a few chuckles.  

Benjen looked genuinely insulted. “What?” 

“Ha! Ha! Ha! Thats a terrible name brother.” Ned replied. 

He recoiled. “It's not that bad! Its descriptive!” 

Ned started laughing again. Harry just enjoyed the moment. His uncle's laugher had been rare the last few moons, since word came of Jon Arryns death. 

Benjen deflated. “Fine. Fine.  What about Seascout? Because we scout the sea for signs of the Ironborn?” 

Harry just sighed. ”Uncle, I think you should ask your wife for ideas.” 

He just crossed his arms. “Fine, fine. I still don't see what's wrong with them.” 

They just enjoyed the moment for a while before Benejn spoke up again. “Nephew, i appreciate you going through all this effort for me, but would it not be better to focus on Neds castle now? As you said, the foundations of mine are done. The rest can be built overtime.” 

Harry frowned. “I have been working on Moat Cailin. Since before the end of the Ironborn Rebellion. But I see your point. I have only had a hundred men working there and progress has been slow. So far they have only managed to clear much of the ground and knock down a single tower. I have been putting it off because it won't bring in immediate benefits like a new port on the Western Coast will. But with things becoming more chaotic down South, perhaps it's time to go all in.” 

The mood immediately sobered at the reminder of what was happening in the South. 

After Jon Arryn was killed. Lysa Arryn declared war on the Mountain Clans. Declaring them savages and heathens. The Faith was quick to join in. Encouraging all true believers of the Seven to destroy the savages. From his spies' reports, their numbers quickly swelled, and many travelled to join the armies of the Lords of the Vale who were quick to muster. Eager to avenge their lords death. 

The problem was that after a moon, they failed to find any large groupings of the clans that they could vent their anger on. 

The army had thousands of undisciplined smallfolk in it. They quickly ran out of patience and started going after every worshipper of the Old Gods they could find. Which means that they started pouring out of the Vale into the Riverlands in short order, as there were a lot more Old Gods worshippers in the Riverlands than anyone wanted to admit. The Riverlands was swiftly becoming consumed with chaos. This wasn't helped by a lot of Septons in the Crowlands and the Reach seeming to think that this was a good idea, joining in. 

Unfortunately the King was too deep into his cups to really care at the moment. It seemed that the death of Jon Arryn broke something in the man. He was very close to calling for a war on the Mountain Clans himself. His brother Stannis managed to talk him out of it though, after he was made Hand of the King and convinced Robert to put down the Faith Militant properly. The King apparently wanted to name Ned to the position but decided against it due to all the trouble with the Faith. Knowing it would probably just make the problem worse. 

The crown was preparing to wage war on the Faith now. 

Honestly, Harry had no idea how that would go. He expects the crown to put them down in short order, but fanatics have a way of multiplying. Baelish is also a tricky man. He half expects for Robert to die in some accident. Hell, he half expects Robert to commit suicide via battle because of how depressed the man seemed. 

“Is there nothing we can do to help?” 

He looked up at his uncle's question and at the solemn look in his uncle's eyes he hesitated.  

Harry could easily have Baelish assassinated. That would take care of the driving factor behind the recent resurgence of the Faith. It would also create a martyr as he was well loved by the smallfolk in the Vale. Which may cause their numbers to swell even more.  

He could have his skinchangers and his army sweep into the Riverlands to hunt the fanatics down. Which would kill a lot of them, but he expects that as the chaos grows worse. More will join the Faith out of sheer desperation. A drowning man will grab onto anything that looks like it would help them float. Even if in his struggles he would push another man down. 

He expects that Stannis knows having Northerners hunt the fanatics down would only cause more problems. Hence why the North hadn't received a call to war like the Crownlands, Stormlands and the Riverlands. The Westerlands, Dorne and the Reach were staying out of it for now. 

At this stage, things have come close to spiraling out of control. At any point they could get even more chaotic and Harry had no desire to invite that chaos the Norths way. So while he could probably put down the Faith. It would require a lot more blood than his uncle was probably expecting and Harry had no desire to shed Northern blood when it wouldn't benefit the Kingdom. 

“No uncle. There isn't much we could do. I could call the banners and march South. I could probably hunt down the Faith Militant. But it would take a decent amount of time and cause a lot of Northern blood to be shed. Having Old Gods worshippers fight them would also probably make the situation worse before it gets better. I have no desire for my people to die in the Riverlands for little gain. Doing so would also mean that many of my projects would have to put on hold, meaning the North would suffer. Still, i will have letters sent to the Riverlands encouraging the lords to have the Old God worshippers flee North.” 

His uncle looked more somber the longer he talked. But Harry was happy that at least he didn't argue. 

Seeing that the mood had grown a bit too somber for his liking he decided to change the topic.  

“Maester, how goes the Navy on Bear Island?” 

The room seemed to breathe easier now that the topic changed.  

Even Maester Luwin seemed less tense as he answered. “The speed of construction has increased dramatically my Lord and the costs have also decreased a lot. It seemed we underestimated just how much damage Jorah Mormont and his wife were causing.” 

Benjen frowned. “I don't see one man and a woman could make such a big difference.” 

Ned, who also seemed almost relieved about the change in topic, was the one who answered. “Lynessa Hightower had very expensive tastes. Tastes Jorah was only too happy to cater to. That means a lot of the time workers weren't getting paid when they were meant to, so a lot of them just didn't work. Slowing everything down. Or supplies weren't bought when they were meant to be and so they had to wait for them to arrive. Overall, he caused a mess. I don't know how he expected to get away with in the long term. The only reason I think it took Maege so long to discover him, was because she just didn't want to think badly about her nephew.” 

Luwin cleared his throat. “Yes, it seemed he had a larger impact than we thought. Things have sped up dramatically my lord. The construction should be finished within a year at this rate.” 

Harry smiled. “Excellent. I will have to speak to Lord Manderly. We are going to need some of the Stark ships to travel to that coast and for the Lord to lend us some experienced captains who are willing to teach.” 

He leaned back. “Next, you should have finished going through the reports from Lord Karstark by now? Yes?” 

Luwin nodded firmly. “I have. I have summarized it for you here my lord. “ He passed Hadrian a stack of parchment. Harry put it down, deciding to go over it later. Then gestured for Luwin to continue. 

The Maester quickly did so. “The war was overall a great success. The Skagosi did not put up much of a challenge in open battle, even when they had a rough parity in numbers. I believe less than three hundred men were lost in the whole campaign for close to one thousand five hundred dead Skagosi warriors. Overall, the army performed admirably.” 

Luwin took a breath before continuing. “That said, Lord Karstark said there were a few places they could improve. Discipline can be improved more in some areas. Higher standards for officers will also be needed in the future as it seemed that not many of them displayed initiative. Waiting for Lord Karstarks order before they ever did anything. Including setting the camps.” 

Harry nodded thoughtfully. About what he expected. The army is still new. Improvements are going to be constant. 

Luwin continued. “That said, his biggest complaint was about the skinchangers.” 

That caught Hadrians attention. “Oh?” 

“Lord Karstark believes that the army should have skinchangers of their own who are trained with the army. Apparently, the skinchangers that were sent were lacking in discipline, one got themselves killed before they even arrived on the island, and the others either didn't show up to where they were needed or couldn't keep up with the army on a march. Slowing everything down because Lord Karstark wasn't willing to leave such an asset behind. The army also suffered from multiple ambushes and couldn't track the enemy without skinchangers present. He writes they are an important asset and that their value cannot be understated. Therefore, he wants as many of them as he can get.” 

Harry hesitated. Skinchangers were dangerous. A few rouge ones could do a lot of damage. He would really prefer to have them all sworn directly into his service. Still, he knows that it is unrealistic in the long term. The Children have said that magic is growing stronger. More will be born before long. The art will become more common. Harry will just have to increase his plans to come up with counters. 

“Tell Lord Karstark I will consider it. When he arrives in Winterfell we will speak about it more at length and decide just what role they will have in the army and how and when they can be used. I will not have the General of the army spying on all the lords in the North. Not that I believe he will, but the next General might. Perhaps I can lend him one of my Huntsmen to train a few for the army but the numbers must be limited.” 

Luwin made a note. “As you say.” 

Harry rubbed his temples. Damn sometimes he hated ruling. A lot of this shit was just tedious. 

“Next. The food situation. How have my new crops been growing?” 

Luwin brightened. “You were correct that rice would grow well in the Neck my lord. Lord Reed has expressed....” 

Skagos

Skagos 

Rickard Karstark stepped onto the beach with an exhale of relief. He never did like ships. The swaying always felt unnatural. He could only count his blessings that the trip to Skagos from Whiteharbour was short.  

He took a few seconds to just look at the scenery. The beach they landed near was empty, surrounded by cliffs with only one clear path leading into a forest that travelled further up the slope of the mountain that made up Skagos. 

After a few moments he brought himself back to the present.  

He turned to his aide who was waiting patiently by his side as always. 

“Jorgen, tell the majors to set camp. I want sentries on those cliffs and scouts around the forest. Then get my command tent ready.” 

He gave one of those solutes that Hadrian insisted be drilled into the men. “Aye, General.” 

Richard gave a grunt of approval as he quickly turned and started making his way to the Majors of each Cohort who were offloading their ships.  

With that done, he turned and started inspecting the men as they went about their duties for the next few hours. Barking commands to soldiers who were doing things wrong or giving punishments to those who looked as if they were slacking in their duties. 

After that he went to his tent that had already been set up. Walking past the men guarding the entrance and sitting behind his desk, going through the reports that the quartermaster provided him that spoke about how many supplies were unloaded and how many more were left. 

One thing that Richard had quickly discovered when it came to building the Northern Army was that there was a lot more copper counting involved than he originally thought possible. 

They needed to keep the army as efficient as possible if they wanted it to grow into a truly powerful force in the future. This meant they had to know how many supplies they had, how many they would use and where all these came from. Not to mention keeping track of all the soldiers in the army. Their training, accomplishments, payments and equipment. 

It truly was an enormous amount of work. Too much for him to handle on his own. Thats why he had a few people working under him, such as the quartermaster to keep track of equipment, the paymaster to keep track of how much each soldier needs to get paid and when. There is also a master of arms back at the main base of the army to keep track of the troops and their training.  

Most of Rickards job during peacetime was to read through these reports and approve them if he found them satisfactory. As well as to give directions to each Major for their Cohorts to follow. Even that ended up being a lot of work, but it was far more manageable. 

After an hour or so of going through reports and making sure the supplies were unloaded in a quick manner and that not too many things were missing he signed his approval. It was impossible to stop thievery entirely. He and the quartermaster put a stop to it whenever they could or whenever there was a large amount stolen. But as the army was still relatively new and the army was still chaotic in some places, he was forced to let things go more often than he would like. He knew that this would change over time. As the culture of discipline started to sink deeper into the army things would change. They already had in some ways. It used to be a lot worse in the beginning. He felt like he was executing people every other day in the beginning. 

Now it had been nearly a fortnight since he had to make an example of anyone. 

He took a few minutes to have his dinner when it was brought to him before taking another walk around their camp.  

He nodded approvingly when he saw the tents were lined up in neat rows. The guards on duty seemed to still be performing their jobs properly. The latrine pit was dug a decent way away from where the camp was. Discipline seemed to be holding. It was a fair sight better than he could have hoped for. 

Things weren't perfect yet. Not even close. But the army had already come much further than he thought it would have in only a few short years. Still, Rickard would have preferred to have another year or two to fix up some of the issues it still had. 

Unfortunately, with things going as they were down South, Hadrian Stark decided that the formation of the army needed to be sped up. The best way to do this was to blood some of the men. The veterans would make training new soldiers all the easier and they would have learnt the importance of discipline. Making sure that the culture is firmly rooted in what they were trying to build.  

Rickard found that he couldn't disagree with that sentiment. For all that he tried to force discipline on the men, it could be trying at times. Most of his recruits were green boys looking to earn personal glory. This army was all about unity and discipline. He had to break many of the recruits down and rebuild them. A process that unfortunately took a lot of effort and time. With a limited number of trainers it was a trying task at times. All of them could march in formation properly and they fought as a group during spars, but their discipline still wavered sometimes. 

This campaign would give him a core group of veterans who could help him build up the rest of the army when they returned home.  

After another round of checking thing over, he returned to his tent and had the majors and the quartermaster summoned to him. 

It was barely five minutes later that they arrived.  

“General!” They gave acceptable solutes and held their positions with a decent amount of discipline. 

“At ease.” He called and gestured for them to sit around the table. 

When they had done so Rickard stood. “This is an important task that was given to us. Can you tell me why that is?” 

The men looked confused. Looking at each other for answers. Rickard suppressed a sigh. He would have to make sure the next Majors were slightly more intelligent than this bunch who were mostly chosen for their loyalty and ability to follow orders. 

He continued before the silence became uncomfortable. “If Lord Starks only goal was to pacify Skagos and bring it back under Northern control properly, it wouldn't be too difficult for him to do. He could summon an army of ten thousand men easily and wash over this island before the savages had any idea what was going on. Instead, he only sent two Legions. Two thousand men. The reason for this is simple. This is our proving ground. This is where we are meant to show the North our worth. I will not have us fail! Is that clear?” 

“Yes General!” They chorused.  

He sat back down. “Good, so let us begin to plan.” 

He gestured to the map. “Lord Stark sent scouts a while ago. They have mapped a lot of the island. This map shows where we can find Lords Crowl, Stan and Magnar.  We are to defeat each of the lords and take their heirs back to Winterfell with their mothers. No harm is to come to the heirs, is this clear? Lord Stark needs them to eventually return to these islands to rule once they have been educated properly. Their mothers are to come with to ensure they are taught about Skagos as well.” 

They all gave their assent. Rickard still glared at them for a few moments longer to ensure the message really sank in before continuing.  

“Those scouts are meant to meet us in the next few days. Either on our march or they will come to the camp first. This is important because each of them are skinchangers. They will make our lives a lot easier in the days to come. Unfortunately we cannot afford to wait for them without giving the Skagosi the initiative so they will just have to catch up. Should they approach whilst we are marching, you are to direct them to me.  We lost the skinchanger that was given to us, that fool Gerry, on the ship due to his own stupidity, so it is very important that our men don't accidentally kill them when they approach. Make sure they know that.” 

After waiting to see if the message sunk in he continued. 

“This is the route we will take...” 

Line Break 

Two days later the men were marching up the steep slopes of the island once their camp had been properly fortified. Three hundred men had been left to guard it, their supplies and the ships. Rickard determined that it should be more than enough men as the area they chose to camp was well protected.  

The rest of the men were marching for House Magnar as they were the closest to their location and the easiest to get to.  

The men had been marching for hours over steep rocks, and windy paths. Up and down steep slopes. But despite that, they seemed to have handled it okay. All that time marching that Hadrian had insisted on seemed to have paid off. At this rate, they would reach their destination the next day. 

They found a clearing a few hours before sunset that looked to be decently defensible with a good view of the surroundings that he decided to stop the march at. He was quick to order the men to begin preparing defenses.  

Tired from the march, they still did what they were told. All of them began digging a decently large trench around their position that was done by the time nightfall came around. Rickard still wasn't ready to let his guard down however. They hadn't seen any Skagosi since the arrived on the island. This could only mean that they knew they were here and were keeping out of sight. 

With this in mind, he had two hundred men on watch at all times and had the rest sleep in their armor. 

His foresight paid off when he was awoken in the middle of the night to the sound of horns. He was on his feet and armed quickly as he excited the tent to see what caused the night guards to signal an attack.  

There were a few tents on the outskirts that had caught fire and quite a bit of screaming coming from the North side of the camp. He made his way there with all due haste. He arrived to the sounds of fighting and screaming. Around four hundred soldiers were pushing back an equal number of men riding strange mounts and on foot. As he watched, the attackers started to flee. This quickly turned into a rout. 

He found the Major that was in charge of this side of the camp and barked. “Report.” 

The man stood straight. “I'm still getting all the information General. What I have so far suggests that around five hundred men attacked. Around a hundred of them were mounted while the rest were on foot or were archers. Their mounts seemed to have no trouble with the trenches. They just jumped right over. But the rest of them were slowed down. I believe they were trying to raid us. They underestimated us though. The guards noticed them and alerted us in time that we were able to push them back easily.” 

He just grunted. “Be ready to report the casualties in the morning. For now, those who fought can go back to sleep or to a healer. Replace them and the guards with those who were already resting or didn't fight.” With that he turned around and marched back to his tent. Eager to get some more sleep. 

The next morning the number of casualties came back, and it was more promising than he expected. Only sixteen of his men died with a further thirty injured while the Skagosi lost over fifty men and another hundred had been injured. Most of his casualties were from the beginning of the battle before reinforcements arrive in force. This was promising.  

The reason for this seemed to be simple. His men were better armored and armed, while the Skagosi often used weapons that were often made from bone or they were rusty. None of them had steel armor and even their leather armor was of poor quality. His men had better training in general and phalanx formation seemed to be more effective than he could have hoped.  

A short while later he had his men start getting ready for another march while the injured were prepared to be transported back to the camp on the beach. It was another day of grueling marching for those that remained.  

With any luck, they would reach Lord Magnar before nightfall. 

Line Break 

Lord Rickard Karstark watched the sad excuse of an army that lined up across from him and honestly felt something he never expected to.  

Pity. 

The difference between the two forces were obvious. Not only was Lord Magnar severely outnumbered. But Rickards army was clearly superior in every way. From discipline to equipment.  

There were barely a thousand men he would be facing. A lot of them were greybeards or greenboys.  

The only advantage that Lord Magnars army had was that they were fresh while his was tired from a long day of marching and fending off small ambushes. 

Still, he would make sure not to underestimate them.  

Under his wary gaze Lord Magnar rode his unicorn to the middle of the field and waited. He would not have it said he didn't have honor, so Rickard rode to meet him. 

The Lord was a large man, approaching the size of Lord Umber and seemed to be even more gruff. He started the talks without even a greeting. “What's dis den? You mainlanders fnly come to take ou land ey?” He spat on the ground.  

Rickard kept composed. “Lord Stark is your liege lord. Just as he is mine. Your ancestors swore fealty to them. Did you really think you could keep killing his messengers without any punishment? That you could keep ignoring his summons to Winterfell?” 

Lord Magnar burst into laughter. “Ha! Ha! Ha! Watve dem Starks eveh done fer us ey? Why should me an me men listen to a cunt so far away?” 

He only frowned. “He was willing to give you permission to build up a small fishing fleet again, so long as you followed his laws. He was willing to teach you new farming practices that could have doubled your yield. He wanted to bring you all into the North properly.” 

All of that was true as far as Rickard knew. Hadrian had spoken to him about the fleet he was willing to let the Skagosi have. While he wasn't happy about it, he understood the logic. With the Manderly fleet expanding and the Stark fleet being built he knew that the Skagosi fleet wouldn't have posed any major danger. Even their raids would have to stop as they could get food from fishing as Bear Island does and have no more excuses for raiding. The Skagosi would be tied further into the North and would no longer rule without Winterfell. 

Once again the Lord turned and spat. “Pretty promises.” 

Rickard sighed. “I will offer you one last chance to surrender. Your heir and wife will be taken to Winterfell to be raised into loyal lords. You can keep ruling until he comes of age and all of your men will live.” 

It was a generous offer. The Lord would truly lose nothing in the long run. His line would still rule in the end. 

For a third time he turned and spat on the floor. 

Rickard just nodded. “So be it.” Before turning and riding back towards his army. 

The battle started a few minutes later. The First Legion marched in neat, organized rows with gleaming spears held over their shields, while the Skagosi rushed in a wild disorganized mob. The only tactic that the Skagosi employed at all was when a hundred of their mounted unicorns tried to flank them. It didn't work as tactics for cavalry charges had been drilled into the men. The outer two ranks turned and brought their spears up. Holding their ground. A few men died but the formation held. 

The rest of the battle was a slaughter. 

That night, he was housed Lord Magnars castle. His army had less than forty deaths whilst the Skagosi had over three hundred. With that number being so low only because they broke and ran when they realized how badly they were outmatched.  

He was very pleased with the result. He didn't even have to use the other six hundred men he had with him. 

The Magnar child and his mother were recovered with almost no issue, besides the mother trying to skewer a few men when she was found. She had since calmed down and would be sent back to the camp in the morning with her son, escorted by a group of a hundred soldiers in case any Skagosi were to try something.  

Truly, this war was going to be a lot easier than he thought.  

Line Break 

A fortnight later Rickard cursed as he brought his shield up, blocking the arrows that would have hit him before taking a look at his foes. 

He bit back a swear when they melted back into the mountains after the ambush. He didn't give the order for his men to pursue, knowing how badly that went the last time. 

He looked back at his men, many of whom were warily looking around their surroundings. He cursed on more time before calling for a retreat back to a clearing with a good view of the surroundings he saw an hour earlier in their march. 

Once there, he called a strategy meeting with his two Majors.  

The men trudged into the camp. Visibly tired but still alert.  

He wasted no time on formalities.  

“This isn't working.” Truly an understatement. After their first victory against Lord Magnar the men were in high spirits. He took advantage of that and called for a march against Lord Crowl as soon as he could.  

Unfortunately this march was a lot more difficult. 

Lord Crowl was much higher up the mountain. That meant that the men had to march up extremely steep slopes at times and marching was slow and exhausting. The number of ambushes had also escalated. They were constantly attacked. Never by more than fifty men and never up close. It was all archery. Or else they threw rocks at them from cliffs or tried to set up landslides. After the first one barely missed his army, he was a lot more wary of those. Whenever they tried to follow the ambushers, the men were ambushed again with often worse results. This had slowly whittled down their numbers. 

Still, his men kept discipline and marched on.  

Only to reach the cave that Crowl called a castle and find it empty. The Lord nowhere to be seen. So they started to search, only to run around in circles. Setting off ambush after ambush.  

The men were tired and disheartened. Deaths and injuries kept adding up. They had wasted days wandering around only to have nothing to show for it. Something had to change, soon. 

Major Jon grimaced. “Weve tried to send scouts, but these men know the mountains better than we do. They keep disappearing. Otherwise, I'm not sure what we can do. We can comb the whole mountain in larger groups but that would take a long time. Even then, there's no guarantee they won't slip past us if they have secret paths.” 

He scowled. Unfortunately, he was correct. Himself and Hadrian had expected this problem when they planned the war. They knew that the Skagosi could do what the Mountain clans of the Vale have done for thousands of years but they had a plan in place to help them. A few of Hadrian's skinchangers were sent to the island to map it out before the war started. They would make finding the Skagosi easy if they were here.  They were meant to meet up with his force within a few days of his arrival but he had seen nothing from them. He feared they were dead. 

At this rate, his best option would be to retreat back to the camp on the beach and send a message asking for more to be brought. Unfortunately that would be hard to do. Other than the Children, skinchangers were rare. Hadrian had less than a dozen who were trained. Of those, three had been sent to the island to scout. While one was sent to march with his army. Unfortunately, that fool had less than a few moons of training and got his bird eaten by a hawk whilst he was too deep in it and committed suicide due to the trauma whilst they were still sailing. Rickard felt like the gods were cursing them. 

Rickard waved a hand. “Dismissed.” 

He sat for hours trying to think of a solution, only to come up empty.  

It was the next day that the solution found him. 

A small man, dressed in furs sat before his desk. 

Rickard struggled not to reach over and strangle him for what he just heard. The frogman had the good sense to at least grimace and keep quiet. “So the other two are back at the beach where they are useless. Whilst the reason it took you so long to catch up was because we were marching too fast?” 

The grimace on his face deepened. “Aye my Lord. I also had to dodge a lot of Skagosi on the way.” 

He wanted to yell. But he forced himself to calm down. At least the man was here now. Still, he would have a talk with Hadrian when he got back to Winterfell. He knew none of the skinchangers were trained for war, but this was still ridiculous. If the army was going to be forced to rely on them, then they needed to know how the army functioned. They needed to be trained to keep up. They needed to have a more than one with the army in case something happened. Like with that never be damned enough fool Gerry. 

Still, he supposes that is what this war with Skagos was about. Finding the flaws in the army and fixing them before they faced a real threat. 

He massaged his temples. ”Do you at least know where Lord Crowl is?” 

The mans face brightened immediately. “Aye, I noticed him a few days back while searching for you. Kept an eye on him. He is with Lord Stane. They are gathering all the men they can while these men here distract you.” 

He took a deep breath. Must not scream. 

An hour later, he and his men were marching again. This time, down the slope.  

Six days later, they met an army of two thousand on a mostly flat plateau led by the two lords. His men were irritated and so was he.  

The slaughter was even worse than the last battle. 

A Falcons Fall

A Falcons Fall 

“May the smith bless your hands, so that you can keep doing his work my child and may the crone bless you with her wisdom. Think long and hard whether this is the path you want to follow. Whether this will bring you satisfaction. ”  

The man looked up from his place on his knees. Tears in his eyes. “Thank you, my lord. I have thought about it and I'm sure. This is what I'm meant to do. I will work twice as hard. Make twice as many swords. The Seven will see those heretics burn for their crimes. I will make sure plenty of my steel is used in this holy mission.” 

“Of course. Justice comes to all. The Father will see the scales balanced. Just make sure to live in the meantime. ” 

The man bowed again before walking hurriedly back down the stairs of the sept and moving past the crowd that had formed to watch him preach. All of them were either bowing their heads in prayer or calling out to him in reverence. 

He clasped his hands together and raised his voice. “I'm sorry my fellow faithful but I have other duties I need to see to. As much as I would like to spend more time with my flock, the Seven have burdens that we all must carry. Some more enjoyable than others.” 

With that, he turned around and made his way back into the sept, walking through the halls, past septons and septas who bowed their heads to him as he passed. It wasn't long before he finally made it to the comfort of his quarters. 

Now that he finally had some privacy, he allowed a sneer to come upon his face. 

‘Sheep.’ He thought derisively.  

The smallfolk were so easily manipulated that even he found it sightly sad. Just say a few words, give an out of context quote of the Seven Pointed Star and he had them eating out of the palm of his hand. When that wasn't enough all he had to do is manufacture something to make them angry and direct that anger towards a goal of his choosing. Not even the Septons had the intelligence to question him for long. 

That man earlier was an example of how stupid these people are. Marik, a smith from a small village a good distance away from Gulltown had his town raided by what he believes was mountain clansmen while he was visiting family in another village. There were no survivors left. So he swore vengeance and came to Gulltown because he heard that's were others who survived other raids were gathering. Now Petyr has another loyal smith who will make steel for his followers as fast as he can and sell it as cheaply as he can with no thought of profit in his mind.  

What the man couldn't have known was that he had been responsible for the attack himself. He hired a man to hire another man who in turn hired a small but deadly mercenary company to raid several of the villages in the Vale over a year ago. Thanks to this over half a dozen villages were burnt to the ground and made to look like attacks from the mountain clansmen.  Of course he had those men killed soon after the mercenaries got back onto the ship and left, so that no trail led back towards him. Then he hired pirates of the Three Sisters through a similar method to kill the mercenary company once they were at sea. Leaving almost no evidence of his deeds that could lead back to him. 

These massacres caused a lot of rage within the Vale. Both among the smallfolk and some of the Lords. 

The best part for Petyr was that they had no idea it was the coin that they were donating that was used to fund their own hatred. There were hundreds of people who were not only willing but eager to give the Faith everything they own in order to get some sort of absolution from the Gods and thousands more who were willing to give regular donations of coin, including some wealthy lords. Petyr used a small portion of this wealth to open up some soup kitchens to show the illusion he was helping while using the rest to either make more coin or to fund his other ventures such as the sellswords. 

Petyr was good at using this rage to his advantage. He would use other septons to preach against the Old Gods and their followers while making sure that his sermons were more calm. Calling for nothing but justice. Making himself look like more of a moderating factor who was trying to decrease tensions from both sides. Getting more and more influence among the masses and even among some lords. Either directly from those who would like him to try and decrease tensions or though his proxies who had the ear of the fanatics.  Still, he had to be careful not to push too hard too fast. He needed to build up his support before any really major moves were made. There were plenty of Lords who wouldn't tolerate another Faith Militant. Luckily there were plenty who would also support him. Either through genuine worship of The Seven or because they saw an opportunity to use the Faith for their own ends.  

It took years of work and careful scheming. Balancing fanatics with those who were too hesitant to go along with his schemes. He had to be careful and occasionally there were great setbacks. Such as the thousands of fanatics he so easily lost in the North.  

Alas, he had to appease the fanatics who wanted a war right away somehow. Sending some of them North where they could harass those savages seemed like a good idea at the time. Not only would they do some damage, but they would also be out of mind where they could no longer bother him with their incessant nagging.  Unfortunately, Hadrian Stark wiped them out before they could truly do any damage. 

Luckily for Baelish, the Stark child miscalculated. He executed the Septons and fed their blood to the Weirwood tree in Winterfell. No doubt in an attempt to sow fear into the heart of the faithful and prevent future attacks by showing he would use them as fuel for foreign gods. Unfortunately for the Stark whelp and fortunately for Baelish, this news only brought fury to those who were undecided about where they stood regarding the Faith. Bringing in a swell of recruits who were enraged at Hadrian Stark. He took advantage of this to feed the realm with his own rumors. Claiming Hadrian Stark sacrificed their souls in dark rituals. That he wants to destroy the faith. He had dozens of rumors spread. Each retelling more dark than the last. 

He had his numbers grow by the day. Easily replacing those lost with thousands more. Until he was reaching a point where it was difficult to hold back some of the most fanatic again.  

Such as what happened in Kingslanding where a bunch of fools attacked Lord Manderly.  

Petyr didn't care about the Lord at all. But having him killed in Kingslanding would greatly anger the King and might even have him call the banners on the Faith. 

Which is not something he wanted. 

Unfortunately, he was finding it difficult to control what he had built.  

No, Petyr knew he was fast running out of time before one of his followers did something foolish. Unfortunately, when he came up with this scheme, he failed to take into account that most of his followers would be fanatics that could be hard to predict. Now, he is too invested to leave. 

He needed to buy himself some breathing room. The best way to do that would be to cause chaos. 

All that he was looking for now was a way to ignite a spark that would lead to a war. One that wouldn't lead to the King calling his banners on him. One that might even have come with some support from that fool. 

Luckily for Petyr such an opportunity just happened to fall into his lap. 

Knock Knock 

Plastering his face with the most kindly look he could muster he answered the knock at the door. “Enter.” 

One of the higher ranking septons opened it. “Your Holiness, Lord Arryn has arrived to speak to you.” 

Petyr stood gracefully and followed the man to the meeting room where Lord Arryn was waiting.  

The old man was sitting, admiring a mural that depicted The Warrior standing between a you girl and a shape blotted out by darkness. His sword raised in defense. 

“Lord Arryn. It's a pleasant surprise to see you. Apologies for not coming to greet you earlier. I didn't know you were back in the Vale.” This was a lie of course. Petyr knew when Lord Arryn first decided he would leave kingslanding. The spy network he managed to make out of a few dozen loyal septons had more than once proven its worth. 

Who could have guessed that there were so many servants from noble houses who were so eager to confess their sins and the sins of their Lords for absolution from those same sins? 

The Lord of the Vale turned his gaze to Petyr and offered a slight smile. “Thats alright my boy. I travelled here quickly. I didn't expect you to have prepared to welcome me.” 

Petyr bowed his head as humbly as he could. “What can I do for you, my Lord? A man as busy as you must have a reason for your presence.” 

An eyebrow was raised. “Hoh? What if I just wanted to see what you have done with this new sept you were building? Excellent work, by the way. It truly is a marvelous building. While lacking the grandeur of some of the other well-known Septs, it is more comforting and warmer for that humbleness.” 

Petyr did truly have to stop himself from grinning at his words. Truthfully, the Sept was one of his schemes that took the most finesse to accomplish. He had to keep it cheap, build it quickly and make it popular enough to bring smallfolk from all over the Vale for a visit. 

He did this by mostly using volunteers for the labor as well as having the septons in his pocket travel around the Seven Kingdoms collecting donations for his efforts. He also managed to make Lord Grafton, Lord Arryn and even the High Septon donate a large amount for the Sept themselves. Of which the majority of the gold went into his other schemes. The building is humble because Petyr didn't want to waste coin on it and so built it as cheaply as possible. Using decorations tactically displayed to make the inside look better than it really was while making it seem that the sept was meant to look homely instead of grand. 

“Thank you for you for your kindness my lord. I had hoped that the Sept would be larger in the end, but unfortunately we started running out of gold. “ 

Jon leant back into the chair with a hum. “Thats a shame. I will look into sending some more your way when I get back to the Eyrie. My family has always greatly supported the Faith.” 

Petyr resisted the urge to smirk. It always somehow manages to surprise him how little the Lords of Westeros really knew about how to spend gold.  

Still he manages to keep himself looking humble. “That would be greatly appreciated my lord. May the Seven bless you and your newborn son.” 

Petyr was greatly surprised when Lysa finally managed to give birth to a healthy child. He was less surprised when he discovered that the boy was his.  

Jon smiled slightly. “Thank you. It seems the seven decided to finally bless me.”  

More like Lisa finally managed to trick Petyr into getting her pregnant and decided she would keep the babe, unlike all the other times Arryn got her pregnant. 

Really, she wasn't as smart as she thought she was. Luckily nobody had noticed. 

The Hand of the King finally straightened up. “Now as much as I would like to keep the conversation light. I'm afraid I'm here on business Petyr.” 

He nodded. “Of course. I would be happy to help in any way I can My Lord.” 

He only got a nod out of the Old Falcon for that. “I need you to calm down the Faith and get rid of the Faith Militant. “ 

Petyr opened his mouth but was interrupted by a raised hand. “I'm aware you have doing what you can and I have given you as much time as possible. But recently a Lord was attacked in Kingslanding. We can't have peasants getting it into their heads they can attack Lords. The King has decided that either this situation comes under control or he will call the banners and march. I don't want that. So what can be done?” 

Petyr winced. “It isn't that simple my lord. People are angry. No, they are furious about all the attacks from the Mountain Clans.  I have recently started preaching about having them brought to justice as you know, so that I can try and moderate all the other voices calling for a new holy war but I'm afraid the voices keep getting louder.” 

Lord Arryn looked like he aged ten years. “I see.” 

“But...”  

Jon perked up. “But?” 

He put a small frown on his face. “I had an idea recently. It might work but I'm not sure of its feasibility.” 

Lord Arryn frowned. “Go on.” 

“Many of the smallfolk feel as if the Lords aren't doing anything to protect them. There have been no reprisals against the Mountain Clans. They are feeling angry and betrayed. So, I thought, well, what if we really let the more fanatical one's march against those clans? Either they will succeed, in which case the Mountain Clans will no longer be a problem, or they will fail but will at least have had an opportunity to release some of their bloodlust?” 

Jon Arryns frown was much deeper now. “You truly think this will work?” 

Petyr put on the saddest face he could muster. “I truly think there is no other choice. I have recently started hearing talk from some Septons about going into the Riverlands and killing followers of the Old Gods there. I have tried my best to stop talk about a new Holy War, but I'm afraid if something isn't done about the Mountain Clans and they keep attacking settlements, people will start lashing out at any target they can get to. All I have hope of doing right now is directing that rage at a more deserving target. Once the clans are beaten, then hopefully most will have realized the cost of war and will be too tired of fighting to continue their vendetta against those who follow the Old Gods.” 

Lord Arryn drummed his fingers on his armrest. “It does have potential. Most of these people have never fought in a war, they will quickly get tired of it. Despite that I can't go through with this. If the Faith is allowed to conduct one war, it won't be long before they decide to conduct another.” 

Petyr shook his head. “Of course not my lord. That wasn't what I was suggesting. I meant that you call for a war against the clans, with a loyal lord like Lord Royce leading the effort and use the men who are calling for war in place of levies. That way it is still a Lord conducting wars and not the Faith. While the fanatics either die or have their bloodlust satisfied.” 

The drumming stopped and Lord Arryn grimaced. ”I don't like it. There will be a lot of death in such a war.”  

Petyr smiled sadly. “I know. I don't like it either my lord. But my voice is being drowned out. If something doesn't change soon, I fear someone will do something that will cause the King to call his banners. Such a war would cause immeasurably more harm. I have tried everything I could think of to keep things peaceful. It isn't working. Directing their anger at a target that won't cause too much damage is my last idea.” 

“That...has potential. But still, the Vale has been fighting against the clans for millennia. Defeating them isn't so simple.” 

Petyr shrugged. “I wouldn't expect it to be my lord. Nor do I expect them to be wiped out. Even just culling them a bit will hopefully give results. Even if it doesn't work, and there are still calls for a Holy War after this, at least the numbers calling for such will be culled for when the king needs to wipe them out.  ” 

Jon Arryn looked horrified. “You would sacrifice your brothers so easily?” 

Petyr frowned deeply. “Not easily my lord. But my it is my duty to keep the loss of life as low as possible. I fear that if this isn't taken care of, it has the potential to ignite a conflict all over Westeros if not carefully managed. As can be seen by what happened in Kingslanding, this problem isn't just here. It has the potential to erupt in the rest of the Kingdoms as well. So while it would greatly sadden me for so many of my brothers and sisters to die, if the alternative is having tens of thousands more die in the next few years then I feel as if I have no choice.” 

The look Jon Arryan gave him was a mixture between sadness and respect. 

Jon Arryn was quiet for a long time before he eventually stood and made his way out of the room. “Very well. I will make the arrangements. I ride for the Eyrie.” 

He paused at the door. “I'm sorry for the burden that has been placed on you Petyr and thank you for at least trying to help.” 

With that he left. 

Petyr Baelish felt a smirk come across his face.  

All according to plan. 

Line Break-------------------------- 

Its a moon and a half later that he finally gets the raven from Lysa telling him that Jon Arryn has charged Lord Royce to go and cull the Mountain Clans a bit. That he was now leaving the Eyrie and was on his way back to Gulltown so that he could take a ship to Kingslanding. 

Petyr is quick to make an excuse to the rest of the Septons and Septas that he was going on another short pilgrimage to one of the nearby villages. It was something he made sure to do every few moons so that no one would be suspicious when he takes long absences. 

He quickly climbs onto his horse and rides along the road for a while before abruptly turning off of it and riding for half a day through the wild. This trip always makes him nervous. It makes him feel as if he had no control. He could be attacked at any moment and there was nothing he could do about it. 

Alas, needs must.  

Petyr figured out years ago that he would need some men who were only too happy to follow his every order and most importantly keep everything they saw a secret. His reputation as a godly man was one of his greatest tools and he would be loath to lose it easily. 

When he came upon the building next to a small river he let loose a small sigh of relief.  

The three men outside wearing basic rags and standing guard quickly kneeled when they saw him. “Master.” They spoke in unison. 

Their voices brought another ten men outside in short order and they were also quick to kneel. 

Petyr felt a surge of satisfaction. It was truly a burden to get the unsullied without anyone finding out. But in moments like this, it seemed worth every coin and headache. 

He didn't allow himself the opportunity to stop for rest though. He was on a time limit, after all.  

“Come. Prepare to travel. We have work to do.” 

Three days later he stood behind a rock near a narrow pathway on a hill overlooking a small camp filled with a dozen people in the middle of the night. 

He nodded to the unsullied who were lined up in front of him. “Its time.” 

The unsullied wasted no time in sprinting forwards the enemy camp and throwing themselves at the soldiers there. Petyr watched as most men were easily cut down both due to suprise and the skill of the slave soldiers. Even when one of his unsullied was speared through with a sword he still managed to kill his opponent. 

In the end it was a short battle in which he only lost three more of his slaves for over a dozen knights. He knew the battle would have been a lot more difficult if the knights were properly armored or if they were in greater numbers. Or if he didn't know the exact route that Jon Arryn would take to his destination and the place that he always camps when using this route. Luckily for Petyr, Lysa was a wealth of information. She also originally joined Jon on this trip. Faking an illness a few days ago when they were almost to Gulltown. From there it should have been a simple matter to convince the Old Falcon to send her to the nearest holdfast with most of the guards. The old man would have felt honor bound to do so. Making sure that his wife and son had the best protection possible. Leaving himself woefully unprotected. The lord wouldn't think about getting more guards for himself. Not when this road hasn't had an attack in years and he was already in a rush to get back to Kingslanding. 

People who loved their honor were so easy to manipulate. 

When he walked into the camp there was only one enemy left alive. He was forced onto his knees by two of his slaves while a third held a sword to his throat. 

The old mans eyes widened when they saw Baelish. “Petyr...” 

He sounded so confused. “Why?” 

This time when the urge to grin came Petyr held nothing back. “Because chaos is a ladder old man and your death is set to cause a lot of it.” 

There was realization followed by a hint of defiance burning in his eyes. “You won't get away with this!” 

He laughed. “But I already have. You were killed by savages from the clans. There will be outrage of course. When Royce calls the banners there will be a large number of fanatics who will join his army thinking it will be for a glorious purpose. When Royce dies and the the clans inevitably disappear into their holes and there are no enemies to be found, that army will be even angrier. Turning on every Old God worshipper they can find. ” 

Jon grits his teeth. “Robert will march and he will destroy the Faith Militant. I'm the only thing holding him back.” 

Baelish tutted. “Perhaps. But not soon, i think he will be content to watch as the clans who killed his foster father are taught a lesson first. He might even decide to join in. Either way, Robert will have to be careful. Without you there to hold them at bay, the sharks will soon start circling. If he does decide to march anyway, sneaking a dozen fanatics who aren't afraid to die for the cause into his camp will be no difficulty at all. He isn't a very careful man. An assassin can kill him easily, either by poisoning his alcohol or shooting him when hes hunting.” 

There was a look of pure hatred on the old man's face.  

He unsheathed a rusty dagger. “Oh by the way, Lysa sends her regards. She promised to take care of our son.”  

He relished the look on the fools face as he drove his dagger into his chest. Leaving it there with his body to find. Jon Arryn always acted as if he was so much better than Petyr. So much nobler. Well, look where that got him. 

Without sparing Jon a further glance he turned to the unsullied. “Cut off the ears of all the corpses. Loot all the weapons, armor and food. Leave the gold. The clans don't use it. And butcher the horses. They don't know how to ride.” 

Three days later Petyr was back in the Sept preaching to a new group of people. Three days after that, Lysa Arryn sent a raven to every Lord in the Seven Kingdoms. Jon Arryn was dead, killed by the Mountain Clans. 

Reminiscence

Reminiscence

“Check.”

His uncle moved his piece.

Hadrian moved his bishop. ”Check mate.”

After looking over the board for a few seconds Ned released a sigh and tipped his King over. “You win again nephew.”

Harry smirks. “You did better this time.”

He is rewarded with a dry stare in return. “Thats because the last game only lasted five minutes. “

His smirk only widened. 

Ned sighed, slouched back into his chair and took a sip from his goblet. “What made you decide to make this game anyway?”

Harry just shrugged. “I was just getting a bit tired of cyvesse.”

In truth Hadrian was just feeling nostalgic. He wanted something that reminded him of his past life. While the pieces didn't move in this game, it was still chess. Playing it brought back pleasant memories of sitting in the Gryffindor common room playing with Ron while Hermione babbled about the last interesting thing she read. 

These were generally memories he tried to suppress as they always made him sad. They always made him ask ‘What if?’. They made him get lost in the past. 

It wasn't until he started making more progress with his magic with the Children of the Forest that he decided he was going about things the wrong way. Harry decided he would do his best to remember them and honor them in his own ways, instead of trying his best to forget them.

Hence, he made chess in memory of Ron. Then he spent time trying to design a press that could copy books in honor of Hermione. She would want knowledge to be more available than what it is in this world. That one was still a work in progress though. Not least because he also had to find a way to make ink that would allow it to work without smudging.

Ned took another gulp of wine before shaking his head and speaking. “I don't know how you come up with these things.”

Harry felt his lips twitch. “My genius is not to be underestimated.”

Ned laughed. “Your ego is not to be underestimated.”

He smiled before gesturing back to the board. “Another game?”

Ned sighed. “Aye, one more. I'm white this time though.”

Harry just waved his hand and started to reset the board.

His uncle started by moving his leftmost pawn two spaces forward. Harry countered by using one of his knights.

A few minutes went by in silence as they each focused on their moves before Ned broke the silence. “What are you going to do about the Mormonts?”

Harry grit his teeth when he was reminded of that irritation. His uncle had only recently got back from Bear Island and the news he brought wasn't at all pleasant. That fool Jorah Mormont selling slaves was bad enough. He had to waste a good chunk of the gold Harry sent for constructing the naval port on his wife as well.

“What is there to do? Jorah escaped. I don't want to punish the entire family as they seemingly had nothing to do with his idiotic decisions. Maege is one of my most loyal supporters. Bear Island stands to become one of the more important places in the North in the next few decades as the military port becomes finished, and that's not something I want to delay. I will put a bounty on Jorah's head but I can't punish the Mormont's without throwing even more gold away by delaying construction further.”

Ned shot him a look. “The other lords will complain you're showing too much favoritism. Youve already poured a lot of gold into the island and Benjen is going to marry Dacey. Letting them off too lightly for Jorahs slavery will not be seen in a good light.”

Harry waved his hand negligently. “Bah! The lords always complain. They complain about wildlings when they attack. They complain about the lack of fight when they go too long without attacking. They won't do anything but grumble. Besides, I have a few ideas to help them increase the prosperity of their lands. It's not only Bear Island that I hope to improve.”

Ned sighed. “Just don't get so focused on your projects that you ignore politics.”

He nodded slightly. He knew he would always have to try and strike a balance between all the lords.

Before they could continue the door was opened slightly and the voice of one of the guards came through. “My lord, Maester Luwin is asking to speak to you.”

Harry hardly needed to think about a response. If Luwin wanted an audience, it was generally important. He let out a slightly irritated sigh. He was supposed to be taking things easy. “He can enter.”

A few moments later the Maester walked into the solar and greeted them with a deferential nod of the head. “My lords.”

Harry already turned his attention back to the game of chess, he really wasn't feeling up to working right now.  “Yes Luwin?”

The maester was quick to answer. “News from the South my lord. Lord Manderly was attacked by a group of faith fanatics on his way out of Kingslanding.”

Ned stiffened while Harry just nodded absently while sending his castle after one of his uncle's pawns. “I'm aware. The fanatics tried to arrest Manderley and have him stand trial. Something about the North consorting with demons and abominations. ”

His uncle sputtered. “You know? Why wasn't I informed of this? What's being done?”

Harry sighed and finally looked away from the game. “I have spies uncle. One of them is in kingslanding.” Or at least his sparrow was. The man himself was in Duskendale. “I found out about this a few days ago. Lord Manderly is fine. He lost a few men and will probably refuse to sail south again for quite a while, but he is okay and on his way back to White Harbour. “

The tension in his uncles shoulders seemed to loosen at that. Still, he didn't lose his focus. “I'm still not happy about the spies but that's a conversation for another time. Why wasn't I told?”

Harry shrugged. “What difference would it have made? Right now, there's nothing we can really do but wait for Lord Manderly to arrive back in the North.”

Ned pursed his lips. “I still should have been told. I am still your regent, no matter how capable you have been at ruling, I have a duty.”

Harry sighed and nodded. “Very well. I will be sure to inform you of any important news from now on.” In truth, Harry didn't really mean to keep him in the dark. He was just busy and it slipped his mind that he wasn't told.

His uncle relaxed. “Thank you.”

He looked at the board and moved a piece almost negligently. After a moment or two he continued. “Still, what was the Kings response to this? Do you know?”

Harry moved his next piece before answering. “He was furious. It's a terrible look for random members of the faith to think they can judge the nobility. Robert had them executed. He wanted to march off and kill the fanatics causing trouble in the Vale as well, but Arryn talked him out of it. Instead, Jon Arryn is going to be going to the Vale personally.”

Ned took a sip of wine before sighing. “Hopefully he can resolve this mess.”

Harry resisted the urge to laugh. 

He turned his attention back to Luwin. “Was there anything else, Maester?

Luwin shook his head in the negative. “Nothing truly important my lord. A few minor matters, but they aren't urgent. “

Harry smiled and clapped his hands together. “Excellent.  Are my cousins finished with their lessons yet?”

Luwin nodded. “They finished about an hour ago my lord.”

Harry leant back into his chair. “Summon them and Aisha for me would you? “

“It will be done my lord.”

Harry's attention was brought back to his uncle when he was questioned. “What do you want the children for?”

He shrugged, looked at the board and moved his queen. “Check mate. I want to teach them how to play. Hopefully one of them will give me more of a challenge.”

Ned looked the board and then laughed. “You cheeky brat.”

Line break------

The next morning Harry found himself in the Godswood laying with his back against the Weirwood tree with his eyes closed.

For all that it looked as if he was sleeping, Hadrian's mind was hard at work.

This was a recent habit that he would try and force himself to do. Early each morning, before even some of his servants were awake, Hadrian would look into the Weirwood network for about an hour.

He spent most of the time looking into the past of Winterfell. Looking for events that he knew had happened in the castles recent past and trying to understand why some lords made the decisions that they did. He tried to learn from their tactics and skills when it came to ruling. Once he left the Green he would write anything important he discovered in a journal, for the reference of any Starks that came after him.

It was extremely slow going. So far, he hadn't even looked a century in the past. Even then, there was a lot he had missed as he mostly tried to focus on the most important events only.

Other times, like today, he let his mind wander and take him where his subconscious desired.

That is how a shade of Harry ended up sitting on a log in a different part of the Godswood. Watching as a young girl wacked her younger brother with a stick as the poor boy tried in vain to block with his own.

“You can do better than that Ben!” She laughed. Hopping back, dodging the counterattack.

“Stop dodging Lya! Let me hit you!” A young Benjen Stark shouted at his older sister while continuing to miss his every strike.

“Where would the fun be in that?” She asked and whacked Benjen on the back.

The younger boy grew frustrated, threw his stick away and tackled the girl with a loud yell. Both children fell to the floor and started wrestling. Rolling around on the floor, over piles of leaves and dirt. Leaving them in an absolute mess.

This went on for a few minutes until they both fell onto their back gasping for breath with smiles on their faces.

Harry gave the scene a sad smile before it shifted.

He found himself standing on the battlements of Winterfell. An older Lyanna Stark was standing a few feet away from him looking over Wintertown. In her arms was a baby.

“One day, this is all going to be yours Harry. You will rule over the entire North, making choices that will shape the lives of millions. I know that you can be great. You can make the North strong. Work hard and we won't need to rely on Southern alliances. You won't need to sell your daughter to a whoremonger to keep the North safe.” She wiped tears from her eyes, her voice bitter.

“Hah, look at me. Crying like this, I'm not setting a good example for you, am I?” She leaned down and laid a kiss on his head.

The baby reached a chubby hand and placed it on her cheek. As if trying to comfort her.

Lyanna burst into laughter. “Ha Ha Ha! You're such a sweet boy! Thank you, Harry. I needed that.”

The baby yawned.

“Oh, you're tired. Let's get you to your room to have a nap.” She walked away while singing him a low melody. “High in the halls of the Kings who are gone, Jenny would dance with her ghosts....”

The vision faded, replaced by chambers. Sitting on the bed, leaning against the headboard with a toddler next to her and a book on her lap. Lyanna read out loud, tracing the words and speaking slowly. As if she was trying to teach him how to read.

“Aemon was devastated by the death of King Daeron. He felt he failed his duty as a Kingsguard to live when his King died. When he got back to Kingslanding, he trained harder than he ever had before. Threw himself into his duties more than ever before. Determined to not fail Baelor the way he felt he failed Daeron. Unfortunately, Baelon died due to the one thing that Aemon couldn't protect him from. Himself. After only a few short years of ruling, Baelon starved to death because of all the fasting he did. Aemon once more outlived his King. Unfortunately, the next King he served wasn't nearly as worthy as the previous ones. Aegon was a whoremonger. He had a different woman in his bed every night. He would bed lords daughters when he visited their castles and would sire bastards all over the Seven Kingdoms. Feasting and drinking until he grew fat and slovenly.”

The toddler lying next to her gave Lyanna a funny look. “Aunty, are you sure this is a story for children?” The young boy spoke with a dialect that was eerily advanced for his age.

She looked to the toddler and then back to the book before blushing and slamming it closed with her face red from embarrassment. “Maybe not. But it's not my fault Harry! This is supposed to be a book about Aemon the Dragonknight! I thought it would be about his battles and deeds! Not whatever this is!”

The small boy couldn't help but break out into laughter. “Ha ha ha! Its- it's okay. I'm sure there are worse books you could have got.”

Lyanna narrowed her eyes. “I think someone's getting a bit too clever for his own good. Maybe a bit of punishment is in order.”

She leant over the boy, grabbing his sides and began tickling him.

“No, No-n-no no stop it. Ha Ha Ha Ha! P-please. Ha!”

This went on for a few seconds before she finally stopped. Giggling at the boy pouting.

“Now what did we learn Hadrian?”

He glared. “That your vicious.”

She smiled sharply. All teeth. “It seems someone didn't learn their lesson.”

He quickly backtracked. “I mean that your wisdom is without equal.”

He smacked his cheeks before leaning forward to kiss his forehead. “Good boy.”

Once again, the vision faded, replaced by a small room lit up by a small window and a few torches on the walls. The room smelled of blood. A baby's cries sounded. On the bed, a woman held the hand of a young man a few years older than her, while she pled with him.

“-Robert will kill him. Please protect him. Please Ned. Please.” Her voice got gradually weaker as she spoke.

“I swear.” The young man's voice trembled.

She smiled, pure relief in the expression. She relaxed her grip, her whole body starting to slacken. Just before her eyes lost their light, Harry swore they settled on him and her smile became slightly wider and her eyes glinted briefly before they lost their light.

“Lya! Lyanna! Please. Sister, please!”

Harry pulled himself out of the Weirwood network.

He sat up rubbing the tears from his eyes, as he couldn't help but mourn once more for the closest thing to a mother he could really remember. Even with being the Master of Death and having near perfect memories of his past life, his memories of Lily potter were fragmented. His memories only really became clear when Lily Potter was killed, and Voldemort first cast the killing curse at him.

When he finally gained his composure and looked at his surroundings he was surprised to find Leaf sitting on a log a few feet away. Staring at him intensely.

He cleared his throat. “How long have you been there?”

She blinked. “Long enough.”

“Why didn't you wake me?”

She shrugged. “You looked busy.”

Then she narrowed her eyes. “It doesn't do to hang on to the past Hadrian. Believe me. There were times over the millennia when I did the same thing. It started similar enough. I would go into the Green and watch moments of the lives of those I loved. Just fragments really. Then the longing would grow and I would watch more. Then more. Until one day I realized I had spent over a century watching. Obsessing over moments of their lives that were ultimately meaningless. Missing out on living my own life so that I could watch theirs.”

Harry nodded. He understood. Sometimes seeing your greatest desire was more torture than anything. As Dumbledore once told Harry when he first found the mirror of Erised in his first year. Men have wasted away in front of their desires. Still, it's not like he purposefully looked at those moments, he just let his subconscious take where it may.

He decided to move on to less painful and awkward topics. “Why are you here? Our magic lessons aren't until this afternoon.”

She narrowed her eyes at him for a fraction of a second before seemingly deciding to move on. “You asked me to get a few of my people to gather some magical plants we recognized from the Neck a few moons ago. Said you wanted to eventually build a garden of them so that you could use them in potions. Well, they have returned with seeds and some saplings from a few different plants.”

Harry stood dusting the dirt off himself as he did so. “That was faster than I thought it would take.”

She scoffed. “The Neck has hundreds of different species of magical plants. They only gathered a dozen or so. I figured it would be a long-term plan of yours and that it was better to go slow to learn how to grow them properly.”

He nodded. “Sensible. I was only expecting a few anyway. This is a project that will probably take years. Come, i have one of the glasshouses cleared for this project.”

Without further ado, Harry walked out of the Godswood with Leaf close behind. Her people were waiting at the entrance near the guards. A serant with them was holding a box that Harry guessed had the seeds and saplings.

All bowed their heads as he walked past. Children of the Forest and human alike. “Come.”

They walked across Winterfell in silence. It only took a few minutes to reach the glasshouses even with how slowly Hadrian was walking due to how close it was.

When they reached it, two of Hadrians guards entered first to check if it was safe before Hadrian followed with the Children and the rest of his guards stationed themselves at the door.

Inside of the glass gardens there were long rectangular containers lining the walls. With wooden boards breaking them up into sections. In the middle of the floor there were more of these containers. The containers were filled with the most fertile soil Harry could find. The space was packed as much as it could be while still having room to walk around and work.

Harry gestured to the back wall and spoke. “Plant what you can there. We'll see how well they grow in this sort of environment.”

The two Children who were following Leaf nodded without a word and went to do just that. Hadrian followed them to see exactly what pants they got for him.

A quick look at Leaf got her to explain whilst they commenced with planting the seeds.

“Thats wolfsbane and Hemlock.” She spoke when they placed the seeds down and buried them.

The next seeds came out. “Dittany and Dragonsbreath.” So, it went until all the seeds were planted. Each in their own container. Whilst this was happening Hadrian had one of the guards fetch a servant to get water.

Silence fell as Hadrian was lost in his own mind trying to picture the best way that he could make use of these plants for potions experiments when Leaf spoke.

“I thought you would be more reluctant to use one of your glassgardens for such a thing. As far as I know, they supply the North with much needed food in the winter.”

He hummed. “Thats true. These gardens are very important, but the food situation has been steadily improving over the last few years. The North has been growing more food than ever before and buying much less from the South now than we ever used to. In the next few years, I expect that we won't need to import food at all except in very dire winters. So we shouldn't need to rely on these gardens quite as much. Then there's all the gold we have been making. Thanks to not importing as much food and because of such a successful trade voyage, we have enough gold to order more glass from Myr for the first time in a very long time. Lord Manderly will be handling that once he gets back to White Harbour. He will also be ordering glass to build another glass garden for White Harbour as well and then he will be organizing another trading voyage. If the economy keeps improving like it has, in a few years I expect a few more Houses will be building their own glass gardens. If it does become a problem in winter anyway, there should be enough gold to purchase what we need.”

She nodded. “I see. The economies of men still confuse me. Even after all these years. My people have always relied on the land to give us everything we need.”

Harry smiled slightly. “It's not fun to think about but it is necessary. You will have to adapt if you truly want your people to thrive.”

She had a serious expression on her face. “I suppose we must.”

A servant entered with a bucket and prepared to water the seeds. Harry watched for a moment before he turned to leave. “I will speak to Luwin about teaching you what you need to know. I will have to make sure the Giants learn as well. It will be difficult, but I'm sure Luwin will relish the chance to learn about your cultures as he teaches you.”

“Thank you.”

Harry just waved her off. “The easier you adapt the better it will be. Both for you and the North.”

They walked in silence for a few moments. Hadrian lost in his head thinking about which potion he should prioritize trying to recreate while Leaf was lost in her own thoughts. Without even thinking about it, he wandered back towards the Godswood and entered. He was broken from his trance when Leaf asked another question.

“Who will be taking care of the plants?”

Harry shrugged. “I was going to have a servant do it. Why?” Although he had his suspicions.

She just cocked her head. “Would it not be better if one of my people did so? We are connected to nature in a way men are not. Our magic is meant to promote growth. It will be easier for us.”

He didn't even need to think about it, she was right. “True. I have no issue with that. Pick someone who you believe can get it done. They will eventually need to explain how they grow each plant though. As I hope to eventually have more than just that glass garden.”

Leaf pursed her lips. “Twig would be a good choice. She is smart, is good with plants and can speak the human tongue better than most. I will let her know.”

Hadrian smiled. “Excellent. Now while we already in the Godswood, do you mind starting our lessons earlier today?”

She shrugged. “Thats fine. What do you want to focus on today?”

Harry walked back over to the Weirwood tree and sat on one of its roots, leaning against the trunk. “Well, your people lived underground most of the time. In large tunnels that were connected to other tunnels. I was wondering if you had any magic connected to moving the earth. Anything that makes digging easier or faster? Or something that would allow you to raise earth in mounds?”

She adopted a thoughtful expression. “Earth magic. It is more difficult for my people than magic related to growing. Or connecting with animals. We specialize in magic related to life. But yes, there are ways we know of. What you must understand is that earth, by its very nature is unyielding. To wield earth one must be even more so. It isn't like growing plants where one is coaxing it to do what you want and helping it along. With earth you must be forceful. So must your magic. You must command it.”

Harry nodded. Drinking in the lesson with the utmost attention.

It seems Leaf saw that as she smiled slightly. “Let us begin.”

Merman In Kingslanding-Part 2

Merman in Kingslanding - Part 2 

“-fifteen Gold Dragons.” 

Wyman shook his head slightly. “I'm sorry my friend. Thats too little.  I can come down to twenty.” 

The dornish merchant hesitated slightly. His tanned face went through a few different expressions before eventually settling. “Very well. Twenty dragons per sheet of silk. I will take twenty of them my lord.” 

Wyman felt a smile come on to his face as he clapped broadly. “Deal my good man.” Wyman quickly wrote the order on a piece of parchment before stamping it with his sigil and handing it to the man. He then gestured to one of his servants. “Gerard here will take you and your men to the ship that has them now.” 

The man bowed shortly before leaving. Wyman slumped slightly into his chair. “Who's next Jerob?” Wyman asked the servant responsible for keeping track of the merchants who wanted to see him. 

The man answered promptly. “A trader from Driftmark by the name of Willem my lord. He seems to be interested in the alcohol.” 

“And how many are there left for today?” 

Jerob looked at the parchment in is hands for a few moments. “Five, Lord Manderly. We have already done ten.” 

Wyman massaged his temples briefly, feeling a headache coming on. He truly couldn't wait for lunch.  

He straightened himself and was about to gesture for the guards to let the next person enter when there was a knock on the door.  

Slightly surprised. Wyman only hesitated briefly. “Enter.” One of his guards walked into the room followed by a servant of the Red Keep.  

The servant bowed. “My lord, the King requests your presence in his solar.” 

Wyman withheld a sigh. He knew this was coming sooner or later. He just wished it happened when he wasn't already busy. 

Well, there was no keeping the King waiting.  

Wyman stood while speaking to his servants. “Jerob, please speak to the rest of my appointments. Tell them I was called away and put them first for my next round of meetings tomorrow.” 

His faithful servant bowed his head. “It will be done my lord.” 

With that Wyman gestured to the lad who summoned him to the King to lead the way. 

The walk to the Kings solar was unfortunately terrible for Wyman. The Red Keep was made up of many twisty corridors that's purposes seemed to only be to confuse people. There were numerous staircases that also seemed to have no reason to be present. At one point Wyman went down a flight of stairs only to climb up another staircase one hallway over and then turn around and go back in the opposite direction before descending another staircase. Truthfully, if he was the King he would seriously consider having this place torn down and rebuilt. As it was, Wyman was convinced Magor the Cruel was not depicted as mad enough in the stories he read. 

By the time he got to the Kings solar he was beginning to sweat quiet heavily. 

He exchanged a short nod with the Kingslayer before the lad gestured for him to immediately enter. 

Walking into the solar, Wyman felt himself drool slightly at the feast on display. There was fish, boar, apples, pie and an assortment of other foods arranged on a large table in the middle of the room, and he was incredibly hungry. Still, Wyman never let himself lose his composure and immediately started to kneel before the King.  

Before he was even halfway down, Robert waved him off. “Enough of that. I get enough sucking up from the leeches in the South. I don't need it from you Northerners as well.” 

Wyman stood, immensely grateful for his knees. ”As you wish your grace.“ He then nodded at Jon Arryn who was on the Kings right side on the other side of the table. ”Lord Hand.” 

Jon Arryn gave him a smile. “Lord Manderly, please join us for a meal.” 

Wyman was too happy to agree. Before he knew it, he was digging into the feast before him with relish while the King told him stories about some of his hunts.”-big bastard too. Never seen a more ferocious boar than that. Took seven arrows to put him down and he was still trying to gut me in his last moments. Truly one of the better hunts I've been on. I should arrange another hunt that way soon. Jon do you-” 

“Your Grace.”. The Hand interrupted with a slight sigh. “Perhaps we should talk to Lord Manderly about what we discussed.” 

The King looked frowned slightly but turned back to Wyman without much complaint except for a sigh. “Aye I suppose you're right.” 

Wyman straightened up and cleaned off his fingers on a handkerchief that had been provided. “I'm at your disposal your grace.” 

The king frowned for a moment before speaking. “We’ve heard all sorts of rumors coming out of the North, Manderly. Rumors that are making some people at court rather anxious. Now I'm not accusing the Starks of anything. I know you Northerners are rather simple and straightforward. It's what I like about you. The problem is people keep bitching at me about you lot and it's giving me a headache, so I want some answers that will get them to shut up.” 

Wyman heard the Hand of the King sigh, but he ignored that to focus on Robert. “What would you like to know about your grace?” Hadrian had told him to be as open and honest to the King as possible about most topics. The only thing he doesn't want known to the South was some of his inventions, such as the compass and his magic. Wyman intended to do just that. 

Robert frowned. “Firstly, are the rumors about the Children and the Giants true?” 

Wyamn nodded calmly.” Yes they are. Hadrian, myself and a few other lords came across them when we travelled briefly past The Wall. They offered to bend the knee and Hadrian accepted.” 

Jon Arryn frowned. “Why were you beyond the Wall?” 

Wyman felt his lips twitch slightly. “Hadrian is a rather serious boy, but he is still a boy and sometimes prone to adventure, no matter how seriously he takes his duties most of the time. He took a few Lords with him when he went to inspect the Nights Watch. I suspect he just wanted to go past the Wall for the right to say that he did.” 

Robert laughed and banged a meaty fist on the table. “Ha! I can understand that. Lord knows I did stupider things in my youth.” 

Jon Arryn pursed his lips. “Still, I must ask. Will it be possible to convince Hadrian to get rid of them?” 

Wyman instantly shook his head. “He takes his word very seriously and he promised them his protection as vassels. Even if he did get rid of them the Northern Lords would be up in arms. They are linked with the Old Gods and are therefore to be respected. They would go along with it, if only because a Stark ordered them to, but it would damage his relationship with many of them. Truly I doubt Hadrian had any choice but to accept their fealty when it was offered in front of so many Lords. Not if he wanted to keep their respect.” 

Arryn leaned forward. “And if the crown ordered it?” 

Wyman frowned. “Then he probably will. But the Northern Lords will be furious at the crown.” 

Arryn leaned back with a heavy sigh. The man looked like he aged years in a moment. “You must understand that this is getting the Faith incredibly angry. We’ve seen a surge of numbers in the growing militant faction and this has put a huge strain in talks to get them to disband.” 

Wyman pursed his lips. “With all due respect my Lord. I doubt such an argument will move Hadrian. As the King is the Protector of the Faith, Starks are generally seen as the Protectors of the Old Gods. I know Hadrian is already getting annoyed that the Faith Militant hasn't been crushed yet. Especially since they attacked the North.” 

Jon glared slightly. “If we attack them, we risk making them martyrs and having rebellions pop-up all-over Westeros.” 

“And yet, the longer they go without being destroyed the bolder the Faith will grow.” 

The old man pursed his lips. “The Conciliator destroyed the Militant with words not swords.” 

Wyman wanted to laugh at the foolishness he was hearing. “Magor the Cruel destroyed the Faith Militant. The Conciliator offered the survivors a way out that they could stomach.” 

Jon Arryn scoffed. “Lord Manderly, the Faith can always get more numbers. They are not-” 

“Enough!” Robert bellowed. “I'm not here to listen to you argue like children.” 

Wyman bowed his head. “Apologies, Your Grace.” 

Robert shook his head and took another sip of ale before continuing. “Lets get back to the North. What does Hadrian intend to do with these creatures? Some fear he wants to use them for war.” 

Wyman released a breath. “To be honest, there are only a few hundred of them altogether and the Giants can take decades before they have children of their own, the Children are even slower to reproduce. I doubt Hadrian intends to use them in war and risk them all dying off. It would be a poor look for him.” 

Robert grunted. “Then?” 

“Hadrian told me the Giants will be put to use in reconstructing some of Moat Cailin over the next few years before the castle is given to Eddard.” 

The King visibly brightened. “Eddard is getting a castle? Good for him. I offered him one in the South you know. The stubborn bastard refused, saying a Starks duty is in the North.” 

Jon Arryn looked more wary than ever. “Why Moat Cailin?”  

Wyman expected this question. It would be strange if they weren't wary of the implications of the North rebuilding its southern fortress. “Ned is familiar with the South and his wife is Lord Tullys daughter. Hadrian figured it was the best option for him.” 

“I was under the impression that relations between the Rivelands and the North were poor.” 

Wyman nodded easily. “Aye, they are. But they don't have to stay that way. Edmure Tully walked into Winterfell like it was his own castle and basically ordered Hadrian to give Sansa Stark over for fostering. In front of the Lords of the North no less. As you can imagine, Hadrian wasn't pleased. Still, Hadrian mentioned to me before that trade will reopen as soon as he gets an apology from Edmure.” All true. However, he left out that Edmure Tully was proud and was unlikely to apologize anytime soon. Even if he did, relations will probably be cool at best. 

Lord Arryn relaxed slightly. “I see. I will have a talk with Edmure.” 

Wyman nodded. 

Robert was looking thoroughly bored by what was happening and was quick to move things along. “Next, the army. Why is it being built?” 

Another complex topic. Wyman felt tired already. “Do you know what Hadrians biggest ambition is Your Grace?” 

Despite looking vaguely interested, Robert grunted. ”No. What is it?” 

“In truth, Hadrian doesn't really care about the South. Rather, his gaze is fixed North.” 

The King sat up slightly straighter. “He wants to conquer beyond the Wall.” 

Wyman smiled slyly. “Aye, but it won't be a normal conquest. That is practically impossible.” 

The King waved impatiently. “Then?” 

“He’s going to use trade.” 

The King looked incredulous.” Trade?” 

He nodded eagerly. “Aye, the idea is to conquer Hardhome with the army and then station them there to use as a garrison. Then food will be brought in. The wildlings will be tempted to trade furs for food, and over time given more and more benefits if they agree to bend the knee. Such as being allowed to stay in Hardhome and having protection from other Wildlings and having better deals when they trade. We don't expect it to work with most of them. But there will be those that will be tempted when they are starving. From there, a proper settlement will be built over time. This will also force the ones who don't want to bend the knee to attack us where we want them to. Instead of having the army march across that that frozen wasteland and be picked off by ambushes and starvation. If Hardhome is successful. Then we can spread out from there over the next few years. Conquering a bit at a time. Of course this comes with problems, such as the fact that Hadrian can't use his Lords armies to do this. Not when it will potentially take decades. So he decided it would be better to fund his own army in which he can cycle troops to and from Hardome to the North occasionally, without weakening his own levies to an unacceptable degree.” 

The Hand of the King looked stunned and even the King looked contemplative. Say what you will about Robert Baratheon, but he was no fool. Rather he was just uninterested in ruling. 

After a few moments Robert spoke. “That could work. But it will take a hell of a long time.” 

Wyman smiled slightly. “Aye, I believe Hadrian expects it to take most of his life to properly conquer those lands. But he seems determined.” 

Jon Arryn leaned forward. “When will Hadrian be starting this?”  

“In about a year or so. There are a few more things to sort out, such as increasing the size of the army a bit more. He also wants the permission of the crown before starting. That is one of the reasons he sent me to Kingslanding.” 

The Old Falcon furrowed his eyebrows. “Then what would he do with the army if he was refused?” 

Wyman shrugged slightly. “If that happened, he planned to stop training men and sending what there is so far with a few thousand levies to Skagos. The Lords on that Island have been ignoring the Starks for centuries. Whether the plan to conquer the lands beyond The Wall continues or not, he plans to take proper control of that island either way.” This was a lie. Hadrian never intended to stop training men for the army. He was just sure that the King wouldn't refuse his request for conquest. 

Robert snorted before turning to his mentor. “See? I told you there was nothing to worry about Jon.” 

The Falcon Lord looked as if he wanted to interject but Robert had already turned back to Wyman. “Tell Hadrian he has my permission. It can only be a good thing if those savages are taken care of. “ 

Despite the words of the King. Jon Arryn still looked worried. 

Wyman ignored him and smiled back at Baratheon. “Thank you, Your Grace. Hadrian will be happy to hear that.” 

Robert waved him off. “Bah. He’s going to marry my daughter. The least I can do is give him a chance to make the North slightly safer.” 

Robert took another sip of ale before he continued. “Enough of this. Lets talk about better things. Manderly, you traveled to Essos in your youth, yeah? You must have some interesting stories.” 

Wyman smiled. Happy that neither seemed to ask about the Nights Watch. To be honest, even Wyman doesn't know what Hadrian plans to do with that order once it was no longer needed. “Well, when I was young, perhaps on my second or third trip to Braavos...” 

LINE BREAK 

Sitting in the shaking carriage, Wyman wiped the sweat off his forehead with a sigh. Afterwards he couldn't help but look out the window towards the docks where his ship was with a slight excitement. 

After over a fortnight, Wyman was relieved to finally be leaving Kingslanding. He considers himself one of the more politically astute Lords in the North, but even he quickly grew tired of the snake pit that is Kingslanding.  

Almost every day he was approached by this minor lord or a representative of that lord, all wanting different things from him. All fishing for any information of the North they could get out of him and all trying to drag him into their political games.  

Truthfully it grew tiresome rather quickly.  

Even some of the damned merchants he spoke to were aligned with different lords with different goals. Some just wanted to get some of his items before their rivals. Others wanted him to snub their rivals by asking him to refuse selling to them, while others kept trying to bribe him with vague promises on behalf of their lords to keep them abreast of Northern affairs. 

Truly, Wyman felt like he could understand Robert a little bit more now. If he had deal with all these self-entitled idiots all the time, then he would be tempted to drink it all away too. 

Wyman couldn't wait to get back home. 

At least he could say that this trip was anything but a waste of time.  Wyman managed to sell most of his cargo already and made an enormous sum of gold for his trouble. True, a large portion will be going to House Stark, but House Manderly would still be making a lot off this venture. 

All Hadrians political goals were also met. Honestly, they were met with a lot more ease than Wyman's wildest predictions. He expected that the North might have to pay some penalty. Or that Hadrian would have to promise something. Instead, everything was basically just handed to them by the King. 

Robert Baratheon was generous towards the North. He would make sure that Hadrian knew that. 

Wyman was drawn out of his musings as he started to hear quite a bit of noise outside his carriage. 

Before he could ask what was going on, one of his guards leaned into his window and spoke with tense voice. “Looks like trouble milord.” 

Wyman furrowed his eyebrows. “What's going on?”  

“It looks like the faith. Lads with the seven-pointed star have started to follow us. Their numbers are increasing too.” 

Wyman paled slightly. “Tell the driver to go faster. We should get to ship as quickly as we can.” 

The guard nodded. “Aye, milord.”  

Wyman could faintly hear the man telling the men to move faster and he felt the carriage speed up. Unfortunately, it only lasted a few minutes before it skid to a stop. 

His door was yanked open by the same guard. “Milord, they've blocked the road ahead.” 

Wyman pursed his lips. Damn, he should have known the Faith Militant was going to do something stupid. 

He decided not to waste any more time. He quickly stood up and exited the carriage and called for a horse. Luckily all the gold had already been moved to his ship, so the carriage was not necessary. 

While he was waiting, he saw what the guard was talking about. They were about a block away from the docks, in a particularly wide street that had quite a few alleys leading to it. In front of them were about twenty men wearing a seven-pointed star. All of them were armed with knives. Behind the carriage were another twenty or so men. Leading the procession at the front was a man dressed in rags with a bald head and a tattoo of the Seven-Pointed Star on his forehead.   

Other than these men, the streets were nowhere near empty. There were dozens of smallfolk, perhaps even hundreds watching from narrow alleys and on the side of the road. 

One of his guards bent down to help Wyman climb up his horse, while those on foot climbed on horses of their own. The other guards already on horses trotted a few feet closer to their foes. 

The lead guard shouted. “Halt! You are in the presence of Wyman Manderly. You are blocking the road! Make way!” 

The bald man finally deigned to open his mouth. “I come on behalf of the Seven Who are One. The greatest authority there is! I wish to speak to Lord Manderly on his blasphemy!” 

Wyman finally sitting comfortable responded. “What blasphemy do you speak of?” 

“You claim to worship the Seven. Yet you serve a heathen. A heathen who has invited foul beasts and demons into the realm of men!” 

The smallfolk on the sides of the street murmured to themselves at this proclamation. 

Wyman felt himself becoming increasingly nervous. This had the makings of a riot. 

He needed to handle this carefully. 

“I obey my liege lord. As all good men should!” 

The man in front spat on the ground. “Not when he is a demon worshipper!” 

“They aren't demons, the-” He tried to defend. 

“Liar.” the man snapped. “They're abominations and the North has invited them into their homes. Still, you follow the teachings of the Seven. Even if you have lost your way. Surrender yourself so that we may guide you back onto the path of righteousness.” 

Damnit, he was a fanatic. “I am a lord. The Faith has no right to take me prisoner.” 

A mad glint appeared in the man's eyes. “The Seven give us the right. Capture him!” 

Suddenly there was no time to talk as all the men suddenly charged forward towards him while his guards formed up around him. 

Wyman tried to stop the madness that he knew was coming. “Wait-”  

Unfortunately, he was unsuccessful as one of his guards cut one of the lead fanatics heads off. From there it seemed as if the crowd around him went into a frenzy. The fanatics started to become even more reckless in their charge, sacrificing another of themselves on that guards blade as others pulled out knives and started stabbing him. To make it worse the smallfolk started pelting him and his men with rocks. 

In moments, there was chaos. 

His lead guard called to him. “My Lord, we have to get you out of here!” 

Wyman nodded. Knowing things had already spiraled out of control, he knew the only thing he could do now was escape. With that in mind he gave the order. “Charge!” 

With that the rest of his guards, who were all on horses, broke into a gallop. There wasn't near enough space to reach full speed, but it wasn't needed when his enemies were unarmored peasants wielding only knives.  

His men cut through them easily. Only two more men were lost when they were pulled off their horses. But Wyman didn't have the luxury to pay attention to such details when he was hacking with his sword to break through the crowd. It only took moments to break through to the other side of the group but in that time, most of the fanatics were cut down. With only a handful remaining uninjured among their number. 

Wyman didn't stop his charge once he was through, if anything he only sped up. He ignored all distractions as he desperately raced towards his ships. It felt like it took forever to reach his destination, when it was probably only a handful of minutes. 

Wyman wasted no time in boarding his ship, ignoring all the port officials and ordering it to pull anchor and set sail. The rest of his fleet were quick to obey the order as well. It took maybe five minutes to move away from the docks, but it felt like an eternity.  

By the time his ship started picking up speed, the riot had reached the docks. Wyman watched as crowds of smallfolk attacked the Goldcloaks on duty. He watched as they started looting everything they could. He watched as dozens died. He watched as more fanatics arrived and started calming down the riot. 

At the end, Wyman could only say one thing. 

“Fuck.” 

Sorry for such a late chapter guys. Life has really been getting in the way of my writing lately. On top of that we have been having major power issues in my country for the last few months which really messes with my schedule. Next chapter won't take nearly as long. I plan to release a chapter a week over the next month or so now that things seem to have calmed down to try and make it up to you guys. 

Merman in Kinglanding-Part 1

Merman in Kinglanding-Part 1 

Wyman Manderly resisted the temptation to block his nose as his carriage pulled him along the street towards the Red Keep in Kingslanding, as he had done since he first smelled the city well before his ship got to the docks.  Somehow, he managed to keep looking somewhat dignified even if it required him to breathe through his mouth. 

When his carriage drove over a large bump in the road, that he was sure was an actual pile of dried shit, he had to do his best to keep a jovial smile on his face. He mostly succeeded, even if his eyes twitched slightly. 

Kingslanding was looking much worse than it did when he first visited it when Aerys was King. There were a lot more starving people wherever he looked, the streets were dirtier and there was a sense of desperation in the air that was hard to miss.  

Say what you will about Aerys and his madness, he at least tried to keep his city in order. .  

Granted the city looked better than the last time he saw it. But that was just after the Lannisters sacked it, so that wasn't saying much. Still, he would have hoped that Robert and his council would have at least tried to fix up what was supposed to be the crowning jewel of Westeros. Or that his Lannister wife would have. As Lannisport itself was in a much better shape than this place.  

For Gods sake, the damned Gold Cloaks even had the balls to try and blackmail some of his men for coin when they first started unloading Hadrians gifts to the Royal family! 

They changed their tune as soon they saw Wyman, an obvious Lord, step off one of the ships with over two hundred guards. But still, it's the principle of the matter! How were they meant to attract merchants to the city, to bring in coin to fix this mess, if the damned guards blackmailed and threatened anyone who looked like they had anything of worth? Who would want to bring merchandise to a place where the guards are as likely to rob you as the thieves they are supposed to protect you from? 

Honestly, if this is the state of the city, Wyman fears what he will see of the Small Council. He already has a lowered opinion of them, purely due to the fact that nobody greeted him at the docks when he first arrived. He knows he isn't a Great Lord, but House Manderly is powerful in its own right. He didn't expect the Royal Family itself to greet him, but a member of the Small Council would not be amiss. Especially because he was representing Hadrian on this trip. 

If this is how Northern nobility was treated, then he can see why Hadrian wishes to distance the North from the South as much as he does. 

He can also see that such a decision might become more of a necessity than a choice as time goes by. 

He and his men have been eyed from all manner of smallfolk since they entered the city and none of their gazes were friendly. Even more concerning was that some of the smallfolk and even some guards were wearing wooden badges shaped as the seven-pointed star underlined with a sword.  

The sigil many of the Faith Militant had been reported to wear in the Vale. 

It seems that particular issue was a lot more prevalent in the other Kingdoms than he thought.  

Wyman did his best to ignore the hostile stares as they made their way through the city and he mostly succeeded. Before he knew it, he and his retinue arrived before the Red Keep. 

Luckily they did not have to wait very long before the gates were opened and they were allowed through.  

It seems that the Small Council weren't all snubbing him, for waiting for him in the courtyard was the middle Baratheon brother.  

Wyman made haste in getting off his carriage and bowing in greeting. “Prince Stannis.”  

The stern-faced man nodded stiffly in greeting. “Lord Manderly. It's good to see you have arrived safely. I apologize for the poor reception. My brother stated he wanted to greet you at the docks but he seems to have been...distracted by other matters.” 

Wyman waved him off with a friendly smile. “It is no issue my Lord.” 

Stannis just nodded. “Very well. Quarters have been arranged for your men in the barracks.” Stannis gestured to the man at his side. “Ser Davos will see them there. Although there are more men than expected. More ships too.“  

Wyman felt the question in his words. “Apologies my Lord. With the tensions among the Faith, Lord Stark believed it prudent I have a good amount of protection on my journey. There are still more men guarding the ships as they are carrying valuables bought in the recent voyage Benjen Stark took to Yi-Ti. I am to sell as much as I can in Kingslanding before making my way to the Westerlands and selling the rest on the way.” 

Stannis grunted. “Understandable. Come, my lord. My brother should be waiting in the throne room by now.” 

The Prince then turned and began marching away. Wyman hurried to follow.  

The rest of the walk was made in silence and before long they had arrived before the throne room. 

Stannis spoke again. “Wait here until you are announced.” With that, he abruptly turned and entered the throne room. 

Wyman withheld a sigh.  

After ten or so minutes he finally heard himself being announced. “- Lord Wyman Manderly, Lord of White Harbour!” 

Wyman was quick to enter, followed by a few of his guards who carrying six large chests between them. 

The throne room looked similar to the last time he saw it. If less grand due to the dragon skulls being absent. The King however looked different. 

Robert Baratheon seems to have gained a large amount of weight since the Ironborn Rebellion. His eyes were bloodshot and he seemed to be drinking while listening to something Jon Arryn was saying. On the other side of the King was Cersei Lannister, the Queen. She was still as beautiful as Wyman remembered but her eyes seemed even colder. 

Wyman focused back onto the King once he judged he had come close enough to the Iron Throne. 

“Your Grace.” He greeted while struggling to lower himself onto a knee. 

The King had other ideas however. “Bah! None of that! I get enough of that from the rest of these parasites! You fought for me at the Trident Manderly, stand damn you!” Roberts voice boomed. 

What else could Wyman do but obey? “It is good to see you, Your Grace.” 

Robert huffed. “Heh, I'm sure it is. Enough of the platitudes already. I know you Northmen hate coming South. Not that I can blame you, I hate this gods damned city myself.” 

Wyman smiled despite himself. Robert always did have a charisma about him. It's a pity he didn't seem to like being King. If he took his position more seriously then he could have been a good one. Not great, perhaps. But a good one nonetheless. Which is more than he could say about many kings that came before him. 

“Perhaps you should visit the North then, Your Grace. White Harbour would be happy to host you and I know that Lord Stark would feel the same about having you in Winterfell.”  

He even believed it. Hadrian might not respect Robert Baratheon much but he didn't necessarily dislike him either. Hadrian would probably not mind hosting the King. The Queen however... 

Well, Hadrian seemed to have a wary respect of Tywin Lannister. But he definitely didn't like him. 

Robert had a contemplative look in his eyes. It seemed as if he was about to accept his proposal before a glance from Jon Arryn made him sigh and deflate. “Can't, I'm afraid. At least, not right now. I will keep your offer in mind though Manderly.” 

He then waved his hands towards the chests. “What's this then?” 

Wyman was quick to respond. “Gifts. From Lord Stark.” He gestured to the men carrying three of the chests to bring them forward and open them. Inside there were a number of jars packed and arranged carefully. 

Wyman explained. “This is alcohol from Yi-Ti. Apparently they call this sake. Lord Stark thought you might appreciate it.” 

“Lannister.” The King called and gestured with his head.  

Jaime Lannister was quick to obey. Moving forward and grabbing one of the jars before bringing it to the King who grabbed it and removed the lid. 

“Your Grace-” 

“For fucks sake Barristan. Manderly isn't going to poison me.” With that the King took a gulp.  

“Aah. Interesting taste. Never had anything like it. It's not bad.” 

Wyman smiled. “I'm glad you like it Your Grace. There are a dozen barrels on the ship that also belong to you. I will have my men bring them in the morning.” 

“Hah!” Robert laughed. “I appreciate it Manderly. The Starks know how to give gifts!” 

Wyman then gestured to bring forward another two chests which were opened in short order. “These are silks from Yi-Ti and Qarth for the Queen. There are a few more chests on the ships as well.” 

Cersei Lannister sniffed. “Thank you, my lord.” If only she didn't look like that was painful for her to say. Or if there was even an ounce of sincerity in her gratitude, Wyman figured she would be a lot more beautiful. 

Another gesture brought the last chest forward. “These are dolls made in Yi-Ti wearing the latest fashions. As well as a few rolls of silk. A gift from Lord Stark to his betrothed, Princess Myrcella. The other chests will also be brought up tomorrow.” 

Wyman knew all of this ended up costing House Stark a fortune. However, he knew it was money well spent. It was important that the King and Queen had a decent impression of Hadrian. Besides, there was a lot of silk left to be sold on the ships. Wyman would make sure that he got really good prices for it. So the coin should be more than made up by the time he left Kingslanding. Other than that, he still had a lot of spices, dyes, art and alcohol that he would sell. He would make a very good profit regardless. 

The Kings eyes softened slightly. It's clear the man had a bit of a soft spot for his daughter. “I'm sure she will like it Manderly.” 

With that the King stood. “Enough of this. Court is over for the day. Manderly, you will sit by my side at the feast tonight. Tomorrow, you will join in the meeting of the Small Council where we will discuss more serious matters.” With that Robert made his way out of the room. 

Jon Arryn was quick to pick up where the King left off. “If you would follow the servants, they will guide you to your chambers.” 

Wyman bowed his head. “Of course, Lord Hand.” 

Wyman didn't waste any time before doing exactly that. Honestly, he believed he was off to a good start doing what Hadrian wanted accomplished. 

Line Break...................... 

The next afternoon he found himself sitting at in the chambers of the Small Council.  

He was nursing a small headache due to a hangover. Wyman blamed the King for his current state. Robert Baratheon was only too eager to get black out drunk on his new alcohol at the feast the night before and Wyman, sitting next to him, had no real choice but to join in due to the Kings encouragement.  

Most of his night was a blur. The parts that weren't made him want to stay out of the public eye as much as possible. He vaguely remembers singing a horribly out of tune version of the Bear and the Maiden Fair as well as few other popular songs and sea shanties in front of everyone at the feast. He also remembers calling Kingslanding a shithole in front of the entire Royal Family. 

About the only positive thing was that, according to some of his most trusted men, he never said anything incriminating about the North and what he believes Hadrians plans were. 

Honestly if Wyman didn't know any better, he would believe that the King got him drunk on purpose in order to make him spill his secrets. 

But he did know better. He also remembers that the King was even worse off than he was. Wyman recalls Robert Baratheon telling one of the Lords that his wife was too pretty for him and that Robert would be happy to show her a good time if she wants. 

In front of the Queen and the rest of the visiting Lords. 

Honestly just thinking about it made Wyman feel miserable. Even more miserable than he already was. Wyman honestly wanted nothing more than to go to his chambers and take a nap. Unfortunately, he had important things to discuss with the Small Council. He wished they would get to that part already, as listening to these Lords of the Small Council bicker amongst themselves for over half an hour about the same topic made it feel as if nails were being driven into his skull. Regardless, Wyman mustered up his willpower and forced himself to focus once they moved on to a topic that actually interested him. 

“- Tully seems to have got the situation under control.” Lord Varys stated. 

Jon Arryn sighed. “Theres that at least. Hopefully Lord Blackwood won't worsen the situation. For now, we should just leave it to Tully.” 

Stannis grit his teeth. “With all due respect. Bracken should be punished. Inviting the Faith Militant into the Riverlands like he has done risks the Kings Peace. It also goes against the Crown. We have made it clear that we want the Faith Militant to disband. Bracken is giving them more power.” 

Lord Arryn responded. “It isn't so simple. Punishing Bracken would offend many pious lords across the Kingdoms. It might also turn him into a martyr. Besides, I have finally made contact with the Septon that seems to be in charge of the Faith Militant. We have started negotiations to see the institution disbanded.  It should hopefully only be a few more moons until this is all sorted out.” 

Lord Estermont asked a question. “What exactly does he want?” 

Arryn hummed. “He isn't asking for too much. Mostly he seems to want the Mountain clans to be dealt with. There were a number of raids over the last few years that have completely destroyed quite a few villages in the Vale. The Faith Militant wants to destroy those clans.  I have been assured that they will disband as soon as that has been taken care of. That also seems to be why they have expanded into the Riverlands. They are looking for new volunteers to join their crusade. I have been told that if the Crown supports the war against the Mountain clans, control over the Faith Militant will be given over to a commander that the crown chooses. I haven't rejected this proposal because it does allow for some interesting opportunities. It is also very popular among the Lords of the Vale, making rejecting such a proposal difficult.” 
 

Pycelle coughed. “Forgive me my Lord, but that seems dangerous. If the crown supports them, it can give the entire movement a lot of legitimacy.” 

Jon Arryn nodded. “You’re right. Thats why I haven't agreed to the proposal either. This will require a lot of thought. What is your opinion on this Stannis?” 

The dour man was quick with an answer. “If the entire point of this is to destroy the Mountain clans in the Vale, then why did they attack the North?” 

Arryn hummed. “Apparently it was not something that was planned. Many of those men were meant to travel to The Wall and take the black as they had committed crimes in their zeal and were looking for redemption. They went through Boltons lands as Domeric spent time in the Vale and he apparently showed some appreciation for what the Faith were doing, so they felt they might have a chance of converting the Lord of the Dreadfort himself on the way to The Wall. Unfortunately, they spotted the Giants on the way and took exception. Which lead to them attacking Lord Stark and his company. I have an apology letter as well as a promise to pay gold as restitution to Lord Stark for the crimes of those men-” 

Slam 

“Enough already!” The King roared. “I am at this meeting so we can discuss the Children and the Giants. Get started already!” 

Jon Arryn sighed. “Very well Your Grace.” 

The Hand of the King turned towards him. “What can you tell us about the Children of the Forest and the Giants that Hadrian has allowed into the North.” 

Wyman hummed before beginning his tale. Keeping things as close to the truth as possible without revealing Hadrians magic.  

Once he was finished, the table sat in silence for a while before it was broken by Stannis. ”So Hadrian Stark only met with them for the first time after he had arrived at the Wall?” 

Wyman nodded. ”Correct my lord.” 

Varys chose this moment to speak. “Then why did Hadrian have so many Lords accompanying him on this journey?” 

Wyman already had an answer to this question so he needed no time to think. “Hadrian often travels around the North inspecting the lands. He has done this multiple times over the years. This time he wanted some Lords to accompany him so that he could show the poor state of the Nights Watch to us. I believe it was so that some of the Lords would be less likely to complain that he was spending so much gold on the order when there were other places it could go. I believe he was also trying to encourage us to spend our own gold on trying to help the Nights Watch so that not everything was left to House Stark.” 

“A convenient excuse. Hadrian still should have consulted the King before agreeing to let those creatures enter the Seven Kingdoms.” Pycelle exclaimed. 

Varys nodded his agreement. “The Grandmaester makes a good point. Such a decision wasn't Hadrians to make. “ 

Wyman frowned. “Forgive me my Lords. But if King Robert is seen as the Protecter of The Faith of the Seven in the South, then House Stark is seen as the Protector of the Old Gods in the North. They have been seen as such for thousands of years. There was no way that Hadrian Stark would ever deny the Children and the Giants when they wished to bend the knee to him. Not when their very existence gives the Old Gods more credibility than ever before. Especially not in front of some of his most faithful bannermen and when the Faith Militant is making many in the North increasing wary of the Seven. To do so would mean that many of his bannermen would lose trust in him. There is also no law that states Hadrian is restricted from accepting their fealty.” 

Pycelle coughed, took a sip of water and then spoke. “House Manderly follows the Seven do you not? Then how can you so easily accept these abominations?” 

Wyman had to hold in a laugh. “My House might give lip service to the Seven, but I myself am not very religious. I prefer to deal with facts. All I care about is if these creatures will be an asset to the North or not. Not what gods they represent.” 

Pycelle started to look angry. “The Citadel has long known about the dangers of magic and it advises that they be put down! Before they can cause untold amounts of chaos!” 

Wyman felt his eyebrows rise. “I was under the impression that the Citadel claimed magic was dead?” 

Pycelle slammed his fist on the table. “That is what we believed and we would like to keep it that way.” 

Wyman had to be careful to keep his amusement off his face. “Truthfully I don't believe it matters what the Citadel says. It is an institution located in the Heart of the Faith. Hadrian isn't likely to take your advice. Especially as he doesn't hold much respect for Maesters to begin with. “ 

The old man spluttered. “Why I never-the Citadel is the center of knowledge in the entire world! Our Maesters are the most learned men there are and know what they are talking about!” 

Wyman had an ugly smile on his face. “Then why have they not made any progress in centuries?” 

Pycelle furrowed his eyebrows. “What?” 

Wyman smirked. “It's a simple question. Hadrian isn't even a man grown yet and he has discovered new methods of farming and record keeping. The Citadel has been around for thousands of years in the Kingdom where farming is most prevalent. Why were these discoveries not made by your institution? Why have there been no new discoveries for centuries?” Wyman was happy he arranged an accident for his Maester before making this journey, needling the Grandmaester without worrying about any reprisals on his family was surprisingly fun. Besides, that old man was an obvious spy and practically useless besides. Wyman just hired an educated man from Braavos to replace him.

Pycelle had a look of rage on his face while even the king looked slightly interested in this conversation. “We are dedicated to the preservation of knowledge! New knowledge can be dangerous if not handled properly. As shown by the chaos that new farming method is causing in the South.” 

Wyman frowned. “There is always chaos. It shouldn't stop Westeros from advancing.” 

Pycelle looked as if he wanted to jump over the table and strangle him. “What an ignorant thought! Unchecked knowledge can cause irreparable harm! Thats why we swear oaths! So that we don't use our knowledge for our own gain and cause more harm than good!” 

Wyman was starting to get slightly pissed off by his attitude and felt his voice raise slightly. “Northerners have been starving in the winter for thousands of years and you would-” 

“Enough!” Robert bellowed. “We aren't hear to talk about this! We are here to discuss the Giants and Children!” 

He turned to Wyman. “Manderly, are they a danger to the rest of the Kingdoms?” 

Wyman forced himself to calm down before he answered. “I don't believe so Your Grace. Their numbers are small and they will probably remain so for centuries, if not longer. The Giants and Children take over a century to grow to adulthood and they have children very rarely. I believe I was told their last child was born over a hundred years ago. Men will always outnumber them. I highly doubt Lord Stark will be willing to risk them in war if one ever happens with the South, not when one disaster can lead to their extinction.” 

The King took a generous gulp of wine. “For fucks sake, was that so difficult?” 

Jon Arryn interjected. “Robert-” 

The King interrupted. “No Jon, leave it. Manderly, will any of them be willing to come South and swear to the throne and live in the Southern Kingdoms.” 

Wyman hesitated slightly. “Not right now your grace. Not with the Faith Militant on the rise. I believe once that has been sorted out that Hadrian will be able to convince them though, as long as they are guaranteed some protection.” He lied. Wyman knew there was no chance that they would move to the South where the Faith of the Seven is prevalent. However, Hadrian wanted him to reassure the King however he could. 

The King stood. ” There, you heard him. They stay. It's not like we will be able to convince Stark to break his oath to them anyway. Not if he is anything like Ned. I won't force Stark either because I have no interest in having a war with the North. Jon, help the Faith Militant either wipe out the Mountain Clans or have Stannis wipe the Militant out. I don't care which as long as they are dealt with. Once they have either disbanded or been destroyed, within a year I want some of the Giants and Children to come to Kingslanding and to the Stormlands so that the North isn't the only Kingdom to have access to them. Meeting over. Now I need a fucking whore.” 

With that, he spun on his heel and marched out the door. 

Jon Arryn sighed. ”This meeting is over. We will meet again tomorrow, Lord Manderly, to discuss the trade voyage House Stark sponsored to Yi-Ti and what that means for the North and your taxes. For now, you are dismissed.” 

Wyman wasted no time standing and giving his farewells. Making his way to his room as fast as his legs could carry him, only one thought on his mind. ‘I need some fucking food.’ 

Next Chapter is also about Wyman Manderly in Kinglanding.  

The Return

The Return 

Riding through Wintertown, Benjen was filled with nostalgia and no small amount of joy. It had been most of a year since he set foot in Winterfell and Benjen found himself missing the North more as his journey went on. 

He found himself nervous when he first left the North. But he was also excited. This was his chance to really contribute to his House and the North. Something he never really thought he would have an opportunity to do when he was a boy, being a third son.  

Unfortunately, most of his time was spent on a ship. It wasn't so bad in the beginning, but after months at sea in cramped quarters, he started missing land. He realized that he would probably never love sailing as much as the Manderlys seemed to.  

Still, it's not like he hated it being able to see much of the world made the trip worth it.  

Benjen knew there were some amazing sights to see in the world. He used to read about them with Lyanna all the time. They would then spend hours speaking about travelling the world together. Seeing all there was to see. Doing all there was to do. Those talks grew more frequent after she was betrothed to Robert Baratheon.  

It made the trip bitter in some places. There were moments he couldn't help but think about how much his sister would have loved to be in his place. How much more she wanted it compared to him. How much she would have enjoyed Yi-Ti and Braavos or how much Slavers Bay would have filled her with righteous anger. How much she would have loved the freedom.  

Still, he couldn't help but think that perhaps he was honoring her in some small way. By doing what they always talked about but she never got a chance to do. 

Sometimes Benjen couldn't stop his mind from wondering what life would have been like if Hadrian was a Lord during those times instead of his father. He thinks that Hadrian would have killed Robert Baratheon if he whored around while betrothed to Lyanna. Damn the consequences. Hells, Hadrian probably wouldn't have let Lyanna marry outside the North in the first place. 

He realized that Hadrian could be cold sometimes, but he always put his family first. His first priority was the pack and the second was the North. Hadrian didn't seem to put much thought into anything else, except for how they could be a threat to both of those things. 

He knew it was a terrible thing to contemplate because he loved his father and his brother, but he was always closest to his sister. She was always where his thoughts drifted to when he thought of those days.  

Benjen shook his head clear of those thoughts. He wouldn't allow himself to be in a poor mood on what should be a day of celebration. So, he devoted himself to his surroundings. 

As he moved further into Wintertown and closer to the gates of Winterfell, Benjen looked around to see what changed in the time that he has been gone.  

He noticed that Wintertown was slightly larger. There were more people living in it now than he had ever seen, except during winter. There were more stores, more buildings and people looked happy. They looked hopeful. 

He lost himself in the sights, greeting people he recognized as he moved past them. Waving at some people who were new to the town. Smiling and laughing as he was greeted by cheers by what must have been most of the people living here.  

After spending some time in the presence of other lords in Yi-Ti and Braavos and seeing how they were treated by their people, he knew how special it was that the Starks were genuinely loved by their people. Rather than just begrudgingly respected as many of those lords were. The less said about the slavers the better. 

His family had always had the respect and love of their people. Thanks to Hadrians efforts, those feelings seemed to only grow stronger. Before he left, many of the small folk started speaking of Hadrian as if he was a champion of the gods themselves. If some of his nephew's other ideas work, then those rumors are only going to grow. 

He didn't know if that was a good thing or not. 

Benjen spent some time admiring some of the newest buildings that were created since he left and before he knew it, he was leading his procession of carts through the gates of Winterfell. 

His eyes widened as the first thing he saw were the Giants. There were two of them standing to either side of the inner gate. He had heard about what his nephew had been doing since he went on the voyage, so he knew his nephew had got the giants and Children to bend the knee. Still, it was one thing to hear about it, but it was a completely different thing to see it for himself. 

Each of them was very intimidating. They were both wearing steel armor and armed with the largest greatswords he had ever seen. Each sword being taller and wider than he was. Benjen could only imagine how devastating they would be in battle.  

Still, each of them bowed their heads and thumped their chests as he walked past and let out a loud cry. “Stark!” 

Benjen couldn't help but straighten his back and stand a little taller when he gave them both a nod of respect.  

When he saw his nieces and nephews, he felt his smile stretch across his face. He hopped off his horse and walked up to Hadrian who greeted him with open arms and a smile. Benjen didn't hesitate to embrace the boy, leaving all the fancy greetings he knows he was supposed to do out. It was then his nephew spoke. “It's good to have you back uncle.” 

Benjen smiled wider. “It's good to be back nephew.” 

He released Hadrian and stepped back, inspecting him properly. “You’ve grown, nephew.” The boy had shot up at least a foot since Benjen had last seen him.  

Harry laughed. “Aye, it seems so.” He then looked at all the wagons that were being put into the courtyard. “It looks like you had a productive trip.” 

Benjen shot a slightly awed glance at the Child of the Forest behind his nephew and another glance at the giant. “It seems not as much as you. Always have to be one to shatter expectations, don't you Harry?” 

Harry just smiled.  

Benjen took that as permission to move and begin greeting Neds children. He gave his other nephews a strong hug. “Robb, Jon, look at you boys. I've missed you. Have you boys been good?” 

Both the lads broke off and Robb was the first to speak, as he usually did, with a toothy smile. “Aye. We’ve been doing all our lessons and listening to father and mother.” Jon just nodded along solemnly but he had a hint of a smile on his face. 

Benjen laughed and gave the boys a wink. “I hope you haven't been too good. Your father can do with a bit of mischief in his life.” 

Their smiles grew slightly larger and more devious.  

He moved on to Sansa who was holding her mother's hand. “You're looking more and more like a princess every time I see you dear. Your brothers will be chasing the boys off with their swords soon enough.”  

She gave a shy smile and looked at her feet while blushing. “Thank you Uncle Benjen.”  

He had to restrain himself from hugging the girl again, she was just too cute. With an effort of will he moved on to greet Cat, kissing her knuckles before speaking. “My lady, it's good to see you again.”  

Catelyn just nodded, but she also had a small smile on her face. “My Lord.”  

After, he bent down and patted little Arya on the head. She was still too young to speak properly so that would have to do for now. 

Benjen took a few steps back. “I have gifts for everyone. I will give them to you at dinner tonight.” He could practically see most of the children vibrating with anticipation.  

Hadrian was the exception. He only looked at his cousins with fond amusement before turning his gaze back to Benjen. “I'm sure you are tired uncle. You have had a long trip; we will speak a bit later in my solar once you are ready and we will be having a feast tonight.” 

Benjen smiled gratefully. Honestly, sleeping in his own bed sounded like a dream. 

Line Break------------------------------------------------------------- 

A few hours later, about an hour before the feast was supposed to start and after he had a small nap and a bath, Benjen walked to his nephews solar. He was eager to hear in more detail about what's been happening in the North. 

He had just arrived in the correct corridor when the guards outside of the room knocked on the door and announced his presence. Benjen never even had to slow down his walk as the door was pushed open soon after, with each of the guards giving him a nod of respect as he passed. 

Hadrians solar was even more interesting as than he remembered. There were dozens of maps spread out along the walls, each showing a different section of the North. Dozens of pages were spread out over Hadrians desk, each with numerous scribbles and markings on them. No doubt detailing some of his nephews' rough plans.  

Hadrian himself was seated behind the desk, reading through a document that Benjen recognized as the list of items that he brought to Winterfell.  

Hadrian was quick to place the document down when Benjen walked to one of his shelves and grabbed a goblet before pouring himself a mug of ale from the jug his nephew always had ready whenever he or Ned visited him.   

His nephew was quick to gesture for him to speak as soon as he sat down. 

Benjen did so gladly. “So, tell me nephew, I have heard all sorts of rumors, but I would hear it from you. How in the Seven Hells did you get the Giants and the Children of the Forst onto your side?” 

Harry smirked before beginning to spin a tale straight out of the songs about being a greenseer, the deal he made with the Children and the Giants. About how they agreed to bend the knee to House Stark and finally about the war against the Faith and House Bolton that started on his way back to Winterfell.  

Benjen was honestly enthralled at the story. He always knew his nephew was a great Lord of the North, but it wasn't until this moment that he truly started to realize that Hadrian would probably be spoken of in the same breath as some of his most famous ancestors. He had possibly already surpassed most of them and he was still a young lad. 

He couldn't help but feel pride. 

After that Hadrian informed him of a few more details about the happenings in the North, such as Jorah Mormonts scandal that required Ned to travel to Bear Island. Benjen already knew that something had happened on Bear Island that required Ned thanks to Lord Manderly, but the details of what happened left him both in shock and enraged.  

It wasn't long after that where Hadrian asked him all about his voyage.  

Benjen was only too happy to oblige Hadrian. Benjen regaled Hadrian with tales of the mighty statue of the Titan of Braavos, The Iron Bank and its imposing walls and all the artworks and merchants that could be found in that city. He spun tales of the beautiful waters of Ibb and the majestic whales that can be found there. He spoke about the horrors of slavers bay and the true cruelty that could be found there. He spoke of Yi-Ti and all its many customs and the unique people that lived there. He also spoke of some of the dangers that they faced on the waters. 

“-not for the compass then we would have surely lost at least a few more ships to pirates and slavers. As it is, we merely avoided most of them by going deeper into the seas where they could not follow us without risking getting lost. Truly a marvelous invention nephew.” 

Harry smiled. “Aye, that's why it will remain a Northern secret for as long as possible.” 

Benjen just nodded. “I agree on the necessity. Still, there will be those who will be curious to know how we did what we did. They will investigate. I fear the next voyages will be much more dangerous than this one.” 

Hadrian nodded solemnly. “Thats why the next voyage will only take place once a few more warships can be built and armed with ballistae. It should only be a year or two until we are ready.” 

His nephew leant back and took a sip of his water. Benjen decided this was a good time to try get answers to one of the questions that had been bugging him for much of the trip. “You had me purchase a number of things on the voyage nephew and I believe I have an idea of what you are hoping to achieve with some of them, but I am still curious about others...” He trailed off leadingly. 

Unfortunately, Benjen was going to be left disappointed. “For now, all of those crops you brought are only going to be farmed on House Stark lands. The same with the animals. I know where I want some of the crops to go, but I don't know that for all of them yet. I will first perfect the methods of farming each of them requires. Then I will begin seeing if I can't find any other uses for them. Once I have done so, then I will look at spreading those crops around the North to key bannermen.” 

Benjen sighed slightly. To be honest, Benjen was beginning to suspect that Hadrian had already worked out exactly what he wanted to do with those crops. Although he told himself he wasn't being very fair. Hadrian may have read about some of these crops and animals, but that doesn't mean he knows the best way to use them without ever seeing them grow for himself. 

His nephew was a genius, that doesn't mean he can just pull information from nowhere. 

He smiled at his nephew. “I understand nephew. If anyone can figure out the best ways to use them, it will be you.” 

Harry suddenly sprang to his feet and clapped his hands. “Enough of this uncle! Tonight is a night of celebration and were going to be late to the feast!” With that he started moving towards the door.  

Benjen chuckled weakly before standing up to follow. 

An hour later Benjen found himself seated at the high table on his nephews right. He was drinking a strong ale to wash down the hearty meal he had. 

The great hall of Winterfell was practically empty today. The only people present was his family, the Child of the Forest Leaf and a few of Hadrians Winterguard. It was honestly an atmosphere that he found preferable to the drunken revelry that happens when the Lords visit the castle for one reason or another. This was a lot more relaxing and he could speak more freely with his family. 

His nephew didn't seem to care what he said in front of Leaf. As according to Hadrian, the Child of the Forest will have a role to play in educating and advising all Starks in the future. So according to Hadrian, it will be better if she was used to them. 

Benjen was using this time as best he could. By telling his nephews amusing stories from his adventure. “-So there I was, lost in Braavos at night with nothing but my sword. Unfortunately, what I didn't know was that walking around that city at night with a sword was a sign that that you wanted to duel. Let me tell you, in Braavos, there is no shortage of men who are looking for a good duel. Either for fame, to settle grudges or just for pure amusement. By the time I managed to find my way back to the inn I had fought over a dozen men. Each more fearsome than the last!” 

“And then?!” Jon exclaimed excitedly. “Did you beat them all?!” 

“Obv-ov- obvivosy he won! He’s a Stark!” Robb exclaimed puffing up his chest in pride. 

Jon rounded on him. “You don't know that! He could have lost.” 

Robb frowned. ”No way!” 

Jon glared. “Yes way!” 

“No!” 

“Yes!” 

Benjen laughed, interrupting the brotherly spat. “Aye, boys. I won all of them! It was close at some points though. When I reached my inn, i swore never to walk outside in Braavos at night ever again!” 

Robb rounded back on Jon. “See, I told you!” 

Jon opened his mouth to reply before he was cut off by the sound of Hadrians laughter. “Alright, that's enough you two.” The two looked at Harry pleadingly. 

His nephew seemed to decide a distraction was a good idea because he rounded on Benjen with a glint in his eye. “I believe uncle Benjen said he got us some presents. “ 

Instantly, every pair of eyes were on him. 

Benjen laughed and stood from his seat. “Alright, I can take a hint.” He gestured to one of the guards who was standing near the back of the hall near a few boxes. He walked around to the front of the table while the man brought each of the boxes over to him.  

Harry gave him a signal to do the boys first. 

Benjen complied. He grabbed the first two boxes. “These are for Robb and Jon.” He said, handing the boys a pair of boxes. They were quick to remove the lid with an excited smile. Inside they found far-eyes with trees and forests carved on the sides decorating them.  

The poor boys looked confused for a moment until Benjen explained. “It's a far eye boys. From Yi –Ti. You put the smaller side up to your eye and look through it.” 

The boys did so quickly. With Robb exclaiming. “Woah. Everything's so much bigger.” Jon just showed an awed smile. 

Benjen laughed. “Aye, that's what it does.” 

“Thank you uncle!” “Thanks uncle!” 

He left the boy to play with them and gave another box to Sansa. Benjen wanted to laugh as the girl almost daintily opened up her gift. Once she did though she was quick to release a squeal of excitement. 

“Those are four dolls are dressed in the latest fashion of Braavos and Yi-Ti.” 

Sansa was quick to take one out and hug it to herself, an amazed look on her face at the craftsmanship. Even Benjen had to admit they were very well made.  

Catelyn nudged her daughter. “What do we say?” 

Sansa looked up shyly. “Thank you.” 

Benjen just smiled before he gave Catelyn her box. 

She opened it and gasped when she found silks and fabrics from each port that Benjen had visited. She lifted it up delicately to rub her fingers through it before offering Benjen a smile and a heartfelt. “Thank you.” 

Next, Benjen gave Hadrian his gift. Which was a katana from Yi-Ti. His nephew ran his hand along the flat of the blade for a moment, admiring the craftsmanship and the snarling Direwolf that was carved into the pommel before giving his thanks. 

“Last, but not least. Here is Aryas.” 

Catelyn opened hers before passing Arya one of the dolls dressed as a princess of Yi-Ti. Arya grabbed onto it for a moment before she threw it with a loud shout. “No!” 

Catelyn gasped. “Arya!” 

She screamed louder. “No!” 

Benjen couldn't help but laugh and look at the girl fondly.  

It's funny. For so many years, all he wanted to do was join the Nights Watch. To atone for his guilt. To earn honor. Its only when he was away from his family for almost a year that he really started to understand what he would have given up if Harry let him. 

Not much plot progression in this chapter. I just wanted to show off some of the dynamics between the Stark children and how Benjen is starting to heal. I know I promised a Manderly chapter. Thats happening next. I just wanted to set some things up before then. Such as Hadrian having spies in Kingslanding and Lord Manderly going South with the trade fleet. 

Growing Pains

Growing Pains 

The green stem slowly rose, gently swaying under Hadrians gaze. The plant got taller and taller as he watched, until finally the bulb on its head started too slowly open. After what seemed like hours, the blue of the rose petals was revealed, showing the famous Northern flower in all its beauty. 

Harry collapsed onto his back with a gasp. Sweat was pouring down his face and with a tiredness that goes beyond the body. 

“You’re still using pure power.”  

The comment was unwelcome. Harry made sure Leaf knew it by sending her the best glare he could manage under the circumstances. 

He must not have been intimidating enough under these circumstances, as she only responded with a small twitch of his lips. 

Harry decided it wasn't worth arguing, so he ignored her and slowly made his way back into a sitting position.  

After a few minutes when he was feeling slightly more rested, he turned back to the Child of the Forest. 

Understanding her cue to continue, she spoke. “I've told you before my lord. Life isn't simple.  You have to coax the plant to grow. Slowly and gently. You have to guide it. Encourage it. The plant wants to grow, you should just help it along. What you are doing is commanding it.” 

Her face took on a slightly amazed look when she continued. “Honestly, I am amazed you can get the plant to grow at all with the way you are going about it. I didn't think such a thing was possible.” A briefly contemplative look came across her face. “It must be because you are so powerful. I don't think it would be possible for anyone else.” 

Harry sighed. He knew this was going to take a lot of effort to learn going into these lessons. Still, he expected to make more progress after a month. The hardest part of this magic was the change in mindset that was required. In his last life, he was taught for years to have an iron control over his magic. To guide every part of the process. To let it more or less run wild with only general nudges, as was required for the nature magic of the Children, was a change that was taking some time to get used to.  

Occlumency wasn't much help either. As that entire discipline required him to have complete control over his mind, so trying to use that was counterproductive. 

Still, he had made some progress. 

Harry sighed and stood. Moving closer to the Weirwood tree before slumping with his back against it.  

Harry wiped the sweat from his forehead with his shirt before speaking. “I think that's enough about that. Let's move on to runes. “ 

Leaf pursed her lips slightly. “Very well. Last time we spoke about the Som rune.  You learnt about how that rune relates to water. About how it doesn't just signify water, but more specifically how water always flows. About how water is never still. How it is always in a state of change.” 

Harry nodded. The actual lesson had more complexities in it, as First men Runes, as Harry was starting to learn, were never as simple as meaning one thing. They always had a deeper more complex meaning that could relate to a lot of different subjects at once. While the runes he knew of before he was reborn were similar, these runes were more primal. They each had a lot more possible meanings.  

Harry was beginning to suspect that the true difficulty with using these runes was going to be narrowing down what he wanted the runes to do. The issue with that was that each rune in the scheme that he would use, also had multiple meanings, making it difficult. 

Another issue was that these runes weren't very well researched. The laws that governed them wasn't very well defined like back in his old world, where wizards researched exactly how runes worked for thousands of years.  

The Children weren't very useful in this aspect either. Most of them were only interested in nature. They never spent time researching how exactly it worked. Most of their knowledge came through pure experience. 

Harry already knew he would be spending a lot of time figuring out exactly what the laws regarding this runic language were. While he is sure his previous experience would be helpful, he knew each runic language had its own laws. With things only getting more complex when multiple languages were used. 

He tried using Latin to make a basic runic scheme that would only light up, but it only worked as long as he pushed a tremendous amount of power through it and stopped when he did. It also ended up giving him a migraine when he tried, so he quickly shelved that idea, for now. 

His leading theory was that it was because that language had no history in this world, so there was no way for the magic of the world to recognize what it was supposed to do. It's partly the same reason why Latin was used in most spells in the Wizarding World. The language was ancient enough to craft an impression into magic itself.  

Magic was almost sentient. It could learn, it could adapt, but it took centuries to millennia for that to happen, with thousands to millions of people driving the change.  

So unless he wanted to power every scheme he had with nothing but his personal power as opposed to the magic of this world, whilst giving himself truly terrible headaches, he would have to adapt. 

Leafs continued her lecture. “Today we will be learning about Mur. The Old Tongue word for stone. There are many deeper meanings of the word but we will focus only a few for now. Mur also means solid, unyielding or strength. It was generally carved onto homes or onto armor to give them extra durability. The biggest issue I've found when using this rune is that because it means unchanging, it is almost impossible to change the effect of the rune once it has been carved. It's even more difficult to remove the rune from anything it is carved on unless you totally destroy the object, or use the rune for water which completely destroys the rune. This is also one of the greatest aspects of the rune. If you add it onto the end of the scheme, it will make the scheme take on this property. Meaning that while the scheme can no longer be changed, it will last a long time. Be warned however. Since the word for water is the opposite of this rune, natural water will weaken the effect and destroy it completely given enough time. This is why there aren't many ruins left from when runecraft was more popular. The rain literally washed them away.” 

Harry nodded, fascinated. So runes were still subject to nature and its laws to some degree as water can carve through rock given enough time. 

Leaf bent over and drew a few lines in the sand. “This is the rune.” 

Harry only needed a glance to memorize it before he started asking what was on his mind. “How did this knowledge disappear from mortal lives? I know that the Faith could have gotten rid of them in the South, but even the men of the North and beyond The Wall know very little of runes. The crannogmen know the most and even their knowledge is basic.” 

Harry saw the Child of the Forest hesitate slightly before answering. “You’re right. The Faith did most of the work in the South. My people were the ones who removed the knowledge in the North. It took a millennium, but we mostly succeeded. The crannogmen were left mostly alone during this time as they were not interested in spreading this knowledge and because they stay the truest to the teachings we gave mankind after the first Pact we forged with them. Even then, much of their knowledge has been lost.” 

Harry struggled to contain his anger. After a few moments he succeeded and asked the important question. “Why?” 

She sighed and her shoulder slumped. “My lord, mankind has ruined this world. Before your kind came along, there was nature covering everything. My people were plentiful and powerful and happy. Magic was strong! The things we could do with our gifts back then....” 

She looked into the distance forlornly. “Our abilities now pale in comparison of what we used to be able to do. “ 

She looked into his eyes. “Then, mankind came. Your kind started this war by slaughtering our people. We tried to make peace, it didn't work. So, we fought and we won. But more came. We won again! But still more came. You! Just! Kept! Coming! We destroyed the arm of what you call Dorne, thinking it would stop you. But still you came. Your kind breeds so fast, that for us with such long lives, it was like there was never an end to your numbers. Eventually we were pushed back. “ 

She took a deep breath before continuing. “But mankind wasn't happy with that. You started hunting magical creatures for sport. Griffins. Magical birds. Pegasi....and countless other creatures. Men were responsible for the death of them all. While some may still live in hard-to-reach places, we haven't seen them for millennia. When mankind started mastering magic, things became even worse. Men started hunting even young Ice Dragons when they were young, so as to use them for rituals or for powerful potions. Others even dared chop down Weirwood trees for the power of their wood. Never second guessing the impacts they were having on the world. For thousands of years, we were hopeless. Mankind performed more and more cruelty with magic, staining it. After the War for the Dawn we had some hope that mankind would finally listen and work to help us protect what was left. But even that didn't last long before they went back to their old ways in search of more power. So, my people made a choice. We decided that mankind was unworthy of this gift. We started actively hunting those who were more knowledgeable of magic and destroying what knowledge they had. We were still more knowledgeable than mankind in magical arts and we worked very slowly, so it wasn't too difficult. By the time the Andals came and the survivors of my kind fled North, mankind was far weaker in magic. Once my people were safe, we used the next few invasions to completely erase whatever knowledge remained.” 

His shoulders slumped and he released a sigh. “I want to be angry. I really do. But I can understand. “ 

The wizards in his last life hid magic instead of using it to help muggles, and the people of this world were a lot more violent than they were. 

He looked up. “Why are you teaching me then? Because you swore yourself to me?” 

She shook her head. “Truthfully, it's because we hope...we pray... that you can save what's left. Magic...it strengthens in your presence.” She trailed off with a tone of awe. 

Harry nodded slightly. “I'll do my best.” 

Leaf abruptly looked at him with a deadly seriousness. “Then let's make sure you know as much as possible.” 

Line break--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

It was the next day that Harry finally got a piece of news he was almost anxiously waiting for. 

“So Benjens finally back?” His uncle asked. 

Harry allowed a smile to break out over his face and answered. “According to Lord Manderly, the trading voyage was very successful.” 

Ned smiled. “So what now?” 

He hummed. “Now, he will bring the things I personally asked for back to Winterfell where I will decide the best ways to make use of them. Meanwhile, the rest will be going to Kingslanding with Lord Manderly when he goes to speak to the King. From there, he will sell what he can and make his way to the Reach and then the Westerlands to sell the rest. ” 

Harry smiled. “Then he will make his way back and start preparing for the next voyage.” 

Ned looked slightly hesitant. “Will Benjen be going on that one?” 

He shook his head. “No, Benjen will be going to Sea Dragon Point. I only wanted him to go now so that he would get some experience with sailing. Now that he has that, he will be overseeing the construction of his castle and the building of a fleet.” 

Ned exhaled. “Its going to take a while before any significant progress is made.” 

The smirk fell off Hadrian's face. “Years.” He agreed. “The Lannister's should be handling most of the Ironborn, so at least the fleet construction shouldn't have too many issues from them.” 

He received a short nod. “Aye, there is that.” 

After a moment his uncle continued. “What will Lord Manderly tell the King?” 

Harry leant back into his seat. “The truth. They have bent the knee. They take years or decades to make children. I am going to be using the Giants in a few construction projects that I'm starting in the North. If the issues with the Faith gets fixed I will have no issue sending some Giants to the Stormlands, but I will not kill them when they are part of our culture and they have bent the knee.” 

Ned looked at him blankly. “You don't expect the King to fix the issues with the Faith, do you?” 

Harry released a short laugh. “No.” 

Ned frowned. “And if he commands you to kill them?” 

A grim look came onto his face. “Thats not happening uncle.” Harry doesn't give a shit what the Kings says. Bringing magic back was more important than listening to the idiot on the throne.  

Ned winced. “Do you understand what you are saying? You can't disobey the king. That could mean war?” 

Harry snorted. ”Robert better hope not.” 

Ned looked tired. “Hadrian...The other Kingdoms outnumber us. By a very large amount.” 

Honestly Harry was tempted to smile slightly at his uncle's naivety. “The North has never been conquered uncle. We bowed to dragons. Not men. Besides, you assume we will be facing every Kingdom.” 

Harry got a frown in response. “If the King calls his banners, they will respond.” 

He shook his head. Sometimes his uncle could be very blind. “Uncle, how hard do you believe it would be to turn the Kingdoms against each other?” 

Ned looked slightly pale and vaguely sick. “How would you do that?” 

Harry fought off a smirk, knowing Ned wouldn't take it well. “A moon ago, I had some of the Children send a few birds to Kingslanding. To find out what they can. They've already found out some interesting things.” 

Very interesting things indeed. Such as the fact the Kings children weren't his own. Harry almost didn't believe it when he was first told they were Jamie Lannisters. But after it was confirmed, he couldn't help but laugh.  

The Lannisters just gave him the perfect way to get the everyone off his back in case the King turned against him. A few letters and the realm would break into complete chaos. 

“What did you find?”Neds voice sounded hoarse.  

Harry frowned. “I'm not going to tell you uncle, because I know you will want to act on the information. Know that I won't use it unless it is necessary.” He meant it too. As long as the King didn't do anything stupid, he would be happy to keep the information to himself. But if a war started, he would make sure the North came out on top. 

“Necessary?” The word was barely a whisper. Harry knew he had to be gentle here. His uncle was still extremely loyal to Robert, no matter what Harry did to try and persuade him otherwise. Still, he knew that Ned would always be more loyal to his family. 

“Not unless he declares war against us. I will do everything I can to prevent a war. But you must understand uncle, my duty is to the North and its people. I will do everything in my power to make it stronger. To make it so our people no longer starve during winter.” 

Ned grit his teeth. “I understand.” 

He exhaled slowly. “Good. Now let's talk about you.” 

Harry could see his uncle force himself to relax. “Me?” 

He nodded. “Aye. Now that we have some gold coming in, it's time to begin the next stage in my plans.” 

Harry saw the surprise on his uncles face. “Shouldn't we first finish one of your projects before beginning another?” 

Harry nodded. “Ideally, we would. Unfortunately, each of those projects are likely to take years before I could consider them complete. I don't have that kind of time. So we are going to multitask. That means a few more projects are going to be started in the next few years.” 

Ned nodded reluctantly. “So what do you need me to do?” 

Harry smirked. “Travel down to the neck and start overseeing the reconstruction of Moat Cailin.” 

Ned looked stunned. “Truly?” 

He laughed. “No need to sound so shocked uncle. I told you years ago that it would be your seat, did I not?” 

His uncle nodded. “Aye, you did. I just thought there would be more important things to spend the gold on for now.” 

Harry smiled. “Aye, there are other things that will need gold in the years to come, but Moat Cailin is arguable the most important. By the time I die, I want the North to be a fortress, uncle. I want the idea of ever marching on us to be suicidal. This is more important than ever, as with the return of the Children and Giants, I foresee there will probably be Faith Militant armies trying to march on us long after we are both dead.” 

Unless I do something about the Faith. He silently thought to himself. 

His uncle looked contemplative. “Is there anything in specific you want for Moat Cailin?” 

He didn't need to even think of an answer as this was a question he had asked himself for years. “The South of the castle must be as defensible as you can make it, however the North can't have walls that are over twenty feet high and must have only average defenses. The castle needs to be able to be conquered from the North in case an enemy ever takes it. That way it can be taken back. “ Left unsaid was that House Stark could take the castle should the inhabitants ever go against them. It wouldn't do to have it be so structurally defensible that his uncle's line could rebel and retreat behind their walls to safety, making taking the castle a tremendous task. The Moat is too important a castle for that. Especially when they would be able to get supplies from the South in the event of a siege. If some of his future plans worked out, the castle would only get more valuable in the coming centuries. 

Judging by the look on his uncle's face, he understood what Harry wasn't saying. While he didn't seem like he liked it, the acceptance he showed meant that he understood Harry would have to take steps to make sure House Stark couldn't be threatened. 

Harry took a breath before continuing. “Other than that, you need to start thinking of a House name. The only requirement I have is that Stark not be in the name at all. I want to end that particular tradition.” That should help prevent any repeats of the Greystarks and hopefully prevent his uncle's line from getting too uppity about themselves, like the Karstarks sometimes do. 

His uncle opened his mouth to speak but was interrupted by a knock on the door.  

Harry gave his uncle a look to let him know they would be continuing this conversation later and then called out. “Come in.” 

The door was pushed open and Maester Luwin entered, holding a piece of parchment and looking a bit upset. He bowed before speaking. “My Lord, a letter came from Lady Maege Mormont.” 

He furrowed his brows in confusion. “What happened?” 

Luwin grimaced. “According to Lady Mormont, Lord Jorah was caught selling slaves.” 

Harry kept his face blank, but his mind was racing. “Why would he do such a thing?” He asked, although he already had an inkling of what was going on. 

Harry noticed the Maester wince slightly as Harry unintentionally leaked a bit of anger in his voice.  

Luwin was used to Hadrian though and didn't let it affect him for long. “My Lord, she said her nephew was spending gold like water for his new Hightower wife. She suspects that he was doing it to fund her lifestyle.” 

Harry ground his teeth. “And the gold I was sending to build a port?” 

Luwin sighed. “Lady Mormont suspects that he was using much of that gold on Lady Lyness as the port has slowed down construction considerably since Jorah took over once he came back from the war. Originally, she assumed that Lord Hightower was funding much of her lifestyle, but now that doesn't seem to be the case. Lord Jorah was still keeping some of the construction of the port going, in an effort to not look suspicious, so there has been some progress. Just not nearly as much as there should have been. Lady Maege offers her apologies in the letter, stating she should have kept a closer eye on the project. Instead of leaving it completely in her nephews' hands like Lord Jorah insisted on.” 

Harry lost it. His face was perfectly blank as he engaged occlumency to the highest levels he could. His mind, however, was running as fast as it could. 

Fucker! Absolute idiot! With a proper military port and trade on the Western coast, Bear Island was going to turn into a prosperous land! He just had to do his job for a few more years! But no! He had to ruin it for everyone!  

As the silence stretched on for over a minute, both the Maester and his uncle seemed to become more and more nervous. 

Eventually, when Harry felt like he had calmed down slightly, he spoke again. “What has been done with Jorah Mormont?” 

Luwin looked even more uncomfortable now if it were possible. “Lady Mormont wrote that he escaped with Lynessa Hightower.” 

Harry sighed and pinched the bridge on his nose. So now Harry doesn't even have anyone to punish. This is going to ruin the Mormonts reputation in the North. Not only was Jorah stealing a large amount of coin from House Stark, but he also engaged in slavery, one of the worst crimes a follower of the Old Gods could commit. 

This was going to make it more difficult to continue his plans for a Military Port to be built on the island. A lot of the Lords are sure to grumble that they don't deserve the honor. 

Still, he needed to be sure everything in the letter was true before he made any decisions. Harry didn't really doubt Maege Mormont, she always seemed like an incredibly honest and loyal woman, but he had to make absolutely sure. He couldn't just take her letter as proof without an investigation. 

He looked up at his uncle. “I need you to go to Bear Island uncle, Moat Cailin can wait a bit longer. Inspect the port and see how much has been done. Inspect the books and see how much gold has been stolen. One of the new tax collectors that have been trained will accompany you. I also need you to find out if everything Maege said is true, and if it was only Jorah involved in these crimes. Afterwards you will bring Maege back to Winterfell where I will decide what happens next.” 

Ned nodded with a somber look. “It will be done, nephew.” 

A Withering Rose

A Withering Rose 

“Go Loras!” Little Margaery called from her place next to Olenna on the ramparts as she watched her older brother tussle in the yard with some of the other young boys in training. 

“Ooh! “ She cheered as she watched Loras knock down a Florent boy a year his senior and place the sword at his throat. Garlan quickly moved between the two and picked a new boy for Loras to fight next. A boy who was new to the castle and whom Loras never fought before. Her youngest grandson practically jumped into position, always eager to learn under his older brother. 

“Ha Ha! Thats my boy! Someday you will be as great a warrior as your father!” 

Olenna scoffed under her breath. Each of her grandsons were practically already better with the sword than Mace ever was. Still, she couldn't help the slight smile that came onto her face. She loved moments like this. Where she could just be with her family. Without any obligations or politics that would force them to put on a show.  

Oh, her family wasn't perfect. Not by any means. Each of them had their issues. Olenna had always strived to try and look for any flaws that she could see in those she loved. Taking extra care to point them out whenever she could. Shes aware that it can be grating, but she does it out of love. She wouldn't live forever. Knowing their strengths and weaknesses would only help to keep them alive when she passed on. 

And occasionally they do learn to fix those weaknesses where they could. 

Olenna was wise enough to know that she knew very little about fighting. The actual techniques and skills were outside of her ability to judge.  Still, in all her years of life, she has developed many ways of reading the character of people. How they approach combat was just one of them. One that was occasionally very useful. Men often watched their words around her, too afraid to let something they shouldn't slip. But when they were fighting, they more often than not showed their true selves. 

The next bout started. Loras rushed in with no regard toward taking the measure of his opponent. Convinced of his own superiority before even the first clash of steel. Olenna sighed. That had always been his greatest weakness. His arrogance. 

She tried many times over the years to make him more self-aware. Humbler. She had very little success. The issue was that he was the best sword in his age group in the Reach. With every victory over his peers, his confidence grew, but so did his arrogance. He started to see himself as greater than his peers. That wouldn't be such a bad thing in a Tyrell, if he also didn't dismiss any of them as threats. Convinced none of them could ever be a danger to him. 

Fool boy. There were more ways to be destroyed than through fighting.   

After a few moments the spar ended. Loras firmly putting the boy onto the ground with little issue. Once the spar was called by his brother, he puffed his chest out like a peacock and strutted back to his starting position in the arena. Not even giving his opponent, a Redwyn boy, a second look or a friendly bit of advice to try and foster relations with him. Dismissing him completely. Already convinced the boy was inferior and thus not worth his time.  

Never mind the fact that the boy was set to be sent to the Citadel in a year or so, due to being a third son of above average intelligence. Their House could always use more friends amongst the Maesters. Not to mention dismissing opponents in such a way could breed resentment. If that boy looked negatively on House Tyrell, then he would be biased against them if he ever ends up giving advice to a Lord in their keep in the future. Sure, Maesters might swear to be neutral, but plenty of men don't stick to their oaths. Even if he is one of the few who does, it would be easy for that negative opinion to reach his future Lords ears without him even meaning it.  

Olenna doesn't believe it is possible for Maesters to be completely neutral. To be so would mean they have no opinions of their own that could cloud their views. While a good lord will always be aware that their Maesters opinions aren't always correct and can often be wrong or biased, there are all too many who can easily be swayed to their ways of thinking. Some who even prefer to let their Maesters rule in their stead whilst they drink and whore to an early grave. 

It wasn't worth making enemies through arrogance when just a kind word or two would get them allies instead. 

Thankfully it seems Garlen at least learnt that lesson judging by the way the boy's face lit up by whatever he said. 

She would have to have another word with Loras about his actions.  

Olenna started drifting off in her own mind, thinking about ways she could hammer that lesson into his head without him dismissing it, when a cough brought her back to the real world.  

Her focus shifted to her oldest grandson, Willas, who had shown up and was waiting patiently for her attention. Shifting slightly from his injured leg, leaning more weight onto his cane. 

Olenna scoffed. “Sit boy! You're making my neck hurt. Forcing an old woman to bend her neck to look up at you like that.” She grumbled. 

He flushed. “Apologies grandmother. “Without another word, he sat next to her and looked out over the training fields. That was always Willas greatest weakness. He was easily the smartest person in their family, apart from her, but he needed more of a spine. Especially when it came to his family. Olenna hoped he would start giving barbs back at her one of these days. Then she would be comfortable that their family had an heir that would take care of them and curb their poorer impulses. If he had more of a spine, perhaps he would have refused that idiotic joust his father insisted on that damaged his leg so badly. 

After a moment of silence, he began. “There's been news from Kings Landing regarding the North.” 

He instantly had her full attention. She noticed Mace had also turned away from the sparring and focused on Willas. Good, at least he knows whatever is happening in the North is important.  

After a moment of silence where Willas didn't continue, she spoke. “Well? Out with it boy.” 

He hesitated slightly before speaking. “It seems the news we received from our spies in the North was true.” 

Mace scoffed. “Ridiculous! Giants and The Children of the Forest are myths! My Maester taught this to me as a child!” 

“Our spies in Kings Landing say that it has been confirmed by the Master of Whispers father.” 

Mace rolled his eyes. “Then the eunuch is wrong. He is from Essos, they are a superstitious lot.” 

Olenna interrupted before Willas could argue. “I might not trust or like the Spider, but even I can admit he is good at his job. I doubt he would report news like this to the King unless he was certain. Not unless he wanted to be a laughingstock.” 

Mace had a stupid look on his face, opening and closing his mouth for several moments before he rallied. “Mother, you can't seriously believe this nonsense!” 

Olenna closed her eyes for a few moments. Gathering up the strength to deal with her sons' stubbornness. “If our spies and the Kings spies are both reporting the exact same thing. Then odds are, it's true.” In truth, Olenna already suspected that it was true even before this news. Too many of their agents were reporting the same thing for it to be a hoax.  

Mace all but collapsed onto the chair in disbelief. His face was blank for several moments before it quickly became filled with rage. “Those heathens! The Starks have gone too far!” Margaery and Willas both jumped slightly at the anger in his voice. 

“Mace!” She barked while gesturing to her most trusted guards to make sure the area around them was clear. They had already done so earlier, but with the topic turning the way it was, it was better to be careful. Margaery quickly turned back to watching the yard. Not interested in grown up talk just yet. Olenna was fine with this, she still had time to grow. 

Mace didn't even wait for them to begin their job before he went on a tirade. “No mother. Those creatures are an affront to the Seven! They are abominations. How can the Starks just accept them into their lands? “ 

Willas was the one who answered. “The Starks don't follow the Seven father.” 

“Still! Surely they know that this will just anger the Faith even more?” 

Olenna hummed. “I expect that is half the point.” 

Mace stared at her as if she was mad. “What?” 

Olenna didn't answer, instead looking towards Willas. She liked to challenge her grandchildren to think instead of providing all the answers.  

He furrowed his eyebrows before he started to speak. “There was already a growing movement amongst the Faith in the Vale for a new Faith Militant. Some parts of the Riverlands and even the Crownlands have been having issues as well. The Starks would have always been a target for the Faith Militant. So Hadrian Stark probably cared more about gaining new allies than trying to appease a Faith that would likely want him dead anyway. Especially as his allies provide a lot of legitimacy towards the Old Gods for the Northerners. Now after the Faith landed an army on their shores, most Northerners would be more united against the Faith than before. More united behind the Starks than before. Especially as the Boltons are no longer around. But I doubt Hadrian Stark planned for the Boltons or the Faith Militant army that when he accepted the Giants and Childrens fealty.” 

She hummed. “Anything else?” 

After thinking for several more moments, he shrugged. “I don't know grandmother. “ 

She was slightly disappointed but let it go. He was still young. He would learn. “Our spies also said that Hadrian Stark executed the Septons that lead that army in front of a Heart Tree. That is just pouring oil onto the fire. It's going to anger the Faith more than it has been already.” 

Mace twitched. Olenna refrained from rolling her eyes. There would be time to deal with Maces religious tendencies later. She just had to make sure he didn't do anything idiotic in the meantime. 

Willas frowned. “Why would he do that though. Surely he has enough enemies with the Faith as it is. Why give them more reason to hate him? It doesn't seem smart.” 

Her lips twitched. “What can the Faith do to the North? They have fought them off multiple times in the past. Now, the North is growing stronger. As long as they stay in their Kingdom, the North can fight off armies many times their size with little issue. It will be a while before the Faith can make a move on them with any hope for success. All that he has done by pissing them off, is making it so that the different factions of the Faith Militant will act more rashly to grow their power. Eager for their revenge and filled with religious zeal, they will start causing more chaos in the Vale and the Riverlands. Petyr Baelish has been very careful with his moves so far. Mainly using the Faith to hunt down the Mountain Clans in the Vale and bandits in the Riverlands so as to not anger the Lords too much. Now that all the fanatics that follow him have been angered so much, it will be difficult to control them. More of them will start causing chaos in the name of the Seven. The Lords won't take that well. Not when so many have already been prevented from acting by Jon Arryn. It is only a matter of time before things start spiraling out of control.” 

Now Willas started to look properly worried. “We should kill Baelish before that happens. If they gain ground in the Reach, it could be a disaster.” 

Olenna chuckled bitterly. “Oh, it won't be that easy dear. I already looked at ways to discreetly get rid of him a while ago. Baelish is always surrounded by dozens of men who are fanatically loyal to him and hundreds more who are only very loyal. He moves around constantly and is incredibly paranoid about what he eats or drinks. He is smart. An assassin would be incredibly difficult to get into position to do something about him. A faceless man is an option, but that would cost a fortune. Less discreet ways to kill him would run the risk of being traced back to us. Which would be a disaster. Even if we kill him, we run the risk of making him a martyr.” 

Olenna shook her head. “No, what we need to do is make sure that the High Septon doesn't have any ideas about preaching the same message as Baelish about a new Faith Militant. We need to then make sure he is well protected. Any signs of the Faith Militant in the Reach need to be stamped out as soon as they appear. We need to start looking into our Lords, making sure none of them get any foolish notions of supporting a resurgent Militant. It cannot be allowed to gain momentum in our Kingdom. Sooner or later, the other Lords in the Riverlands and the Vale will tire of Jon Arryns approach of trying to appease them and stamp them out.” 

Willas looked hesitant. “I doubt it will be that easy grandmother. They are already quite powerful. I have no doubt their numbers will grow drastically now.” 

Olenna sighed, feeling all her years. “No, it won't be easy. Many lords will support the Faith, for one reason or another. Others will fight against them with all they have. I expect a civil war. It will only get worse the longer the King does nothing to stamp it out. All we can do is prevent it from gaining any hold in the Reach while preparing for the coming storm.” 

A somber silence descended on them.  

Mace decided this was the correct time to open his mouth. “If the Faith is going to be such a problem, why don't we support them?” 

Willas looked at his father with a baffled expression. Honestly Olenna wasn't that much better. 

Noticing the looks on their faces he hurried to explain. “We don't have to do it openly. We can give them some weapons. Let them preach with little issue in the Reach without stopping them and watch the way the wind blows. If they look as if they are going to lose, we lose little. If they look like they are going to win then we can be assured that they won't move against us.”  He started to get excited. “Perhaps we can even have them preach about our families right to rule the Reach if they win. No one would move against us if we had a restored Faith Militant on our side. Our family would be secure.” 

Olenna had to physically hold herself back from hitting him. “That might be the dumbest idea you've ever had Mace. The Faith Militant cannot be controlled. It's made up of fanatics. They're too unpredictable. Thats not even going into what our bannermen or the King would do if they found out about it. No one with any sense wants a New Faith Militant. If we are discovered, it would be catastrophic. The only reason the King hasn't done anything about them yet is because Arryn believes he can reason with them. He thinks he can walk in the Conciliators shoes and end this uprising with a quill. Sooner or later the King will realize it was the Cruel that broke them, the Conciliator just gave them a way out of further destruction that they could swallow. This will be bloody before it is done. The best we can do is keep our family out of it completely.” 

He clenched his jaw before relenting. “Fine mother. But what about the North. They are just getting more and more powerful and if you are right, the South is about to get a lot weaker. Something must also be done about those abominations.” 

She hummed. Here, Mace actually had a point. “Our reports say there are only a few hundred of them. I doubt Stark would be willing to risk them in a war. Even if he does use them, men have driven them to the point of almost extinction before. It can happen again. But we can't plan on anything without knowing more about them. I don't want to make any rash moves. As for the North getting more powerful, there's not much we can do. Their new farming practices will cause their population to rise no matter what we do. There's no stopping it now. We can start looking at perhaps making an alliance with them. It will be difficult now that Hadrian Stark has taken in those creatures and with the Faith Militant on the rise, but it might be doable if we can get some of our bannermen to propose it depending on how the next few years go. As long as it looks as if it isn't our idea our bannermen might accept it.” 

Mace looked horrified. “You want to ally with them?” 

She scoffed. ”I don't see why not. Hadrian Stark is going to marry Myrcella Baratheon. If we can get a marriage agreement with Sansa Stark. Then that's Tyrell, Stark, Lannister and Baratheon all allied together for the next generation. We would be secure. Then if we can get Margaery as Queen, she would also have a strong list of alliances to draw upon. We have time to consider that however. It's better to see what happens in the next few years before deciding anything.” 

Mace looked angry for a brief moment before he calmed down. “ Surely the King will no longer marry his daughter to Stark?” 

She snorted. “I doubt this would stop him. More, he will need to have a marriage alliance with Stark now. Some Northerners have always called for independence. Those voices are only going to get louder as the North gets more powerful. Another reason to try for a marriage with Sansa Stark if we want Margaery to be Queen of all Seven Kingdoms, instead of just six of them.” 

Mace huffed. “It doesn't matter how strong they get mother. Declaring independence will just set all other Kingdoms against them. They won't be able to defend against us united.” His eyes shone. “Especially if we use their own techniques to grow our own strength.” 

“We’ve already been over this Mace. We already use most of the land we have that's suitable for farming and we export as much as we can at the moment.” She snapped. “If we adapt their new farming techniques without proper preparation, we will have a lot of food that will go to waste. We need to first finish opening up new trade deals with Essos, the Iron Islands and Dorne before we can use these techniques on a large scale. I have already been working on that and have a few promising contracts. But even then, we will have to take it slow as the price of food will plummet even more if we adopt it too quickly, leading to plenty of farmers earning a lot less coin which will just lead to large scale banditry. The Riverlands is about to have that problem very soon because the Tullys decided to adapt as many farms as they could without thinking of the long-term consequences. “ 

She took a breath. “We need to let our smallfolk slowly get used to this reality so they can adapt and find new jobs. We also need to prevent merchants from the Riverlands from selling their cheaper produce in the Reach, to try and keep as much coin in the Kingdom as possible. It will cost us some coin in the short term, but we will make up for it by avoiding chaos and making sure we prepared proper supply lines to Essos, so that when we do start using these techniques, we have somewhere to sell all the excess food we will have while still making a lot of coin.” 

Willas groaned. “Desperate people in the Riverlands will be all the happier to join the Faith Militant.” 

Olenna grunted. “Things are about to get a lot more complicated.” 

Mace cursed. “Fucking Starks!” 

That was something that she could actually agree with. “Fucking Starks.” 

The Stag Prince

The Stag Prince 

“Let's begin this session of the small council my Lords.” Lord Arryn said as he took his seat. 

Stannis took a small sip of water and contented himself with remaining silent. Usually, Lord Arryn starts these meetings by asking for any news from Varys. 

He didn't disappoint. “Varys, any news we should know about?” 

An unusually serious look came on to the Spiders face. “There are a few different songs from around the Kingdom that might interest you my lord, but the news from the North is definitely the most important.” 

Jon Arryn rolled his hand in a ‘get on with it’ gesture. 

The spider seemed eager to oblige the Hand of the King. “On his way back from visiting The Wall, Hadrian Starks party was attacked by an army of Faith Militant fanatics.” 

The effect of those words was immediate. Jon Arryn paled significantly. “What happened?!” 

Stannis didn't hold the Lord Hands tone against him. For the Faith to be bold enough to attack a Lord Paramount, one favored by the king no less, means that things will definitely be getting more complicated very soon.  

The eunich made a calming gesture. “Lord Stark won the battle my Lord. No important Lords were lost, thankfully. After the battle, Lord Stark retreated to Winterfell briefly before calling his banners and marching on the Dreadfort. Where he proceeded to win there as well, executing Lord Bolton and his bastard son in the aftermath.“ 

Jon Arryn released a breath and seemed calmer now. “Why would he march on Bolton?” 

Varys shrugged. “It seems as if Lord Stark blamed Roose Bolton for letting the army of faith fanatics into the North. There were over a thousand of them based on what my little birds have said. It seems they landed on Boltons shores without the Lord in question doing anything about them.” 

Stannis nodded his head. Seems like Bolton was plotting behind his Lords back. 

Jon Arryn must have agreed. “I see. I will send Hadrian an apology for the actions of the Faith Militant. What about Domeric Bolton?” 

Varys tittered. “It seems like House Stark has grown tired of the Boltons scheming. Domeric has been sentenced to The Wall once he arrives in the North.” 

Jon Arryn winced. “I will try write to the boy to make him reconsider. Deposing a House as old and storied as the Boltons isn't something that should be done so easily.” 

Here Stannis interjected. “The Boltons have risen against House Stark multiple times. Each time they were shown mercy. It seems like Hadrian isn't going to give them another chance. I doubt many in the North will mourn their loss.” 

Varys nodded. “Most Lords in the North seem happy to see them go.” 

Jon leant back in his seat. “Very well. What's done is done. I only hope Lord Royce doesn't take it too badly, he seemed fond of young Domeric.” 

Stannis nodded, happy the crown wouldn't have to be involved with that foolishness. The North is a stubborn kingdom. Most Lords from there wouldn't take the crown interfering in their matters very well unless it was for good reason. 

Still, something was bothering Stannis.  

“Why did it take so long for us to hear about this? Hadrian managed to march to Winterfell, call his banners and then march on the Dreadfort before news reached us? I find that hard to believe.” 

The rest of the Lords also looked curiously at the Spider. Waiting for whatever excuse he no doubt has ready. 

He shrugged slightly. “There are a few reasons. First the borders in the North were locked down after the battle. No doubt, in case there were any more Faith Militant members trying to sneak into the Kingdom. This made it difficult for my little birds to travel or to send messages. That delayed me slightly, but I quickly found ways around it. No, the true issue was that some of the reports I was getting were unbelievable. So, I had to make sure to verify them before bringing news my lords. “ 

Lord Estermont looked interested. “Unbelievable?” 

The spider hesitated slightly. “I received news that a group of Giants and Children of the Forest bent the knee to Hadrian after he took a small journey through The Wall. They followed him back and fought in the battles I mentioned.” 

Pycelle scoffed. “Peasants fables. The Giants and Children are nothing more than myth. “ 

Varys nodded slightly. “I thought so too. So, I had to use a different source to check and then a third one once that came back with the same news. All my birds in the North are singing the same song. Hadrian Stark got Giants and Children to bend the knee to him and become his citizens.” 

Stannis was stunned. He didn't know what he was supposed to do with what he just heard. By the look on his face, neither did Jon Arryn. Pycelle however.... 

Slam! 

The old man was leaning over the desk, breathing heavily. “We must speak to the King! If this is true, we cannot let these creatures into Westeros! They must be hunted down and killed! We must command Stark to destroy them all!” 

The old man was basically roaring at the top of his lungs, his ever-present weakness nowhere to be seen. Everyone else around the table just stared at him with baffled expressions. He always suspected the Grandmaester put up an act, but he never expected to have it confirmed in such a way. Stannis was ashamed to admit, it took a few seconds for him to close his mouth. Jon Arryn was quicker to recover and reply. 

“How do you suppose we force Stark to do that? He accepted them as his subjects. They bent the knee to him and he probably swore to protect them. His honor won't let him kill them unless there is a legitimate reason.” 

The Grandmaesters wild eyes swiveled towards him. “If the king commands it, he must!” 

Varys interjected. The surprise on his face at the Grandmaesters actions gone now, replaced by amusement. “I didn't know you would feel so strongly about this Grandmaester.” 

Jon Arryn cut in before Pycelle could speak. “How many are there, Varys?” 

The Spider tittered. “Not many my Lord. My little birds say there is less than two hundred Giants and around one hundred Children.” 

The hand released a breath of relief. “So not enough to fight a proper war then?” 

Varys shrugged. “I doubt Lord Stark would be willing to use them in a proper war if he had a choice my lord. Not when these might be the last of their species. Still, it isn't wise to take the chance. I agree with the Grandmaester. We should get rid of them before they have the chance to increase their numbers. Hadrian Stark should also be punished. This is a decision that should have involved the crown.” 

Jon Arryn spoke. “I am not comfortable with having them around either, but I doubt it will be as simple as you say. Giants could be a great asset and who knows what the Children could do. I don't know if the North would give them up so easily. Especially as we still haven't dealt with the Faith as Lord Stark has been asking, for a while now. Punishing the Starks will also be difficult, they are some of Roberts most loyal bannermen. If the North reacts badly, it could severely weaken the crown. ” 

Varys tittered. “And why hasn't Lord Stark informed us about this before now if he is so loyal?” 

Stannis grit his teeth. The Spider had a point. The crown should have been informed. Their permission should have been asked.  

Jon Arryn rubbed the bridge of his nose. “I did receive a raven a fortnight ago, saying Lord Manderly will be making his way to Kings Landing for a matter of some importance in a few weeks, on behalf of Lord Stark. I thought it might be about the Faith, but it seems I was wrong.” 

Pycelle choked. “I don't remember seeing any such raven.” 

Jon Arryn shrugged. “One of my servants found the bird wondering around the tower of the hand. It must have gotten lost.” 

Stannis cut in before another argument started. “Regardless, both Varys and the Grandmaester have a point. The crown should have been asked before such a decision was made. “ 

Jon Arryn sighed. “I agree with you. I follow the Faith. The idea of those creatures is disturbing. Regardless, its done. I will inform Robert about this and wait until we hear what Lord Manderly has to say. For now, that's all we can do. Unless any of you feel like starting a war with the North when the Faith Militant is rising.” 

Stannis had to reluctantly nod his head. Such a war would no doubt give the Faith Militant a great opportunity to grow much stronger. Then it will be incredibly difficult for the Crown to destroy them.  

Jon Arryn seemed to have aged before his eyes. “My biggest concern will be how the Faith will react when they learn of this.” 

Stannis spoke quickly. “Not well. This will just inflame them more. We should march on them before their numbers start swelling.” 

Lord Arryn hesitated. “I have already spoken to the High Septon. He agreed to preach against these fanatics. It will be best if he does so for a while before we make any drastic moves, so they aren't treated like martyrs.” 

Stannis grit his teeth. “Will he still speak against them once he learns of the Giants and Children?” 

Jon sank back into his chair. “I will make sure of it.” 

Stannis grit his teeth. “My Lord, it would be best if we crushed them right now. If they continue to gain power, they might be beyond our ability to destroy. Maegor had dragons when he fought them and he committed great atrocities. Even then, he didn't truly win against them.” 

Lord Arryn nodded calmly. “Aye, Jaeherys did. With politics. That is how they were defeated then, and this is how we will defeat them now.” 

His jaw hurt from how hard he was clenching it. After several seconds he relaxed and sat back. Trying not to think about Jon Arryns foolishness. They aren't going to defeat this rogue Septon with politics. They need to defeat him on the field. 

After several moments of silence, Lord Arryn straightened and spoke. “We can't do anything more about this right now. So, let's move on.” 

They all nodded their agreement. Even if it was reluctant on most of their parts. 

“The tourney for the Kings name day cost us two hundred thousand gold dragons. We had to borrow that money from the Iron Bank as we already have a large debt with the Lannisters.” Lord Arryn explained. 

Stannis held back on the urge to grind his teeth. His foolish brother was beggaring the realm and no matter what was said to him, he didn't care at all. This on top of all the other issues, such as the Faith and now the North was going to collapse his rule if Robert wasn't careful. 

Releasing a sigh, the old man continued. “We need to decide upon a new candidate for a master of coin my lords. Our debt problems keep getting bigger since Lord Mallister had to leave his post for the Riverlands. We need someone to improve that situation.” 

Stannis leaned back into his chair. Content to hear the other suggestions first. They should have had this conversation a moon ago, when Mallister was forced to leave to try and calm down the issues with the Faith, but with those Septons continually causing new issues they kept getting distracted. 

Pycelle, the puppet that he is, was the first to give his suggestion. Like all of his previous ones, it would undoubtedly benefit the Lannisters the most. 

“Hagh. Hahg. “The old fool coughed before clearing his throat, took a shaky gulp of his water and then slowly placed his mug back down. You would think he wouldn't be so shameless after the scene he caused earlier. Just when even Jon Arryn looked to be getting impatient he finally spoke. “I believe Kevin Lannister would be a good choice my Lord.”  

Stannis didn't even try and hide his grimace. 

The old Maester continued when it looked as if Jon Arryn was about to ask Varys for his opinion. “The Crown already owes half a million gold Dragons to the Lannisters. On top of all the coin owed to the Iron Bank.  I have no doubt Lord Tywin would be more lenient on any repayments if his brother was the one handling the crowns finances. More likely, Kevin would be told to prioritize paying the Iron Bank first as Tywin's grandson is going to be the next King and it is better if his reign doesn't start with him being in debt to the Braavosi.” 

Varys cut in. “Yes I'm sure Lord Lannister would prefer the crown is only indebted to him, all the better for him to exert his influence, hmm?” The eunuch tittered. 

Pycelle spluttered. “Why I nev- Lord Lannister wouldn't. His grandson is going to sit on the throne! I'm sure Tywin Lannister would want his rule to be as strong as possible!” 

Varys smiled. “As long as Joffreys rule benefits house Lannister i don't think Tywin will care if the boy is seen as a puppet. “ 

A briefly enraged look came upon the old Maesters face before Lord Arryn interrupted the two. 

“Enough!” 

The sight of Jon Arryn raising his voice was enough for both men to shut their mouths. The Falcon Lord continued without giving them any more time to speak. “Lord Varys, who is your recommendation?” 

The eunuch kept his face as placid as it always seems to be. “Perhaps someone from Dorne or the Reach my lord. We could use this as an opportunity to bind those kingdoms closer to the throne.” 

Stannis bit his tongue to keep himself from saying something unwise.  

Thankfully Lord Arryn didn't like those options either judging by the grimace on his face. “Even if I trusted anyone from those Kingdoms to do their job, the King would never accept them.”  

After a moment he turned towards Lord Estermont. “Your recommendation my Lord?” 

The usually reserved man took a few moments to think before speaking. Something that Stannis greatly appreciated about the man, he never spoke unless he had something important to say. “I think someone else from the Riverlands would be a good choice. Perhaps Lord Vance or Piper.” 

Arryn appeared to be thinking over those choices. “Neither would be a bad decision. I will give their names to Robert.” 

The Hand then looked at Stannis next. “Lord Baratheon, your choice?” He asked. 

Despite himself Stannis had to take a few moments to think. Before this meeting, he would have suggested someone from the Stormlands but now things have changed. “I believe we should wait and see what Lord Manderly has to say in regards to Lord Starks actions. Depending on how that turns out, it might be prudent to give the position to Lord Manderly so that we can keep a closer eye on the North. Otherwise, i would suggest Lord Tarth.” 

Jon rubbed his chin. “Yes, Lord Manderly would be a good choice. One of the Starks strongest bannermen. A clever man who is well versed in trade and coin. Thats a good choice. I will give his name to Robert when I tell him about this meeting and what the North has been up to.” 

After several seconds of silence, the old Lord continued. “Next item, the fleet. How goes the rebuilding after the Ironborn Rebellion my lord?” 

Stannis sat up slightly straighter. “There have been a few....” 

Line break........... 

That afternoon Stannis found himself in his solar going over the numbers involved for the fleet. Working out how much gold he will need for the supplies and men for the next few ships that will be built, and trying to find ways to cut down on the cost without lowering the quality of the ships. 

He had already been at this for several hours and was just finalizing things before he takes a break for his evening meal once it started growing dark.  

He dipped his quill into the inkpot and scratched out a few of the numbers, changing them to something a bit more realistic than what he originally calculated before he was interrupted by a knock on his door. 

“Enter.” He stated loud enough for the guards on the other side to hear. He went back to finishing the last few numbers when his door was opened and a familiar set of footsteps came through.  

Stannis ignored them for now, knowing that Ser Davos would wait quietly until he was finished. A few minutes later he placed the quill back into the inkpot and blew softly on the parchment, drying the ink before placing it aside.  

After taking a few moments to make sure his desk was neat, he looked up to Ser Davos who was waiting patiently. “Ser Davos.” He said inclining his head. 

The Onion Knight smiled slightly. “My Lord, you asked to see me?” 

Stannis gestured to the chair across from him. “Take a seat.” 

The man did so. Stannis stood up and walked to a table on the side of the room grabbing a pitcher of water and two cups. “Water?” He offered.  

On hearing the affirmative, he poured himself and his loyal knight a cup of water each. Most Lords would have servants do this for them, Stannis always found that wasteful. It was just easier and less annoying to do it himself than have a servant constantly standing over him waiting to be called. The only times he made use of them in such a way was for formal events, when they were needed for appearance's sake. 

He placed the water on the desk and took a seat. Gesturing for Davos to help himself. 

After taking a few sips of his water he began. “I require opinion on something. “ Truthfully, that was what he valued the most about his loyal knight. Davos might not be very skilled when it comes to combat or the minutia of politics, but he has a unique way of viewing the world which often gives Stannis a much-needed perspective. More than that, he was honest. A trait Stannis appreciate more every time he is forced to deal with backstabbing lords and their games. Talking with Davos more often than not helped Stannis get his own thoughts in order. 

Davos nodded slightly. “I'll serve however I can my lord.” 

After collecting his thoughts for a few moments, he spoke. “Hadrian Stark travelled beyond The Wall and got Giants and Children of the Forest to bend the knee to him. He didn't ask for the crowns opinion before he accepted their fealty. On his way back to Winterfell, he was attacked by an army made up of the Faith Militant, which he destroyed. Then he marched and ended the Boltons who I suspect were behind the plot of the Faith Militant attacking him. What do you make of this?” 

Stannis felt his lips twitch slightly as he saw the usually unflappable man seemingly struggle to form a coherent sentence.  The look on his face could only be described as bewildered. After several moments Davos seemed to gain his wits back and spoke hesitantly. “My Lord, are you sure that-” 

Stannis interrupted him. “Varys has apparently checked three separate times to make sure the news isn't false. No, I believe the eunuch believes it is true. Which means it most likely is.” Stannis was just grateful that Davos didn't think he was jesting with him. 

Davos fiddled with the sack around his neck holding his fingerbone for several moments before speaking. “Well, I can't speak about the politics of such a thing my lord. Other than the fact it is going to upset the Faith, which I doubt Lord Stark cares about. Not when the Faith was already going for Old God worshippers. That might have something to do with his decision to accept their fealty. If the Faith is dead set on seeing Old God worshippers killed, he might have seen it as a way to increase belief in the Old Gods amongst his people even more. Men will fight ten times harder for a cause they believe in with all their heart.” 

Stannis nodded to himself as he leant back. Davos had a point. If the Faith Militant got powerful enough, they would surely go after the North eventually. Hadrian Stark just made it so that the Northern beliefs were cemented even more, making the Faiths self-appointed task of converting Old God worshippers that much more difficult. 

Davos continued. “Then there are probably more practical reasons as well. Giants are said to have built Storms End. Possibly the strongest castle in Westeros. No doubt Hadrian Stark plans to use them in projects of his own. With how smart he is supposed to be, he will probably have them rebuild Moat Cailin or for building fortresses along the coasts. Making attacking the North even more difficult.” 

Stannis hummed. “It is already basically suicide to attack the North. There is a reason that it has never been conquered. Only dragons made the Starks kneel. Conquest by a conventional army would be extremely bloody. If they fortify the North even more, it would be all but impossible.” 

Davos nodded. “Aye my lord, then there is the Children. They are said to have their own strange magics. Who knows what they can do?” 

Stannis nodded his head slightly. The Children of the Forest were said to have broken the Arm of Dorne. Before today, Stannis would have scoffed at such a notion being real. But now? He can't, and that is disturbing. 

Davos interrupted his thoughts with a frown. “Do you believe the Starks might sue for independence my Lord?” 

Stannis struggled with his thoughts for a moment before he answered. “No, not right now at least. Ned Stark is loyal to my brother, no matter his faults. Hadrian Stark has also already agreed to marry Myrcella in the future. If there is one thing I have learnt about Northerners, it is that they value their word more than gold. It will also take the North many years to properly fortify. For now, they still have a low population. Attacking their coasts would still do a lot of damage and it is still possible to conquer them that way. Especially if every other Kingdom is against them. In the future though? Hadrians children or grandchildren might. The problem is, I don't know what can be done to stop that. The North is already becoming self-sufficient, they import less food every year. If the Giants and Children increase their populations, it will be difficult to enforce the thrones rule on them. ” 

Ser Davos shrugged. “Seems a bit like Dorne in my opinion. They are almost impossible to conquer and still follow the throne.  Perhaps if the throne got Giants and Children of their own it might make it easier to deal with the North. The Riverlands and the Reach can surely hold larger populations of them than the North.” 

Stannis frowned. It was a good idea. But it would be tricky to execute properly. They would need to crush the Faith Militant first and even then... Stannis pursed his lips in thought. “Perhaps. It is a nice thought, but I don't see it happening very easily. Not with the smallfolk being so suspicious. As for Dorne, they knew the throne would keep trying to conquer them until they gave in. So they just accepted the best terms they could.” 

Davos frowned. “Wouldn't the North realize the same?” 

He pursed his lips. “Perhaps. They haven't broken faith with the throne yet. Even when the Targaryens lost their dragons. Northerners take their word very seriously as I have said. So perhaps they never will. Giants and Children might make them consider it though.” 

Davos shrugged slightly. “It's a pity my Lord. They could probably do a lot for the realm if they were in the South. Giants would make building so much easier and the Children might know many secrets that men have forgotten.” 

His knight looked at him and hesitated.  

Stannis frowned. “Spit it out.” 

Davos ducked his head. “I'm sorry my lord. It's just, I had a thought. The Children were said to be skilled in magic. Greyscale is said by some to be a magical disease, do you think they could...?” The man was looking more uncomfortable the longer he spoke. 

Stannis leant back and tried to calm his racing heart. But the more he thought about Davos words, the more the thought dug deeper into his mind. 

Eventually, Stannis spoke. “Perhaps.” 

Settling In

Settling in 

“sentence you to die.” A greatsword swung through the air and cleaved through the struggling Septon's neck. His head rolled on the grass and blood spurted onto the Hearttree. 

The Greatjon effortlessly lifted the stained blade into the air with a laugh. “Hah! Hah! Thats another one of you cunts feeding the Old Gods! Who's next?” 

“Heathen! You won't get away with this! Our brothers in the South will have their revenge! Your souls will burn in the Seven Hells for all eternity! They will burn down your savage trees and bring light into this godless land. You will-” 

“Him.” Harry interrupted the man's incessant rambling. This was the fourth Septon they had executed thus far and Harry was getting tired of listening to their voices. 

As the struggling Septon was dragged forward Lord Umber let out another laugh. “Aye. His voice is starting to give me a headache.” 

When he was before the block Harry spoke. “Do you have any last words?” 

“Your house will be cleansed in the fires of justice. My brothers-” 

“I shouldn't have asked.” Harry interrupted with a gesture to the men holding him. Harry was just grateful his uncle Ned wasn't here to see this. No doubt he would disapprove of how little respect he is showing these men. It was only himself, Lord Umber, Lord Karstark as well as a few of his Winterguard who were witnessing the executions. All the other Lords made their way straight back to their keeps instead of coming to Winterfell and his uncle was busy catching up with his family and taking some time off on his duties at Hadrian's urging. 

The Septon was slammed down on the block falling mercifully silent as the wind was knocked out of him. “For your crimes against the North, I, Hadrian Stark, Lord of Winterfell, sentence you to die.” There was no need to involve the Kings name in such a death. Nor was there a need to keep repeating his titles. This man's crimes were against his House, so the justice will be done in his name. 

Another head rolled, adding to the pile already on the floor. For a moment, Hadrian started to wonder about his mental state. He never expected that he would ever get used to ordering deaths this easily. Then he remembers what these bastards would do to his family if given the chance and the moment passes. He will do what he has to. 

The last two Septon's are mercifully silent compared to the previous ones. The next Septon dragged forward has tears streaming down his face and seems almost catatonic with fear.  

“Any last words?” He asks, offering them at least this basic right.  

After a few moments the shivering man replies. “C-can I please take the Black My Lord?” 

Harry scrunches his nose up in disgust. The man was more than happy to deal out death on ‘Heathens’ when given the chance. Now that it was time to die for his own Gods, he was nothing more than a coward. He didn't even bother offering a reply. 

A vague gesture to the men holding him had the Septon had him slammed into the block and the process repeated itself with another head joining the growing pile. 

The last Septon was probably the one that Hadrian respected the most. Well, as much as he could respect any religious fanatics at least. He kept his silence throughout all the executions and kept a mostly blank facade in the wake of his looming death. At least this one wasn't a coward.  

Once again Harry asked the question. “Do you have any last words?” 

The Septon, a bald man in his late thirties looked at him steadily. “You know the Faith isn't going to let this go? Not when you executed us in front of a Heartree instead of a Sept. This will just make my brothers angrier.” 

Harry felt a vicious smile come onto his face. “Thats the point. I want the Septon's to make a nuisance of themselves. I want the Lords in the South to get sick of them. I want them to cause chaos and weaken their realms. When the most devout and fanatic among you eventually decide to march on the North in strength, I will have an army waiting to destroy them at Moat Cailin. That will make it much easier to break the Faith and spread Weirwood  trees and the faith of the Old Gods in the South afterwards. I have a feeling a lot of smallfolk will be happy to worship gods that don't demand any of their coin.” 

The man looked horrified. “You monster.” He whispered. 

Now Harry was annoyed. “You lot will keep coming after us either way. Nothing I can do will change that. At least this way, hopefully you will damage your reputations in the eyes of the smallfolk in the South. Besides, you burned down our Weirwood trees for thousands of years. You hunted the Giants and the Children almost to the point of extinction. You planned to keep doing it.  Now that it's going to happen to you, you feel angry. The hypocrisy is baffling. The Faith of the Seven is an institution that is ripe for corruption. It was made by men to control other men. At least we have proof of our gods. I won't have my descendants fighting the Faith if I can end the problem here. Or at least reduce its influence.” 

He paused for a moment to let what he was saying truly sink in. Harry can't help but feel disgusted with himself for all the death that he knows will happen. “ I admit that I am unhappy about the loss of life it will cause and I will do my best to minimize it, such as having the most fanatic come to us instead of having to hunt them, but the Faith has proven time and time again it won't tolerate Old God worshippers. Trying to invade the North over and over again.  Hopefully this will be our last war against you.”  

Not to mention Harry planned to strengthen magic in this world. Magic is life and it angers him that the Faith has done all they can to stamp it out. If he doesn't change something drastic, then there are good odds it might become even weaker than it is in a few centuries.  Regardless of the fact Hadrian strengthens it just by existing. If the Faith ever gets the opportunity to cut down the Weirwoods in the North, it will cause terrible damage. Even if it doesn't, the Faith will always hate those who use magic. He won't have his grandchildren going through witch hunts and hiding from the muggles. He won't have another Wizard Vs Muggle war in a few centuries. Not if he can help it. He wants magic to be revered and respected for the gift that it is. Not destroyed out of greed, fear or jealousy. 

“You monster! Your gods will never win! The Seven will see you-” Harry sighed. Great, now this one also started raving at him. He gestured for the guards and he was swiftly placed on the block. A few moments later he quickly lost his head. 

Harry shrugged.  His speach was meant for Umber and Karstark anyway. They are both some of the most devout Old God worshippers in the North. Both of them hate the Faith. With them knowing one of Hadrians ultimate goals, they were more likely to go along with a lot of his plans.  

Still...”Not a word of this to anyone my Lords.“ He commanded. It wouldn't do for this to get out. 

“Aye My Lord.” “Aye lad.” 

Before Hadrian turned around to leave the Godswood he saw the dark smiles that appeared on both men's faces. 

Yes, Harry feels those two will be with him all the way. 

Line break......... 

A few days later Harry was sitting in his solar desperately trying to keep from banging his head against his desk in frustration as he was going through all of his paperwork. 

After the last few moons of stress, Harry wanted nothing more than to take some time away from work and rest. He felt that he had more than earned it. Unfortunately, things didn't just stop happening because he was away from Winterfell.  

A lot of changes had been happening throughout the North over the last year due to all of the projects that Harry started. He hoped that by putting some capable people in charge of these projects, he would minimize the amount he would have to oversee them. 

 Unfortunately, Harry forgot one very crucial fact.  Even the Lords of this world were not nearly as well educated as the most common person back on Earth. So many of the decisions a project would need required his specific touch to make sure they weren't disasters. 

Thats what lead to his current issue. Being gone from Winterfell for so many moons means that the work kept piling up and projects began to stall. His uncle was able to solve many of the problems, such as ensuring that there were constant supplies going to the builders at Sea Dragon Point and that banditry was kept down. But other problems required Hadrian's touch to make sure a wrong decision wasn't made that would lead to disaster in the future. Such as some of the ideas coming from Bear Island for the ports they were supposed to be building.  

One such example was Jorah Mormants idea to hire workers from the South to help build the rest of the port and naval academy instead of using people from the North, because it was taking longer than expected. 

Hadrian honestly had no idea what the Bear Lord was thinking when he proposed such an idea. He knew the man married a woman from the Reach recently, but he still expected him to be more like most Northern Lords and be happy to be less involved with the South and their politics. It seems his wife had more of an influence on him than Hadrian would expect. 

Yes, it would undoubtably be easier to build a port with proper experts from the Reach. But he was trying to build the North up. He didn't want to rely on Southerners for anything. If anything, Mormont should have asked for experts from House Manderly. At least then the gold spent on the workers would stay in the North. 

He wanted Bear Island to become home of the Northern Navy. In a few decades it would hopefully house one of the strongest navies in the world. He wanted the Southerners to see it and weep at the Norths power at sea. He didn't want the Lords of the Reach to brag about how they built it. Let alone give them such an invitation to plant spies in the Navy or to spread their religion. 

Honestly that particular question took Harry maybe five seconds to decide was a bad idea. Better that the port takes longer to build and be more expensive if it keeps the Southerners out of their business. 

Harry couldn't even blame his uncle for not handling that for him. His uncle knows he would want to have a say in such a decision. 

Then there were other projects that Hadrian had fallen behind on. Such as requests from Lord Karstark to build a larger keep for the Northern Military, which Hadrian approved after going through their budget. Or requests from the school he is trying to create in Winterfell for a larger library, that he unfortunately had to reject for now due to how hideously expensive book are. 

Then there were the new recruits for his Order of Huntsmen he had to go through to ensure their loyalties and new recruits for the Winter Guard.  

On top of that he had to catch up with all the other decisions his uncle made in the past few moons that dealt with the rest of the Lords. Such as land feuds happening between various minor Lords as well as making sure all the major Lords were happy. 

So, Hadrian was kept very busy over the last few days. 

As he watched Luwin walk into his solar with the newest pile of paperwork that needed his attention, he felt like he was going to cry. 

Hadrian knew that many Lords, most if he was honest with himself, never bothered to do such work. Generally leaving it to their Maesters. He was different though. He knew the importance of information. How could he truly rule his people if he didn't know what they were doing? 

When Luwin placed the pile of papers on his desk, Harry grunted and slid his chair back. Physically pushing himself away from it.  

Luwin chuckled in amusement. “Youve covered much of what you have missed my Lord. You should be caught up by tomorrow if you continue at this pace.” 

He let out a sigh and massaged his eyes. “I'm going to take a break from the paperwork for a bit. Tell me about how things have been in Winterfell during my absence. “ 

The Maester straightened, recognizing the order. “Of course, my Lord. What would you like to discuss first?” 

He reached for his goblet on the corner of his desk before taking a healthy gulp of the water. Then Hadrian slouched back into his chair and spoke. “Tell me about our ward. Has Asha improved at all since I've been gone?” 

He saw Luwin hesitate for a few moments before answering. “Slightly My Lord. She no longer takes every opportunity to cause issues like she did at the beginning, but she still doesn't always show the proper respect when she should. She seems to listen to Lord Eddard most of the time but despises lady Catelyn something fierce and still takes no small amount of joy needling her when she can get away with it.” 

Harry sighed. “So not much has changed in her attitude then?” 

After a few moments Luwin continued. “She seems to get on well with Robb and Jon. She likes to encourage them to make trouble. I don't believe she means any ill will towards them.” 

Harry frowned in thought. “She has a younger brother. From what I can gather she was fairly close to him. My cousins are only a few years younger than he is.” After a few moments of silence, he continued. “Let's subtly encourage that relationship she is developing with the boys. Hopefully it will make her feel better about her situation.” 

Luwin scrunched his eyebrows together. “How would we do that?” 

Harry already had a few ideas. “In a few weeks we will go on a small hunt. My cousins are probably old enough to do that now, with the right supervision. They can ride next to her for majority of the travel.  With some luck she will also develop a taste for hunting, it will stimulate her and show some of the advantages living on the mainland has.” 

He saw the Maester hesitate. 

Harry sighed. “Out with it Luwin.” 

After hesitating for a few more moments the man spoke slowly. “Are you sure it is wise to have her become close to the boys My Lord? What if she eventually tries to take advantage of them?” 

Hadrian's expression become stormy. “Then I will kill her.” 

When the silence started to stretch, he let his face relax. “Anything else to report about her? How are her lessons?” 

Luwin seemed to breathe easier now that they were on a safer topic. “She still complains about them but she is taking them much more seriously than she was before. I believe seeing what you have done with the North has encouraged her. She might want to try and repeat some of your successes with the islands. Her lessons with Catelyn however...” 

Harry groaned. “Yes, I knew those would be a disaster. The only reason I agreed to them was to placate my uncle. The only reason he pushed for them was to placate his wife. I have caused enough issues in his marriage as it is. I hoped giving her this would make Catelyn feel a bit better.” 

Luwin winced. “I believe that might have backfired my Lord. Catelyn can hardly stand her.” 

He massaged his temples. “Has she at least been taking the lessons somewhat seriously?” 

After a few moment Luwin nodded. “Yes. Allowing her to continue her sparring practice as long as she learns those lessons is forcing her to take it seriously. But as I said, she tries to irritate Lady Catelyn every chance she gets. So far, she has still managed to be somewhat respectable towards the Lady though. There hasn't been any blatant disrespect shown.” 

Harry smiled weakly. “At least there's that. I will speak to Catelyn and find out if she wants to continue the lessons or not.” 

Luwin nodded. “As you say my Lord.” 

Harry moved onto the next subject. “My cousins? How goes their lessons?” 

The Maester smiled slightly. “They are both bright young boys. Both of them have taken to reading at a decent level for their age and they have learned of many of the houses in the North. “ 

Harry nodded with a small smile on his lips. “And the other languages I want them to learn?” 

Luwins smile fell slightly. “Their Old Tongue is coming along. The issue is, I don't know that language myself. A smallfolk man from Wintertown who speaks the language was hired to teach them what he knows. I don't know how well he speaks the language though. He might be teaching them wrong things. As for High Valyrian, I decided it would be best for them to become at least somewhat capable in the Old Tongue before I started teaching it to them. “ 

Harry tapped his finger on the desk while he thought. After a few moments he had an idea. “I believe I will speak to some of the Children of the Forest. There is probably nobody more fluent in the Old Tongue than them. They would make good teachers if I could get them to agree. You are right that Valyrian can wait though.” 

He noticed the Maeser was basically shivering with excitement. Harry rolled his eyes. “Yes Luwin, feel free to question them about whatever you want. Just make sure to write it down. I would like to read about it later.” 

The man practically beamed. “Thank you, My Lord! It's just so exciting! Think about all we will learn about our history. From those that have actually been there!” 

Harry laughed slightly at the man's enthusiasm. “Just remember not to push them too much if they avoid certain subjects. The Children are still new to the North and I want them to feel comfortable in Winterfell. “ 

The man's smile didn't slip. “I will be polite my Lord.” 

Harry nodded and become serious once more. “Good. That leads us into our next topic. I haven't had much time for the Children or the Giants in the last few days. How are they settling in?” 

Luwin clasped his hands together. “Both have been doing well I believe. Vayon would be a better person to ask but I don't think either of their groups have had any complaints. The Children are spending most of their time in the Godswood as far as I can tell. While the Giants mostly stay in their camp just outside of Wintertown.” 

Harry nodded, pleased. “Any issues with the smallfolk?” 

Luwin shook his head. “Not many My Lord. The smallfolk were wary of them at first, but now it just seems most are curious. There have been a few children who have tried to sneak into the Giant camp, but the guards you have set up for them have been discouraging it quite well.” 

Harry shook his head. “Children will be children I guess.” 

Luwin nodded. “Indeed, my lord. Still, if you don't mind me asking, what will you do with them?” 

Harry leant back into his chair with a hum. “The Children will be receiving a lot of the Wolfswood to live in. They can create a community there for their people quite easily. The Giants are more difficult but after thinking about it for some time I decided to give them a majority of Boltons land. What isn't taken by Winterfell or given to some of the other Lords at least. The people who are already living there will be allowed to stay or move to another holdfast. I am giving each a few gold pieces to compensate them for their troubles.” 

Luwin frowned before smiling in realization. “Ah, I see. Keeping each of them relatively close to Winterfell to make sure they keep good relations with House Stark.” 

Harry nodded with a smile. “Exactly. In a few generations, they will probably spread all over the North. But these places will probably always be where most of them are found. The trees in the Wolfwood are perfect for the Children and Boltons lands have a lot of plains and a large river plus a few smaller ones, that would work well for the mammoths. The Gift would probably work better for the Giants, but the Nights Watch might be a problem and I don't want them so far away from Winterfell in case we ever need them.” 

Luwin looked suitably impressed. “Very smart My Lord. They will boost House Starks power significantly as long as they are kept loyal.” 

Harry waved away the Maesters worries. “Both of them are sworn directly to the Stark of Winterfell. Both of them are also very serious about oaths. Both the Children and the Giants have very long memories. I doubt there will be any issues for centuries if I just kept it as that. Still, I plan to have a Lord or Lady for each of them to represent their races. A Child of the Forest will be used in helping with the education of my future children as well as their children. As well as inviting a few members of each race to join the Winter Guard so as to always have representation in Winterfell. Both races will know that it was the Starks that saved them from extinction. The Starks that gave them respect. The Starks that gave them a place to belong. They will both also know that they will never be able to win another war against men. Not after they lost so badly the first time. If they ever betray their oaths against House Stark, then they will lose a lot of the trust of men. I doubt either would ever want to risk that. As long as House Stark treats them well, I doubt there will ever be a problem. It is in their best interest we stay in power to avoid a war like the one that nearly wiped them out.” 

The Maesters eyes widened. “If they get properly established, they could secure the Starks power for generations. Thats...that's genius my lord. Most Northern Lords would never even think to go against the Starks after so long of your family ruling the North, with this they couldn't even if they wanted to.” 

Harry smirked slightly. “I know.” 

Criticism is welcome as long as its constructive. 

The Fall of the Boltons

Boltons Fall 

Two days after the battle, Harry was sitting in the high chair in the middle of the Dreadfort, desperately trying to keep his headache from getting any worse through pure willpower. He kept his face impassive however, knowing it was needed when he was in the company of all the Lords who marched with him. This was a time when he couldn’t afford to show anything but strength. Not when things were so delicate as they were. 

The last few moons had been a mess.  Too much has happened in the North too quickly. He originally planned to have the Children and Giants swear fealty to him before spending a few months getting them settled. He would take his time to make sure that they had a proper place in the North. He would make sure they would be able to interact with the Lords and slowly integrate with the current power balance so that the Lords would not only accept them, but come to see them as a fixture of the North itself over the next few years. 

Instead, the Faith Militant launched an attack. Before he even had time to start dealing with all the politics solving that mess would involve, he was forced to go to war with House Bolton while trying to juggle integrating the Children and the Giants with different Lords while on the march. Balancing different lords egos was already a difficult prospect during war, adding two mythical species that some Lords werent too sure about only added to the issues.  

He sincerely wishes that the end of the war would allow him to finally start getting ahead and making progress on his current projects without any more problems. Unfortunately, knowing his luck, that wasn't likely. 

He took a sip of water while waiting for his uncle to begin his report on all they were able to learn after taking the castle from Roose.  

Standing in the middle of the hall, Ned Stark looked how he felt. There were visible bags under his eyes and he had a slight slump in his posture marking his exhaustion. For Ned Stark, who always had a face that was carved from ice in official meetings with the lords, it said a lot about his uncle's state. He would have to remember to give him some time to rest after this meeting. 

He wasn't one to shirk from duty however and quickly decided to begin his report under the eager eyes of the Lords who had a vested interest in seeing just how much the Boltons fucked up. Ned opened a scroll and began reading. “The final counts are in for the men. Our army lost three thousand four hundred and twelve men taking the castle.  Two hundred and six of those men were from the Northern Army. No Giants and Children were killed, although there were some injuries. There were over four thousand injuries among the men but most of them should make a full recovery in some time. “ 

The Lords quickly broke out into excited whispers among themselves. Despite himself, Harry couldn't help but feel pleased by those numbers as well. No matter how much such a thought simultaneously made himself feel disgusted. It was a good number considering how formidable the Dreadfort is as a castle and the terrible tactics Roose employed.  

Before he could get too much into that thought his uncle continued. “The losses among the Boltons soldiers were total after Lord Stark ordered for there to be no survivors.”  

There were cheers around the hall. Harry saw Lord Umber drain a whole mug of ale after toasting in celebration. 

He saw his uncle hesitate slighlty. “Among the smallfolk we fought, out of fifteen thousand of them, there are over four thousand dead with twice that number injured.” Harry clenched his jaw to fight the burst of rage and guilt he felt. He could have saved them if he accepted Boltons terms. 

The hall remained silent 

Ned swallowed. “Of the children kept in the dungeons, there were originally four thousand of them. They were kept in extremely bad conditions. There was not nearly enough space for all of them, even with the large number of dungeons in the Dreadfort. They were lying on top of each other when we finished counting them. Over a thousand were dead. Most that remain are ill and have been moved away from our men. I expect many more will die in the coming days.” 

The roar of outrage that came across the room shook Harry to his bones. 

Lord Umber threw his chair against the wall when he stood up. Smashing it to splinters. 

“Fucking Boltons! Not a single shred of honour! He took them hostage and didn't even treat them properly!” 

He wasn't the only Lord that reacted badly. Lord Manderly looked green and Lord Karstark was cursing their entire heritage. His grandfather, Lord Ryswell was probably the worst though. The man was bone white, gripping his cup with so much strength his hands were shaking. His eyes were staring into the distance. He probably just realized what type of monster he married his daughter to. 

Harry closed his eyes. He heard about how bad the conditions in the dungeons were from his uncle, but he hadn't had a chance to visit them himself. Hearing about the number of dead children though, that was something else. 

Harry let the screaming go on for a minute before he opened his eyes again.  

The hall was still filled with the sounds of screaming with no signs of the Lords calming down anytime soon. 

Harry gestured to the Giant standing on his right. Mar Mog was a Giant that opted to join his Winterguard when he defeated the Boltons, once he knew what the role consisted of. After winning such a decisive battle, the Giants were impressed with him and insisted on guarding him. Even if he didn't fight himself. 

Harry had taught the Giant what a few of his gestures meant and the Giant was a quick learner. Without any further instruction he lifted the massive stave he was holding before banging it on the floor.  

It was very loud. The room instantly quieted. Harry looked back at his uncle. “Continue.” 

All the Lords stared at Ned with a focused intensity. Except for Lord Umber who was receiving a new chair from a servant. 

His uncle took a breath. “The castle was searched for any more secret passages as you ordered. Yesterday, a few men found one in the dungeons. It was a torture chamber. Inside there are a few corpses a few weeks to a few moons old. Each of them seems to have been flayed.”  

Harry sighed. He wasn't even surprised anymore. 

Some of the Lords looked as if they were ready to go on another rant, but a sharp glance from Harry stopped that. He looked back at his uncle and silently gestured for him to speak. 

His uncle hesitated for a moment before he spoke. “There were some skins on the wall from previous Starks.” 

There were sharp intakes of air from all over the hall, but mercifully none of the Lords interrupted this time. 

Harry gritted his teeth for a moment before speaking. “How do you know they were from Starks?” 

With a tight voice, Ned answered. “There were signs next to them stating who they were from.” 

Everyone in the hall was watching Harry with bated breath to see how he would react. For his part, Harry was using his occlumency training to keep his face as blank as he could. As he had been doing since the start of this horrid report began. He was struggling at this point though. 

Harry decided to switch topics at this stage, lest he really lose his composure. “Tell me about the ravens he received. Anything important?” 

Ned nodded. “We have confirmation he was in talks with someone to the South involved with the Faith. He let the Faith Militant land unopposed. There are no names though, so we don't know who he was speaking to.” 

Harry nodded as calmly as he could. He couldn't stop his fist from clenching his goblet though. “I see.” His voice sounded monotone even to his own ears.  

Harry took a few moments to calm his thoughts before he looked back over the hall. Every lord seemed to be on the edge of their seats waiting to see what he would say.  

Harry had a few more things he wished to know about first. He looked at Leaf. “Has there been any luck finding his bastard son?” 

The Child of the Forest stood. She looked a little ill but was remarkably composed compared to everyone else. Harry guessed that was probably due to all the things she had seen in her long life. After a glance around the hall she began to speak. “My sisters and Lord Dustin found him this morning. He was attempting to make his way South. They are dragging him back to the Dreadfort as we speak.” 

Harry nodded slowly. “Good. I sent a letter to Domeric when we were at Winterfell, commanding him to come North. I asked one of your sisters to watch him. The letter should have arrived a while ago. What happened there?” 

Slowly the Child of the Forest shook her head. “He decided to leave for Essos my Lord. Lord Royce caught him though and sent him North with some of his men. They should arrive in White Harbour in the next fortnight.” 

Harry closed his eyes and sighed. Oh, Domeric.... 

After a few moments of grief for his cousin, he opened his eyes and hardened himself. 

He looked over the Lords and spoke. “Roose Bolton will be executed. Ramsey Snow will be executed. Domeric Bolton will be sentenced to the Nights Watch, if only because I won't be a kinslayer. House Bolton will cease to exist, and this cursed castle will be torn down. What happens to the land will be decided in the next few moons once I have had time to think of the matter in Winterfell.” 

With that Harry stood and walked out of the hall. It was times like this he wished he was old enough to get drunk without damaging his body.  

Harry ignored the cheering that happened in the hall when the doors closed. 

Line Break 

A few days later Harry was in front of the castle with all his Lords lined up behind him.  

In front of him, there were thousands of smallfolk. All of them looking angry and hungry for blood. Blood that they would soon have, as he decided the Boltons would be executed in front of the people they wronged so much. The least Harry could do was provide these people some closure. 

Roose Bolton and Ramsey Snow were each held in shackles with gags in their mouths. After all the shit they caused Harry wanted to avoid dealing with them as much as possible. Today would be the first time he saw Roose since he took the Dreadfort. It was also the first time he ever laid eyes on Ramsey. 

After his guards got the smallfolk to quieten down, Harry took a deep breath and started to speak as loudly and clearly as he could. “Citizens of the Dreadfort. You have gone through some hard times. Terrible times. You have been betrayed by your liege Lord. By the man that was supposed to be your protector. Roose Bolton spent your lives cheaply and without regard. For this you have my deepest sympathies. House Bolton has been a stain on the North for thousands of years. They have rebelled before. Caused wars before. Betrayed their oaths and their honour before. Always, House Stark has been lenient. We have given them second, and even third chances. That ends today. I know many of you have lost loved ones. Others have been tortured or starved. Nothing I say or do can ease the pain many of you might feel. I only hope that you can gain some small measure of closure from watching justice be done.” 

There was some mumbling among the smallfolk, but overall, they remained mostly silent.  

Seeing this, Harry gestured to the guards to bring forth Ramsey Snow.  

The bastard boy struggled as he was dragged in front of Hadrian and his uncle. Kicking his legs and screaming into his gag the entire time, with a wild look in his eyes. Seeing how young he was, only a few years older than Harry himself, brought some guilt.  There was nothing linking the boy to his father's actions. His uncle Eddard even tried to talk Hadrian out of his verdict when he stated that Ramsey Bolton had to die. For a minute, he even contemplated changing his mind due to Eddards pleads. 

Yet, in the end he remained unmoved. Harry had to remember that this wasn't Earth. Things were more brutal in this second life he had. He had to be more brutal himself. Besides, he wasn't going to allow a single Bolton to escape and become a problem for his descendants. Not after they had already betrayed the Starks generosity multiple times. Not after all their crimes. 

Harry gave another gesture and Ramseys gag was removed. The screaming started immediately. “You can't do this to me! You can't kill me just to please these animals! I'm a Bolton! You can't! My blood is worth more than theirs! You can't-” Just like that, his guilt vanished. Harry watched the boy rant and rave for a few more seconds and concluded that Ramsey Snow might be mad.  The wild look in his eyes and the ranting about how special his bloodline was, actually made Harry consider that he might be doing a good dead by executing him. 

“I'll kill you! I'll flay you alive! Ill-” 

“Do you have any last words?” Harry interrupted. 

All at once, the energy seemed to drain from Ramsey. He visibly sagged, only being held up by the guards escorting him.  

The Bolton bastard looked at him. “Please! I'll take the Black! I swear! I can be a good brother of the watch! Please!”  

Harry ignored him. He nodded to the guards who pushed his head down over a block of stone. He almost immediately set off again. Fighting and struggling to remain on his feet. “No! Let me go! Let me go! I'll kill you! Ill- “ He was interrupted when one of the guards punched him in the stomach, knocking the air out of him and allowing them to force him down.  

“I, Hadrian Stark, Warden of the North and the Lord of Winterfell, sentence you to die.” 

He gave a nod to the Greatjon who was acting as the executioner today. Due to the fact that Hadrian was still physically not old enough or strong enough to perform the deed cleanly and he didn't want to force his uncle to execute the boy he tried to save. 

“Let me go! Let me-” Ramsey who had started ranting as soon as his breath came back was cut off as Jon Umber swung his greatsword down through his neck.  

The body immediately slumped. 

The smallfolk immediately started cheering.  

Harry turned towards Roose as the guards started dragging the corpse away. The Lord of the Dreadfort was completely different from his bastard son. His face remained impassive and cold. He looked like he felt nothing at his son's death. Harry was beginning to suspect he didn't.  

He nodded to the guards on the sides of the Lord to bring him up next. That turned out to be unneeded, as the Lord of the Dreadfort walked calmly up to the block. With a nod to the guards, his gag was removed. 

Lord Bolton was quick to take advantage of that fact. “Stark.” He stated. “Truly more pragmatic than your ancestors.” 

Harry was in no mood to entertain the soon to be dead man. “Any last words?” 

His reply was simple. “I played the game. I lost.” With that he bent over the block.  

Despite himself, Harry felt some respect grow for the Lord from how fearless he was in the face of death.  

“I, Hadrian Stark, Lord of Winterfell and Warden of the North, sentence you to die.” Lord Umber was quick to swing his sword and his head joined that of his sons on the ground. 

The cheers this time were absolutely deafening. Thousands started celebrating the man's death.  Screaming at the top of their lungs. Most looked satisfied with the way Bolton died, but Harry could see a few faces who broke out into tears and others who still wore looks of anger and dissatisfaction. He knew those men and women wished he killed Roose in a slower, more painful fashion. Unfortunately, Harry could do nothing for them. He had lost a lot of morals he once had, but he would still try and make a death clean if he could help it. If for no other reason than to set an example for future generations.  

He gave the people a few more minutes to calm themselves. When it seemed like it wasn't going to happen, he held up his hand. Those who noticed immediately quietened down and the others were quick to follow.  

Once there was silence, he spoke again. “An old Noble family is no longer ruling this part of the North. A family that has ruled for thousands of years. This means there will be many changes happening for all of you over the next few years. What those will be, I cannot be completely sure yet. But there are a few things that I have decided. The Dreadfort will be torn down. It was a place of suffering. A place of betrayal. A cursed place. A new lord will be placed in charge of some of the Bolton lands. While other pieces of land will be given to lords who have shown loyalty to Winterfell. “ 

Harry took a breath before continuing. “Justice has been done. Roose Bolton is dead. Ramsey Snow is dead and Domeric Bolton will soon be joining the Nights Watch. I pray to the Old Gods for the innocents lost. May they be in a better place.” 

With that, Harry turned and started walking back into the castle. He wanted to start preparing to leave as soon as possible. The sooner he was back in Winterfell, the better. There were a lot of different things that Harry had to juggle for the future prosperity of the North and a few of them had fallen to the wayside in the last few moons. He needed time to get everything sorted out. 

At least he can be satisfied that one major obstacle in his path was removed today. He just hopes that Domeric would accept taking the Black. It was really the only thing he could do to protect his cousin when practically all his lords are calling for an end to House Bolton. 

The next morning, when Leaf informed Harry that thirty men started making their way towards The Wall with whispered plans of vengeance, he didn't know whether to laugh or cry. 

 Little bit of a shorter chapter. Next chapter Hadrian is back in Winterfell deciding the next steps the North should take.

Taking the Dreadfort

Taking the Dreadfort 

Riding beside Hadrian and five Children of the Forest, at the head of an army heading towards the Dreadfort, Ned was even more silent than usual. His mind was away, thinking about a topic that was deeply unpleasant for him. 

War 

All it is good for is causing misery and death. Suffering and pain. Even among the victors. Ned Stark honestly hoped he had seen the last of it for his lifetime.  

Perhaps that was naive of him. The dreams of a Summer boy.   

Perhaps he is still that boy in some ways. 

After the wars against the Targaryen's and the Greyjoys, Ned honestly thought it would be many years before his family was dragged into another. His family was in the strongest position it had been in centuries. With his friendship with the King and his relationship with Jon Arryn. His nephew's betrothal to the Royal Princess and the connection it brings them to House Lannister. Ned honestly thought something extreme would have to happen before his family was put into the position of having to fight for their lives again anytime soon.  

He knew the Faith was becoming unruly in the South, but he honestly believed that Jon Arryn or the King would do something to squash their rebellion before it became too big. No matter what his nephew said. He thought Robert would take any opportunity to go to war, regardless of the opponent. He thought Jon Arryn would immediately see the danger of the Faith Militant.  

He honestly never expected the Faith Militant to grow strong enough or bold enough to strike the North. He thought his nephew was perhaps being slightly paranoid with all the measures taken against the Faith in his kingdom. 

Just another example of how Hadrian was often much wiser than him.  

Ned took a moment to look back at the army marching behind him. First there was a thousand men marching directly behind him with an impressive discipline, drawn from the newly created Northern Army. Each armed and armored in the fine castle forged steel. Ten thousand men marched behind them with noticeably less discipline, the majority coming from Stark, Ryswell, Dustin and Manderly lands. Enough men were drawn from each lord without taking too many away from farms or other labors across the North. Following that were six Giants each wielding newly forged steel greatswords, longer than Ned was tall. 

Ned could at least take solace in the fact that this would probably be the easiest war he had ever fought. There weren't armies from different Kingdoms or even one Kingdom to fight through. Just a single, unloved lord. One of the most powerful lords in the North perhaps, but a single lord all the same. That lord would also be fighting against things that men hadn't had any experience fighting against in millenia. Lord Bolton would have no solution to the Childrens abilities as scouts using skinchanging or any easy solutions against a Giants strength, except to swarm it with numbers. Which would be difficult when he was outnumbered himself. 

When Ned first saw his nephew marching back into Winterfell, followed by Giants and the Children of the Forest, he almost passed out from shock. Oh, he knew what his nephew planned to do beyond The Wall, but he never expected him to succeed. In truth, Ned never really believed that the Giants and the Children were still alive.  

For all his accomplishments, Ned honestly thought his nephew's desire to travel beyond The Wall to collect the creatures of legend was nothing more than childish fantasy. Even with all the strange powers Hadrian had been blessed with, believing Giants and Children would bend the knee to him just didn't register as something possible.  

The only reason he didn't put up more of a fight about his decision was that Hadrian promised not to go far beyond The Wall and because his nephew never had a chance to really indulge in his childhood. He thought it would be a harmless thing to indulge his nephew with, so long as he took proper protection with him. 

Ned vowed to have more faith in Hadrian from then on. Even if his ideas sometimes sounded ridiculous. 

He doesn't know what Giants and the Children could truly do in war.  But he expects them to make a noticeable difference. Once their numbers grew more, they would probably make the North the strongest Kingdom in Westeros. They would definitely make others think twice about declaring war against his family. 

His nephews words brought him back to reality. “Lord Umbers army is a few hours away from us uncle. Please inform him about this and see to it that the men make camp.” 

He just gave Hadrian a nod before going about his duties.  

Line break----------- 

Four days later the army of twelve thousand men was camped a mile from the Dreadfort. 

Ned had an uneasy feeling during these last few days of marching. A feeling he knew that all the Lords shared. The town around the ancient castle was all too quiet. All the homes were abandoned by any small folk, belongings remained where they were, with food still still sitting on tables in some places. Giving the feeling that none of the residents had any time to pack before leaving.  

All the Lords were in currently in Hadrians tent to discuss what this could mean and their next steps. 

All the Lords were unusually quiet while waiting for Harry to begin. 

His nephew decided not to waste any time. “The Children have done some scouting. All the men, woman and children of this town and a few more small villages around the area have all been brought into the Dreadfort. Lord Bolton is currently arming each of them with whatever he can. Knives, shovels, woodcutter axes and even rocks and sticks in some cases. I expect he will use them as fodder against our men. Both to demoralize us and tire us before he uses his real soldiers.” 

The lords instantly exploded. “That craven-!” “Fucking bastard!” “Damn Boltons!” 

Ned just closed his eyes in silent grief. He should have known that things wouldn't be so simple. 

He remained that way for half a minute while the rest of the lords ranted. Then he took a deep breath, opened his eyes and spoke. “How many?” 

Everyone else immediately went silent and looked first at him, then at Hadrian for answers. 

His nephew shrugged. “They don't know for sure, but they estimated between ten to fifteen thousand people.” 

Before the lords could go off again, Ned asked his next question. “How could he force that many people to fight for him? They outnumber his own soldiers.”  

Hadrian grimaced. “From what Leaf was able to discover, Bolton went for the children first. He is using them as hostages to make their parents cooperate. If they don't have children, then he is just using pure fear. They would rather fight us than risk being tortured by Bolton. Or having their children tortured.” 

The table fell silent for several moments as all the lords stared at the table grimly before Hadrian spoke again. “What are your suggestions?” 

Lord Karstark was the first to speak. “We could just siege the castle. That many mouths to feed, Bolton will run out of food sooner than later.” 

Ned frowned. “All that would happen is that the smallfolk would be starved. Bolton will feed his soldiers and leave them to suffer.” 

Karstark nodded. “Aye, but I expect that after a few weeks with no food they will become desperate and most likely they will be much less willing to cooperate with him. Most likely they will riot. Even with their children as hostages, as it will be their only chance. If they aren't being fed, why would they believe Bolton is feeding their children?” 

Ned pursed his lips, the taste of ash in his mouth. “They are still citizens of the North. We can't just leave them to starve to death!” Ned looked towards his nephew for support, but Hadrians face was stone, giving nothing away about his true feelings. Although Ned saw his fist clench slightly. 

After a few moments his nephew spoke. “Any other options?” 

Ned slumped back in his chair as Lord Umber spoke. “I believe the Giants could probably open the gate to the castle if they are given enough cover. We could just charge in. The smallfolk aren't loyal to Bolton. They would probably break quickly. Then we just have to deal with his soldiers. It would probably save more lives than a siege. “ 

Yes. Ned preferred that idea. 

Lord Manderly was the next to speak. “It doesn't make much sense, does it?” 

Lord Umber rounded on him. “What?” 

Manderly was quick to raise his hands in placating manner. “Not your idea my lord. That has merit. What doesn't make sense, is that Bolton is willing to use his people in such a way. Roose Bolton is many things, but he is not stupid. Surely, he knows we can starve him. Or that Hadrian can still call on tens of thousands more men from all over the North. So why is he making things worse for himself with these crimes? He must know he will be beaten and if Domeric inherits the Dreadfort after him, then none of his people will be happy to follow him after his father pulled this move.” 

Ned leaned back thinking over those words. Lord Manderly was right. Roose Bolton must know that he has lost at this stage. So why pull a move that will ensure his son was hated by his own people if Hadrian grants Domeric the Dreadfort? 

Lord Umber slammed a meaty fist on the table. “Bah! There's no point in trying to understand Bolton. He must have lost his wits when he realized how much he fucked up!” 

Lord Manderly hesitated before speaking. “Perhaps-” 

“My Lords.” One of the guards outside of the tent called, interrupting the Merlord. 

Hadrian raised his voice. “Enter.” 

The guard, one of Hadrians Winterguard, entered looking slightly nervous to be interrupting a meeting between all these lords. Without wasting any time, his nephew gestured for him to speak. 

After taking a breath to calm himself, he did so. “Lord Bolton sent a man asking for a parley.” 

Hadrian frowned, as did the rest of the Lords.  

Lord Dustin was the first to speak. “We cannot trust him.” 

Hadrian nodded his agreement. “Aye you're probably right Lord Dustin. Still, I can't ignore the fact that this might give us an opportunity to see what Bolton is thinking.” 

After taking a few more seconds to think, Hadrian spoke. “My uncle will go, as will Lord Karstark and six men. You are to bring his terms to me. There will be no single combat. Bolton doesn't deserve the honor.” Hadrian looked at the guard. “Inform Boltons man that Bolton is to have no more than himself and six men, they are to meet my uncle at the midpoint between this army and his castle.” 

Lord Umber grumbled slightly, but he appeared satisfied that Hadrian wasn't going himself. 

The guard swiftly left the tent and Hadrians attention turned back to them. “While this meeting is happening, the rest of you are to start organizing your men and preparing to attack. Dismissed. Leaf, you stay.” 

At once all the Lords stood and began to leave. Ned left with Lord Karstark, praying silently to the gods that he would be able to prevent the loss of life that would come if there were a battle. 

Line break 

An hour later Ned found himself a few hundred yards away from the Dreadfort, waiting patiently in silence, as Lord Bolton and his party slowly made their way towards him. He felt slightly irritated by the Lords slow pace but kept his opinion to himself. 

After a few more minutes Bolton finally got within ten yards. Close enough to talk but far enough to react if he tried anything.  

Ned gave the lord a slightly tense nod. “Lord Bolton.” Lord Karstark just grunted. 

Boltons face was utterly without expression. “Stark. Karstark. I'm surprised your nephew isn't meeting with me. I always thought he had some courage, but perhaps I was wrong.” 

Ned bristled slightly but kept his calm. Lord Karstark was another matter, the General of the Northern armies retaliated. “He is smart enough not to trust that an honorless cunt like you wouldn't try anything.” 

Lord Bolton smiled slightly when he answered. Ned always found his smiles unnerving. “Honourless? Perhaps. But all I'm doing is protecting my House, Lord Karstark.” 

Lord Karstark scoffed. “We all know you allowed the Faith Militant into the North, Bolton. We know you would have tried to attack Hadrian and the rest of us after that battle if we didn't manage to escape your noose. How exactly were you protecting your House?” Ned remained silent, content to observe for now. 

Roose kept the smile on his face. “Come now. Surely you can see the way things are going. House Stark is gaining more and more power. A central army that answers only to them, new tax methods meant to increase their reach into matters of other Houses, ships and so on. Every year since Hadrian Stark took power, House Starks influence has continued to grow. I knew it wouldn't be long before Hadrian started intruding in the matters of individual Houses. So I did what I believed was necessary to remove him and solve the problem.” 

Karstark scoffed. “House Starks power has grown greatly, true. But so has the power of the North as a whole. My House has gained benefits from that growth. Lord Umbers House has gained benefits. So has Lord Manderly and many other loyal lords. If you were loyal, you may have gained benefits too. But Hadrian never trusted you and for good reason. More likely you saw that House Stark was becoming stronger than it has been in centuries and knew, if it carried on this way, House Bolton would never stand a chance of ruling the North. That they would be completely unassailable. Never mind the fact they were practically untouchable in the North before Hadrian was born. House Stark has ruled the North for eight thousand years. There are very few in the North who would ever consider going against them. Even fewer who would be willing to follow House Bolton.” 

Roose Bolton was still smiling, but his eyes were much colder now. “I tried to-” 

“Why are we here Bolton?” Ned interrupted him. He saw no reason to let this farce continue. It was obvious Bolton was trying to turn Karstark away from his nephew.  

Roose turned to Ned his smile gone completely. “To discuss terms of my surrender, of course.” 

Ned kept his face impassive, only arching an eyebrow. “Oh, and what are your terms?” 

The Lord of Leaches answered smoothly. “You must have noticed by now that I have emptied all the villages around here. My terms are simple. I will surrender unconditionally if Hadrian gives his word that Domeric inherits the Dreadfort and none of my men are punished. Domeric will need strong soldiers. No land will be taken, taxes will not be raised. It will be like this war never happened.” 

Ned clenched his jaw. “You are using your own people as hostages.” 

Roose Bolton smirked slightly. “Of course, I am. Hadrian Stark is far more pragmatic than most of his ancestors. Domeric might be his cousin, but I don't doubt he will still seek to punish House Bolton for rebelling. Most likely he will take some land. Perhaps he would even send Domeric to The Wall. This is the third time my House has done this, after all.” 

Ned struggled not to attack the man in front of him. “If he is so pragmatic, then why would he ever agree to your terms.” 

Roose rolled his eyes. “Because he still cares about his people. He will save thousands of smallfolk and thousands of his own soldiers.” 

Ned clenched his jaw even harder before speaking. “Even if he agreed to your terms, you must know that your people would hate you after this. They would more than likely despise your son too.” 

Rooses face was cold. “Not a major obstacle.” 

Ned held in the urge to shout at the man for several seconds before turning and storming back to his horse. His guards and Lord Karstark were quick to follow. As he turned to ride away, he spoke over his shoulder. “You will have your answer tomorrow.” 

After a few moments Lord Karstark spoke from beside him. “I really hate that cunt.” 

Ned just grunted in agreement.  

Line Break--------- 

An hour later, Ned and Lord Karstark were back in Hadrians tent with the rest of the Lords. They had just finished giving their report and it was clear to see that none of the Lords were happy. There were curses being thrown at Bolton, about his mother, his ancestry and his honor.  

The worst reaction was from his nephew. Hadrian had a furious expression on his face. Ned believed he was probably even more angry than the time that Edmure Tully visited Winterfell. It left him slightly wary. Hadrian was always difficult to predict. He was even worse when he was angry. 

It took a few minutes for the Lords to calm themselves. Once they did, none of them seemed to want to be the first to ask the necessary question. Ned sighed slightly and decided that it was probably best for him to be the one to start things off. “Are you going to agree to his terms?” 

Hadrian clenched his jaw and then gave his answer in a voice as cold as winter. “No.” 

That sent a ripple of surprise through Ned. Judging by the rest of the lords reactions, he wasn't the only one. 

Lord Ryswell was the first to voice his confusion. “Forgive me grandson, but I would have thought you would agree to Boltons terms. We all know you care for your cousin. I would think you wouldn't mind letting Domeric off, as he is not guilty of his father's crimes.” The lord sounded slightly concerned, as Domeric was also his grandson.  

Hadrian sighed and his shoulders slumped. “Aye. Domeric is family and I care for him. Originally, I was going to just remove a maybe a third of the land from House Bolton and perhaps increase the taxes a bit. Roose was right about that. The issue is, if I accept Boltons terms, then I will be creating a precedent. The next time a House rebels against House Stark, they would think they could do the exact same thing as Bolton and their House would escape any punishment. There are too many ways it can be abused.”  

“I see.” Lord Ryswell muttered. To be fair to the Lord, while he didn't look happy, he did look understanding.  

Lord Manderly spoke up. “You’re right my Lord. If you did give in to Roose Boltons demands then there is a chance something like this would be tried again. Maybe not for many years, but it is possible it would happen.” 

Hadrian nodded. “I am all for negotiating to limit bloodshed, but this goes too far. I will be punishing House Bolton more than I would have before because of this.” 

Lord Umber spoke up. “So if you aren't going to agree to his terms, what is the plan?” 

Hadrians fists clenched on the table and his eyes became cold. “We are going to hit Bolton hard and fast. The Children are busy scouting the Boltons lands using wolves. They are looking for the secret tunnel that the Boltons used during their last wars against House Stark to sneak supplies into the Dreadfort. We never managed to find it then, but with the wolves, I believe it should be easily done now.” 

Most of the Lords sat slightly straighter. A small grin broke out on some faces. Lord Umber looked as if he was struggling not to burst into laughter.  

But the Lords all managed to contain themselves and let his nephew continue speaking. “Lord Karstark will lead the Northern army down this tunnel with Lord Umber and his men and if it is large enough, two giants will join them. Your job will be to hit them as hard as you can and take and hold the dungeons. That is most likely where the children are being kept. Hopefully that will convince the smallfolk to lay down their arms. Once done with that you can move on to the rest of the castle. While this is happening, the rest of the giants will attack the main gate. With a large wooden shield, they should hopefully be protected from arrow fire and be able to easily get close. The Giants will lift the gate for the rest of our men to pour through and take the castle. Grandfather, your job will be to take the gatehouse and keep the gate open so that the giants can join the rest of the attack, before moving on. You will be joined by Lord Manderlys men. Lord Glover, Lord Dustin and uncle, you willl take the courtyard and the rest of the keep. I would like Lord Bolton to be brought alive to me, my Lords, but if he dies, so be it. Also remember to accept the surrenders of any smallfolk. I would prefer not to have killed good men and woman of the North for no reason. All of Boltons soldiers on the other hand, I want dead. There will be no surrender for them.” 

Line break 

It was a beautiful sunrise, Ned reflected. The skies were bathed in orange and gold, creating a tapestry that even the most hardened men would struggle to find a problem with. Ned tried to enjoy the color as much as he could, for he knew he would soon be submerged in crimson. 

The entire army woke a few hours before, with word from Hadrian that the tunnel into the castle had been found. His nephew had wasted no time before sending Lord Karstark and Lord Umber there. While the rest of the army sat and waited patiently for the attack to begin. 

Ned was standing near the very back of the army with the men from Winterfell, Lord Glovers men were on the left and Lord Dustins were on the right. In front of them was Lord Ryswell and his portion of the army, with the Manderly men, as well as four giants. Hadrian was on a horse at the back of the army, overseeing everything and far from the battle. With him was Lord Manderly, who would probably get killed instantly in a fight, as well as the Children of the Forest. 

“Ooooooohhhoo!!!” A horn blasted from his nephews position, signaling the start of the attack for both the main army and the army at the tunnels. 

Ned could see the giants instantly charge forwards along with the first portion of the army. Everyone was on foot, so the giants almost instantly started pulling ahead even though Ned knew that they were slowing themselves down so that they werent completely separated from the rest of the men. 

A few seconds later, Ned started charging with his men keeping an eye on the progress of the giants the entire time. A lot of the plans did rely on them, after all. 

Once they got within arrow range of the Dreadfort, Ned could see a hundreds, perhaps thousands of arrows get shot in a wave. All of them aimed towards the giants. Unfortunately for the archers, each giant had a huge shield made of wood, big enough to cover their entire bodies for protection. Not a single giant fell and they were still gaining ground. 

The next wave of arrows was more scattered. A lot were still shot at the giants, but plenty were shot towards the men too. By this time, Ned was within range of the archers. 

“Shields!” He roared as loud as he could while raising his own shield over his head. Most of his men followed his example.  

While no arrow touched his shield, many hit the shield of his men. A few even slipped past them and some men fell. Ned had no time to be distracted by the sight, however. 

A few moments later the giants eventually reached the gate. All four of them held their shields over their heads with one arm, while the other was used to grip the bottom of the steel gate, and pull. 

Ned was honestly expecting the giants to struggle. Or for it to take a bit longer. But the gate basically shot up with only a few grunts from the powerful creatures.  

While this was happening, about a hundred men among those who were with Lord Ryswell stopped. These men were equipped with bows and they wasted no time shooting at the men stationed above the gate where the giants were, to prevent any of them from trying to pour hot oil on the creatures or using any other tricks.  

It was only a few moments later that Lord Ryswell and one of his sons ran through the gate, followed by thousands of screaming Northmen. The flow of men slowed down as they were all forced to go through the narrow space, but it never came to a complete stop. 

It was only a few minutes later that Ned himself passed through the gates and into the chaos. Lord Ryswell was already halfway up the stairs leading to the gate mechanisms located on top of the wall. It looked like most of the men he was fighting were smallfolk with only a few of the actual soldiers mixed in, and so he was making quick work of them. 

Ned didn't have long to watch the other lord though, as he was soon beset by his own enemies. There was a line of smallfolk in front of him and behind them were a few hundred men who were obviously proper soldiers. Unfortunately, Ned had to go through the smallfolk first. The first man that came didn't have any armor and was only armed with a kitchen knife. He raised his shield, catching the knife before smacking the poor man in the head with the flat of his sword. He instantly crumpled. The next man was armed only with a rock. Ned just bashed him in the face with his shield before moving on. His next enemy was a woman armed with a large stick. He tried asking her to surrender, but she didn't listen, and it was with slight guilt that he smacked her with the pommel of his sword. He silently prayed that these souls survived the battle.  

Unfortunately, not all the smallfolk were as lucky as the ones he fought. While his men generally tried to take them alive, most of them lacked his skill. Ned saw a man get his head cut off, another lost his arm, while another few were run through. He saw a woman get her head caved in by a hammer and an old lady get smashed with a mace. He watched a pregnant woman get her throat crushed by a gauntlet and saw what he assumed was her husband scream in grief before he was cut down as well. 

It was a horrifying experience. It was something that Ned knew would probably give him nightmares for years. He was extremely relieved when the mass of smallfolk finally broke and either started throwing down their arms or running any direction that was away from a soldier, allowing his men to reach their real enemy. 

It was honestly with eagerness that he finally engaged with the Bolton men. The first man lasted three exchanges with him before Ned slit his throat. The next one had his guard broken nearly immediately when Ned swung his sword down with a roar, finishing off the man by cleaving half his skull away. He knocked over the third man with his shield before stomping on his head with all his strength. The fourth lost his arm and then his leg in short order. 

The next several minutes descended into a blur of violence and blood as he let himself take out his anger on the Bolton soldiers. It was honestly the first time Ned truly lost control of his emotions in years. When he finally came to, he was kneeling on either side of one of the Bolton men, beating his head in with his bare hands. His shield nowhere to be seen and his sword stuck in the ribs of the corpse next to him.  

When he finally looked up, the battle was winding down. Most of the smallfolk were throwing their weapons down or turning on Boltons men. He realized Lord Umber and Karstark must have taken the dungeon. 

After giving himself a few moments to catch his breath, he stood and turned to look around him. Thats when Ned noticed the almost stunned looks on most of his men's faces as they looked at him.  He grimaced slightly, before pulling his sword out of the body next to him. 

Ned then turned and started making his way towards Lord Gover without a word. 

He honestly hated war.  

Slipping the Noose

Slipping the Noose

The aftermath of the battle was something to behold. It was a gruesome scene that would have Harry retching if he hadn’t already seen worse things. The bottom of the hill had turned into a deathtrap. Bodies were piled on top of each other, being four corpses high in some places. Red painted the grass, turning the once green hill into a tapestry of crimson and death.

There were no prisoners taken amongst the enemy soldiers. Hadrian decided that he would offer no mercy to those who would see him and his harmed. Those who ran were chased down by the wolves and birds under the command of the Children of the Forest. Those who surrendered were swiftly killed.

The Septon's who lead the raid were all taken alive. Hadrian would be taking all seven of them to Winterfell where he would execute them in front of the Heart Tree.

Harry knew that word would get out to the South about him executing the Septon's like that. A lot of Lords who are very religious would be greatly angered. Not at the fact he killed the Septon's. Most Lords would probably agree with him that the Septon's had to die. No Lord with even a bit of intelligence will like the idea of a new Faith Militant. Still, those who were religious would be angry if he sacrificed the Septon's to the Heart Tree. To savage gods, in their eyes.

Honestly, he was hoping it would force some of those Lords and the Faith itself to act rashly. More openly. Harry honestly wanted to build support for the Faith Militant back in the South. The more of them there were, the more angered and bolder they felt, the more of a distraction they would act as for North.

If he was lucky some of the less intelligent Lords would openly support the Faith Militant. That would not be something the crown would be able to allow. They would have to come down hard on those Lords and the Faith. If they don’t, they would lose a lot of authority. Tywin Lannister, at least, will not allow that. Not when his blood will soon sit on the throne.

The more chaos in the South now, the better it would be for the North in the long run. Chaos will cause the South to weaken and fracture, while order in the North will cause it to prosper. Especially once he has gotten rid of Roose Bolton and other internal enemies.

Harry knows that the North was almost at the point where it could defend itself from the South without major worries. With the help of the Giants, Mammoths and Children they could probably defend themselves now. The North has always been all but impossible to conquer from outside, with their help, it will be that much more difficult.

But it would be a struggle that would cost many of his people their lives.

No, he would rather keep the South busy with troubles from the Faith Militant while the North continues to build up strength relatively unnoticed thanks to the Faith pulling so much attention to themselves.

It will still be the work of years to get the North ready to stand on its own without major worries. First, he has to get rid of all traitors within the North. Then he has to spend a few more years of fortifying and building up defenses, in Moat Cailin and along the coasts and in the rivers. Some more time building up the Northern Army and Navy would also be a great help. Time to strengthen the Northern economy from goods from across the world. Time to give the Children and Giants a chance to integrate into the North properly.

Time was what Hadrian needed the most. Time he is hoping the Faith Militant will provide.

But that was the focus of the future. Right now, Hadrian had more immediate things to worry about. Like the report on the Bolton forces.

“They are how far away?” He asked.

Leaf had a grimace on her face. “Half a day. The main army of four thousand men is to the South–West. Between us and Winterfell. There are smaller pockets of a few hundred men spread around though, in all directions and closing in. I Imagine they are there to slow us down. So far, we have prevented any of his scouts from reporting our movements, but Roose Bolton is still rapidly marching in our direction.”

Hadrian, his three Lords and Leaf, were sitting in his tent around a table to discuss their next steps while the men collected the bodies of their fallen and treated the wounded.

Harry grimaced before looking at his lords. "Options?" he asked.

Lord Karstark was the first to respond. "It will take at least five days for the Northern Army to march this distance. Even then it will only be a thousand men at maximum. We haven't had the time to train more yet. Not with how intense the training is. I believe we should try and retreat to gather more men before going on the offensive."

Harry gave the Lord a nod before looking towards Lord Umber for his opinion.

Lord Umber grumbled unhappily to himself for a few moments before taking a large gulp of his ale. He slammed his empty cup on the table and crossed his arms before answering. "It will take Last Hearth a few days to gather the men in the first place. As we don't have the men ready to march like the army does. It will probably be a similar amount of time for a similar number of men to gather and march to us. We should retreat there for a few weeks and raise a proper army from my lands and Karstarks lands, before marching to crush the cunt." It looked like it physically hurt the lord to suggest retreat, but he swallowed his pride and did it anyway.

Harry hummed lightly under his breath before looking towards the last Lord.

Lord Manderly seemed to still be celebrating their victory over The Faith Militant. He was eating his third meat pie since they all gathered, while sipping on a glass of Dornish Red. He had quickly stopped eating to answer Harry's question though. "Fighting Roose Bolton while this severely outnumbered isn't a good idea. It was one thing to destroy an army of peasants while outnumbered, but Roose Bolton is different. He is an excellent commander. His men are well trained and well-armed. Even if you pull off another clever tactic like you did with the Faith Militant and we somehow win, there will still be a lot of casualties. There are too many important figures present that could cause a lot of damage should we die. If you alone were to die, My Lord, it would greatly weaken the North. As your uncle is a good Lord, but he doesn't have your vision or intelligence. Then there's the few Children and Giants the North just gained. Not to mention each of us are the heads of our Houses. Houses that are each undergoing changes. There is too much to be lost if we risk a battle now. Too much chaos will be had in the North should we die."

Harry nodded to show he was listening before turning towards Leaf.

The Child of the Forest was quick to answer his unspoken question. “I have not been a part of a war for a long, long time. Even when I was, my people fought differently than men do. I am afraid I do not know enough about wars between men to give you proper answers. “

Harry smiled slightly at the answer she gave. It gave him a lot of hope she would be a good advisor and representative of her people. There are not many who would acknowledge that they don't know something. It was a quality that Hadrian greatly respects.

He turned away from Leaf and closed his eyes to think for a few moments. After a couple of seconds Harry opened his eyes with an exhale and released a sigh before speaking. "Very well, we will not engage Bolton. We will use the skinchangers and the Children to avoid him and his men. I only fear that he will retreat to the Dreadfort when he knows we have escaped and that he will make it as difficult as possible to dislodge him. As Bolton will know that is his best chance to sue for peace, if we want to avoid a bloodbath." He said bitterly, before continuing. "We will not be marching to Last Hearth though."

That got a confused frown from all the Lords present so Harry quickly continued. “No doubt Bolton will try to make as much chaos in the North as possible now. To give himself a fighting chance.  I fear that he will contact the Magnars of Skagos and tell them about our plans to fully conquer the island, if he hasn't already. So, I want Lord Karstarks forces to be on high alert all along the coast. We will be going to Winterfell so that we can gather a proper army. A large one, to hopefully minimize the amount of blood that is about to be shed on our side.  Lord Umber you will send a raven to Last Hearth and have them begin calling their banners but keep the men there for now. We will see where they will be most needed in the coming days.”

Each of the Lords gave nods of understanding. So Harry turned to solve their next issue.

"Leaf." Harry called. The Child of the Forest looked at him with open curiosity on her face. Harry continued once he got her attention. "I want one of the Children to skinchange into something and check on Winterfell. Another few must be ready to help us sneak past the army in our way."

After that, Harry stood up and began walking out of the tent. "We will be moving fast. Prepare the men to march."

Harry heard each of the Lords give their agreement as he walked outside.

Line Break....

It took them almost the rest of the day and part of the night marching, to completely sneak around Roose Boltons army. Doing so was only possible in the first place because he had so many skinchangers available to act as scouts due to the Children. Even so, it was impossible to miss all the different groups Bolton sent out to slow him down.

His men were forced to kill a group of one hundred scouts who were in their way, without letting any escape, before they could slip around Bolton during the night.

They were forced to march without the use of torches and were therefore completely reliant on the skinchangers to lead them in the right direction. More than one man got minorly injured due to stepping into a hole or tripping over a rock. By the time Hadrian had his men stop to rest for the night, they were completely exhausted. Harry didn't think they could march much longer, even if he ordered it.

His army had made quite a bit of distance on Bolton though.  Which was the main worry for the moment. So, he had the men marching at a much slower pace the next day.

It was a few hours after they began marching again that he learnt more news about Bolton. According to the skinchanger he had watching Roose, the Lord of the Dreadfort had finally discovered that Hadrians army had managed to slip past him.

Just as Harry had predicted, Roose Bolton wasted no further time in chasing him down. For all his faults, Roose Bolton was an excellent commander and knew that Hadrians army was faster. So he started immediately moving towards the Dreadfort after sending out several ravens with messages.

It was easy for his skinchangers to intercept some of the messages and bring them back for Hadrian to read. Just as he predicted, the Lord of the Dreadfort was trying to create chaos. Several messages were for some men that Roose had hiding in Wintertown that were meant to attempt to kidnap one of his cousins, if at all possible.  A few more were addressed to the Lords of Skagos. There was even a letter for one of the Septons stationed in White Harbour.

Unfortunately, Roose had always been a paranoid man.  He sent multiple ravens for each message and sent riders on top of that. It seems he wasn't taking any chances in his messages being stopped.

So, Harry did what he could. He had orders sent to White Harbour to increase the security of Lord Manderlys grandchildren. He had more messages sent to his uncle to call the banners and he had warned him to keep his cousins inside Winterfell, at all times.  Lord Karstark had already sent orders to his men to begin preparing for an invasion from Skagos.

All that was left was to reach Winterfell as quickly as possible. Fortunately, there were no more delays on their journey, so they managed to reach Winterfell a few days later.

Before riding through Wintertown, Harry ordered a few of his men to lead most of the Children and Giants to a clearing near the Wolfswood. It wouldn't do to march a hundred Giants through Wintertown and overwhelm his citizens. It would be better if they had a chance to properly get used to the idea of giants before showing them just how many there were.

Of the Children, only Leaf would accompany him into Winterfell. While only the leader of the Giants, Mag Mar WunToh Weg, would do the same. Both were the leaders of their respective people and would help Hadrian solve any issues that came up regarding the Children and the Giants in the coming days.

The journey through Wintertown seemed to greatly lift the spirits of Harry and his men. They all took great amusement at all the awed looks the Children of the Forest and the Giant were getting from the citizens. Unlike some other places in the North, the people of Wintertown had always been stringent supporters of the Old Gods. So, it didn't really surprise him to get this reaction from its citizens. Still, it was something to be happy about. It gave Harry real hope that the Giants and Children would be accepted by his people. Hope that they will become citizens of the North for real, in time.

Riding through the gates of Winterfell, Harry had to physically force himself not to burst out laughing from the gobsmacked look on his uncle Neds face when he laid eyes on Leaf and Mag Mar.

Lord Umber didn't even try to control his laughter. “Har! Har! You look like a virgin who saw his first pair of tits Ned!”

The rest of the Lords were quick to join the Lord in his laughter. Hadrian did his best to keep his face a mask of neutrality. Even if he was dying of laughter on the inside. It wouldn't do for his image to slip in front of so many people. Not at such an important time. Still, a small smile snuck onto his face despite his attempts.

Eddard always had excellent control over his emotions however, and was quick to snap out of his trance.

He swiftly turned his attention to Hadrian and bowed his head. “Nephew, I'm happy to see you back. “

Harry finally allowed a smile as he dismounted and closed the distance to his uncle. Wrapping the man in a short hug. “I'm glad to be back uncle.”

He released the hug and gestured with his hands. “Allow me to introduce you. This is Leaf, she is the leader of the Children of the Forest and this is Mag Mar WunToh Weg, the leader of the Giants.”

Ned bowed his head once again. “It is an honor to meet you Leaf and Mag Mar WunToh Weg.”

Leaf bowed her head back. “It is my honor Lord Stark. “

Mag Mar pounded his fist into his chest. “Stark!” He finished with a nod.

Harry turned back to his uncle. “He can understand common, but the Giants all only speak in the Old Tongue. “

His uncle just nodded, still looking a bit dazed, nobody would be able to notice unless they knew him well, however. “I see.”

With that Harry turned to Vayon Pool who had been lingering nearby. “Vayon.” He called. Making the steward snap his attention away from the giant and onto him.

Vayon flushed slightly and bowed his head. “Apologies My Lord. “

Harry just waved him off. “Don't worry about it. It will take some time to get used to. I understand.” The steward just gave a thankful bow of his head before looking at Harry for his orders.

Harry didn't waste any time. “I need you to deliver food to the camp that the Giants and Children are currently staying in.”

He then turned his attention to Leaf and Mag Mar. “It might be best if you helped him. I'm not sure what you guys can eat without any problems. Or how much you need.”

Leaf bowed her head. “Very well.” Before walking towards the steward. Mag Mar thumped his chest one more time and did the same after another cry of “Stark!”.

Harry turned to back to his uncle. “Where is everyone else?”

Eddard grimaced slightly. “When I heard you were coming with a Giant, I thought it best if Catelyn took the children for their lessons. To prevent a scene. Jon is with Luwin, also busy with lessons.”

Harry made a sound of understanding and nodded along with his uncle's words. It was probably for the best that they weren't here. The children would want to cling to him, Mag Mar or Leaf. Not that Harry minded, but there were certain things they all needed to get done first. The less said about Catelyn's possible reaction the better.

He dismissed those thoughts from his mind for now. There were much more serious topics to be spoken about first.

Harry left his uncle there to give his greetings to the other Lords and to get them settled in, with a reminder to meet him in his solar afterwards, so that they could talk properly.

Harry swiftly made his way through Winterfell, nodding his greetings to all those he passed on the way. Within a few minutes, he was seated inside of his solar behind his desk in front of a comfortable fire, looking at the documents that were spread around it.

Harry passed the next bit of time by checking up on how his various projects were doing and checking on the state of the Norths finances. Overall, things seemed to be going how he expected it to. There were a few small bumps in some of his construction projects in the time that he had been gone, such as a shortage of stone or labor, but Harry was happy to see that his uncle had handled those issues swiftly.

It was half an hour later that there was a knock on his door.

“Come.” He called. The door opened and his uncle entered the solar looking grim. Harry guessed it was about the war with Bolton. He probably would have seen this look on his uncle's face earlier, if he wasn't so distracted by the Wag Mar or Leaf.

Ned took a seat and began the conversation. “So, Bolton has finally decided to act.”

Harry released a sigh and sat back, slouching slightly in his chair. “Yes. We were lucky, in a way. If it wasn't for the Giants and Children, we would have probably had to run from the Faith Militant. Which means they would have scattered throughout the North and caused chaos all over the place. If it wasn't for the Children being skinchangers, we would have had significantly larger difficulties running from Bolton. Mostly likely we would have died.”

His uncle grew even more grim. “Thank the gods they accepted your offer then.”

Harry let out a short huff. “Aye.”

After several moments of silence. Ned continued. “What are you going to do?”

Harry just arched an eyebrow. “I see you have already called the banners. So, I will be going to war. I will rip Bolton from that castle and execute him.”

Ned just looked unamused. “Thats not what I meant, and you know it.”

Harry sighed and slouched even more. “Domeric?”

Ned looked slightly sympathetic but didn't let it stop him from confirming Hadrian's answer. “Aye, Domeric.”

Harry ran a hand through his hair. “In truth? I don't know uncle. I haven't decided. A big part of me wants to take this as an opportunity to remove the Boltons for good. It is the smart thing to do. But Domeric....he's my cousin and he's not at all like his father. I don't know if I can take the Lordship away from him.”

His uncle remained quiet and let him think.

Harry slumped his shoulders. “For now? I haven't made my mind up. I will see the state of the Dreadfort and I will see how far Roose is willing to go. I will decide once I have him in custody.”

After a moment his uncle spoke. “We shouldn't judge him based on his father's crimes.”

Harry sighed even louder. “If only it were so simple uncle. I have to think about the message this will send. The Boltons have rebelled against us a few times in the past and each time, it has just been for greed. We let them get away with it the first time and they rebelled again. We let them live after the second time and now they are rebelling again. This time they were even willing to work with the Faith Militant. An enemy that brought our Houses together during the reign of the Hungry Wolf. If I let them get away with their third rebellion, a rebellion that was also caused by nothing more than greed, what message will that send to the rest of the Lords? That they can rebel without having to worry about their Houses being punished, as long as they have an innocent child that can take over once they die? Because House Stark won't punish their children for their parents crimes? How long before House Bolton tries the same thing again? Or before another House does? What do we do the next time a lord has a child and decides to rebel because he knows the future of his House is secured, no matter what he does?”

Harry took a breath before continuing. “If this was their first or second rebellion, I would agree with you. But House Bolton has pulled this same trick twice before. There needs to be a line. A cut off point. The third rebellion seems like a good place to have one. If Domeric wasn't my cousin I wouldn't even hesitate. I would send him off to The Wall without a second thought. It is because he is my cousin and I care for him that this is so much harder.”

His uncle just nodded grimly. “I understand nephew. Just remember that there are more punishments than just death, banishment or The Wall. You could increase their taxes. Take land from them or even put a limit on the number of men at arms they can have.”

Harry just sighed. “Aye. Aye, you are right uncle. I don't like the idea of punishing a child for their parents sins either. I wouldn't ever kill a child in such a scenario, but I can't let the House itself just escape punishment because a child is now in charge. That way lies constant rebellion. There needs to be consequences that would make even Bolton second guess rebellion. I really don't enjoy the thought of having to punish the innocent members of a House. I just like the idea of the same House rebelling against us continually, and getting away with it every time, even less.” He sighed even deeper. “I will think of something.”

Harry decided to banish those thoughts for now. He would have to decide what to do later.

For now, there were other problems to discuss. “Any news on the Whitehills?”

Thankfully his uncle took the change in topic with grace. “One of your Huntsmen has been giving me regular updates about him. He was incredibly angry when you banned building anymore Septs, he apparently had quite a lot of negative things to say about you. Thats about all he has done though. He might have helped the Faith Militant given the chance. Luckily, it appears that they didn't reach out to him. Or if they did, he decided to ignore them. Probably because there is not much help he could have provided. The Forresters and Glovers would be able to swiftly defeat House Whitehill should they try anything.”

Harry hummed under his breath. “I will still have my Hunstman keep an e-”

“Let me through! I want to see Harry!” He was interrupted by shouting coming from the door. Followed by the muffled sound of his guards trying to get someone to calm down.

Harry couldn't help but release a chuckle which was matched by his uncle. He stood up from his desk and started approaching the door. “Come on uncle. We will finish this later. Better not keep my cousins waiting any longer.”

Ned followed, still chuckling under his breath.  “Aye, better not.”

Apologies for the extremely late chapter. Work has been ridiculous since the new year and i kept hitting a wall with my writing. This must be the fourth or fifth time i have rewritten this chapter. At first i had Harry try and fight Bolton before realizing how stupid and risky that would be. Then i had him destroying Boltons food stores, raiding his army and a bunch of other things before eventually deciding that retreat makes the most sense. I had the Whitehills join the rebellion before realizing that would be stupid of them.  Eventually this is what i settled on making the most sense. Even now, I'm not completely happy with the chapter but i just want to get past it so that i can continue the story.

Opening Stages

Opening Stages

It took a little over four hours for Lord Umber to lead Hadrian’s army to a location that would give them a clear advantage in battle.

The place that Lord Umber chose was a decent sized hill to the South-West of their original position. The hill was steep enough that men or cavalry charging up it would be greatly slowed down. The South part of the hill had a forest, whose borders started halfway up the hill and stretched to the East and the West for a good distance, providing cover for some of his troops to hide in.

His army arrived at the hill an hour or two before noon. According to his scouts, the enemy army was still another five or six hours away, so Harry decided to use this time to prepare for the battle as much as possible.

The first thing that he did was to split his men up into different groups. He had four hundred men in total, as well as just over one hundred Giants and one hundred Children of the Forest.

He split the men into four groups of one hundred each. One group of men were in charge of moving the wagons to the top of the hill and placing them in a line to the North and South sides of the hill, just a few feet from where his men will stand during battle. The wagons would act as makeshift barricades, hopefully discouraging the enemy from attacking from the North or South and encouraging them to attack through the gap in the East. Funneling the enemy and making numbers mean less. The men had to dig holes or find rocks to place by the wheels of the wagon, to prevent them from rolling. Once they were done with that, he had those men move to help with other tasks.

He had another hundred of the men helping fifty of the giants cut down tree branches deeper into the forest to make into wooden stakes. These were sharpened and smacked into the ground in front of the wagons at an angle to make a barrier of wooden spikes. This made attacking from the North or South even less appealing.

Giants were strong enough that each one of them had very little trouble digging holes’ two meters deep and two meters wide. He only had the men there to scatter the mounds of dirt that was dug up, in order to try make the holes a little less obvious. In barely an hour there were fifty holes scattered across the bottom of the hill.

Harry had the Giants start digging additional holes even further away, among the field to the East of the hill, where the enemy army is most likely to charge from.

While this was happening, another fifty giants and one hundred men were digging holes at the bottom of the hill. The plan was to have various holes scattered around while leaving a corridor in the middle of the were breaking down trees and large branches. Almost one hundred men were sharpening those branches and placing them at the bottom of the holes that the giants had dug. Turning them into pit traps with wooding spikes at the bottom. The rest of those men were sharpening smaller branches and fletching them into arrows.

After an hour, he had those men who were working switch with those that weren’t, so that each of them would have time to rest before battle.

The Giants worked for two hours straight, as they were stronger than men and would have less pressure on them during the battle.

During this time, he had twenty of the Children of the Forest move the mammoths to the West side of the hill and keep them out of sight. Fifty of the Children were standing over the pit traps that were complete and using fascinating magic, that Harry was going to do his best to learn, to make grass grow over the top of the holes, each blade of grass weaving into and out of each other, between a few small branches placed over the holes to make the structure strong enough to stand over the hole and not topple over its own weight. The end result was that each hole was hidden in plain sight. Making a deadly surprise for a charging enemy.

The rest of the Children were using their abilities with skinchanging to hunt down certain enemy scouts, to keep the preparations he was making for the battle a secret. At the same time, they were spying on the enemy to find out the composition of their army, who their commanders were and who else helped with the scheme to sneak an army this size into the North. While at the same time, thinning the enemy numbers whenever they get a chance.

By the time the enemy army was an hour away, there were one hundred pit traps scattered throughout the east where the enemy army will charge from. Each of these traps were incredibly well hidden and each of them was deadly. His men had made another thousand arrows to add onto the stocks for the battle and wagons were set up on the hill to acts as barriers, hopefully forcing the whole enemy army to attack from one direction.

Now, Hadrian was sitting in a tent that was set up for him to wait in and receive reports, so he can comfortably plan while his men were working. He had Lord Umber, Lord Karstark and Lord Manderly with him now that each group of men they were overseeing were done with their preparations.

Lord Umber had a mug of mead in his hand, his third one in the last quarter hour. Hadrian tried to get him to stop drinking as he would need his wits during the battle, but Lord Umber just waved him off, saying he has fought while he was so drunk he couldn’t even remember his name, or his reason for fighting, and he still came out of it alive.

It was at that point that Hadrian realized there was really no point in arguing. He wasn’t ever going to be able to make Lord Umber drink less. Trying would just get the Lord mad at him.

Lord Karstark and Lord Manderly were far more controlled however. Both Lords were still nursing their first cups of ale and listening politely as Lord Umber told his sixth, definitely embellished, story involving some battle or other.

Harry himself was currently drumming his fingers on the table and listening to Lord Umber with only half an ear. He was currently more interested in waiting for Leaf to finish receiving her report from one of the other Children of the Forest.

Unfortunately, many of the Children of the Forest lived almost their entire lives in seclusion in the tunnels underneath some of the Weirwood trees North of the Wall. As a result, most of them can’t speak anything but their own tongue. Only Leaf and two dozen others have the ability to communicate with men and most of them only speak the old tongue.

So Harry put Leaf in charge of relaying all of his orders to the other Children and receiving and translating reports from them to him.

He continued to tap his fingers on the table as he listened to Lea and the other Child, Bark, converse in their musical tongue.

It was several minutes of back and forth between the two Children later before Bark was finally dismissed by Leaf. Once Bark left the tent, Leaf took a seat near his table and waited patiently.

Harry cleared his throat, catching the attention of Lord Manderly and Lord Karstark, who were quick to try and bring the Greatjon out of his story and back into the present. Luckily, Jon Umber could hold his liquor and it was easy to get him to pay attention.

Seeing that everyone was ready, Hadrian gestured towards Leaf and spoke. “Leaf, you may begin.”

She took a moment to look each of us in the eyes before she started. “There are a few different things you should know.” She sighed slightly. “The army is larger than we thought. There are around three thousand men.” She paused slightly to let that sink in before continuing. “Leading the army appears to be a group of Septons. There are seven of them. Six of them look like average Septons, if more fanatical in their devotion than most, while one of them wears armor and seems to have martial training. The others are deferring to him most of the time.”

Harry drummed his fingers on the table. “This confirms it is the Faith Militant.”

Leaf nodded, confirming his words. Lord Umber growled slightly at this news, while Lord Karstark sat up straighter and Lord Manderly sighed.

He gestured for leaf to continue her report. “Five hundred of the enemy soldiers seem like they might be knights, they have horses and will no doubt act as cavalry during the battle. A thousand of the infantry look like they might be soldiers. They seem to have some training, most are wearing some type of armour and have weapons. Even if they are rusty swords. The rest are only dressed in furs and seem to be carrying tools such as hammers, knives or other random things they could find. “

Leaf took a breath before speaking again. “My people have been successful in hunting down their scouts who stray too close to the Giants and mammoths. We have been using skinchanging to do so and are keeping out of sight for now, as instructed. They found a few of the mammoth tracks, luckily most of them blend in with the tracks from the rest of the army and the enemy didn’t examine them very closely, so they were dismissed. The enemy should have no idea my people and the Giants are here. “

Harry smiled. “Good.”

Leaf continued. “I had some of my people use birds to spy on the enemy commanders as you ordered. Several things have been made known. First, all of the men in the army originate from the Vale. They came partway through the Weeping River by ships almost two moons ago. The men were originally supposed to split into seven different groups and spread over the North. Each group would be led by a different Septon. Each group would operate independently of each other but with the same overall goal, to cause chaos and disruption in the North. To weaken the North and those who follow the Old Gods. They were meant to cause as much damage to the North as possible until they were caught. Each group was supposed to have no idea of what they others were doing to make tracking them more difficult.“

Harry was no longer smiling. Such a thing could cause a large amount of damage to the North. Depending on where the groups spread and on what they did, they could have caused serious problems. If they caught him off guard and managed to sneak into Wintertown, they might be able to even kill members of his family if they ambushed them.

Such a thing could not be allowed to stand.

Leafs voice drove him out of his thoughts on how to send a suitable warning South, so this event doesn’t repeat itself. “It seems we’ve actually been fortunate. They were supposed to split up a moon ago but when they heard Lord Stark was travelling to The Wall, they decided they could not let the opportunity slip past them. The group stayed together so they could ambush you on the way back to Winterfell My Lord. “

He almost wanted to laugh at the irony of them doing him a favour by trying to kill him instead of doing what they were meant to. His lips twitched up slightly despite his best efforts to not smile.

Lord Umber had no reservations. “Hah! They are lambs who think to hunt a wolf!” He laughed. “Now they are going to be slaughtered!”

He let the lord get it to of his system for a few seconds before he gestured for Leaf to continue. “They are set to arrive in a little over an hour.” She finished.

Harry allowed himself to relax and slouch back into his chair for a few moments. He was careful to show the Lords that he was relaxed and that he wasn’t worried at all. He was projecting a casual feeling with his actions. As if this was just another normal day and he wasn’t about to lead them into a fight against an army five times as large as their own. This had the effect of keeping everyone else calm and composed.

After half a minute of silence he sat up and addressed his lords. “I believe that with the help of the Children and Giants, we should be able to win this battle with little difficulty. We have the men with the better training and equipment. We will have an advantage in terrain and defenses. This battle is not what truly worries me my lords. What worries me is that we have to fight it at all.”

Lord Umber and Karstark were both looking confused but Lord Manderly had a look of realization on his face. Harry gestured for the Lord to speak.

Lord Manderly was happy to oblige. “How could an army with such numbers sneak so deep into the North without anyone noticing?” He didn’t give any of the others time to speak before answering his own question. “They couldn’t. Not with such numbers and not for so long. We know they came into the North itself from the Last River. Which means they crossed through Bolton lands. Lord Bolton is anything but incompetent. If they came so close to his home, he would know about it. The question is, is Lord Bolton actively colluding with the Faith Militant or just turning a blind eye to their actions for his own plots? My coin is on the latter.”

Lord Umber practically exploded out of his seat. He threw his chair back and slammed his fist on the table with a roar. “That no good snake! I always knew the Boltons were shits but to go against the Gods?! That fucking….”

Harry let Lord Umber rant for a minute longer because in truth, the Lord shared his opinion. Hadrian knew Roose Bolton was a bastard, but he never expected him to work with the Faith Militant either.

After a few more seconds of ranting he cleared his throat and asked Lord Umber to calm down and retake his seat. He did so without any complaint and Hadrian continued speaking. “Now none of Lord Boltons forces are among those present. There are no other armies within a few days of us either. That doesn’t mean Bolton won’t attack in a few days once we are weakened and have let our guards down. To that effect, several Children of the Forest have been tasked to use skinchanging to locate Lord Bolton and see what he is doing. One of my Huntsmen have been tasked with sending a letter to my uncle Ned, telling him to fortify Winterfell and to send us men as soon as possible as reinforcements. Just in case. Another letter has been sent to Last Hearth and the army each, also asking for reinforcements. If Lord Bolton does attack, hopefully those reinforcements will arrive on time to be of help. Keep in mind, the Boltons have always been slippery and there is no proof he is colluding with the Faith. He might not attack at all, thinking he can get away with his treachery.”

All of the Lords looked a lot more nervous now that they realized there was a chance they will be attacked by an even larger and more deadly army in the days after this battle.

Harry waved his hand dismissively. “But that is a worry for another day. For now, get the men ready for battle and into the correct formations. “

All three of the Lords and Leaf stood before quickly leaving to their individual duties.

An hour later saw Hadrian standing on the highest point of the hill within the fortification of wagons he had set up. From his position he had a great view over the entire battlefield. He was also well protected. There were ten guards around Harry and Lord Manderly. Beyond those guards were fifty archers.

These weren’t normal archers though. For the past two years Harry has picked select groups of young men to train in archery and upper body strength. He did this in the hopes that they could learn to properly wield the longbows he had designed. For the last six moons, he has had over one two hundred men train relentlessly with the bows. Fifty of those men were with him today. The rest were at Winterfell.

With greater power and range than any bow that was not Weirwood or Goldenheart wood, he fully expects they will reap a bloody toll on the enemy today.

Beyond the archers, lined up in rows between wagons, was the rest of the army. Five rows deep and eighty men across. Four hundred men stood ready to face an army much greater in size.  Fifty of the men scattered between different rows in the middle of the formation were his guards, hence they were well trained and very well equipped. One hundred of those men were from the different Lords guards so were also decently trained and equipped. The rest of the men were from the newly formed Northern Army and so were also very well trained. All he men at the front three ranks were armed with spears and shields. Lord Umber was near the front line and Lord Karstark was near the back.

In the distance, near the other side of the small valley, the enemy army had just finished forming into ranks themselves. Thousands of men formed, making a giant body of men that was slightly intimidating to look at. Even to Harry.

He could see that some of his men were starting to shift nervously. No matter how well trained they were, this was the first battle for many of them as they just got out of their training. He could understand them being nervous.

That doesn’t mean he won’t try fix the problem.

“MEN!” He screamed. “THERE ARE THOUSANDS OF SEVEN WORSHIPPERS COMING TO TAKE OUR HEADS! THEY BELIEVE THEIR GODS WILL GRANT THEM VICTORY! BUT THIS IS THE NORTH! THE OLD GODS RULE HERE!”

He took a breath before continuing. “TODAY WE WILL SHOW THEM HOW LITTLE POWER THEIR GODS HAVE!”

His men screamed in agreement.

Harry smiled slightly before taking a small cup of water from one of the four soldiers who had been chosen to serve as his aides during this battle. This mostly meant running orders for him to different commanders. Or handing things to him.

He took a small sip of the water and savored it for a moment.  His throat was a bit scratchy from all the shouting. Once he had finished, he gestured to the other soldier who was holding a far eye.

Harry was quick to put the device to his right eye and look over the enemy army. He could see that the less well equipped men were in the front, with better equipped men behind them and the cavalry at the back of the formation. The seven septons who were supposedly in charge of this force were sitting on horses a little bit behind the cavalry. They were surrounded by a hundred well equipped guards from what he could see. He couldn’t see any archers among the enemy formation.

Harry continued to watch as the enemy formation finished forming up over the next several minutes. To Harry, it simultaneously felt like an eternity and an instant. Before he knew it the enemy army was formed up and ready.

It wasn’t long before the enemy made a move.

Form what Harry could see, five hundred of the least well-armed and equipped enemy troops started charging towards his front lines in a fast walk. A few moments later the rest of the army started forward at a much slower pace.

Honestly, it wasn’t a bad move on the enemy commanders part. They sent their least valuable troops to test his men. To keep them busy or to tire them out.

As Harry watched those five hundred men rapidly closed the distance to his army. Still, he did nothing.

Lord Manderly voiced the question. “Should we not prepare the archers my lord?”

Harry shook his head absently while not removing his eye from the enemy. “I want to keep the effectiveness of the archers a secret until the second wave moves into range. The first wave is no danger and surprise should make the archers all the deadlier against the better armed men.”

When the first wave reached the bottom of the hill he started to see the effectiveness of his traps.

As he watched, dozens of men fell into the first dozen holes hidden at the bottom of the hill. Screams and cries echoed out from the men as they fell to their deaths or gruesome injury. Some unfortunate souls didn’t die when they hit the spikes at the bottom of the holes, instead they were trapped screaming in agony as spikes pierced though their bodies.

The whole army stuttered to a moment as the men hesitated to move forwards after witnessing the fate of their comrades. When they moved forward it was a lot slower, with a lot more hesitation.

Unfortunately, this meant that the traps were a lot less effective, but some men were still lost regardless and only half the traps were discovered as men started following in the steps of those in front of them, so that they could easily avoid the traps.

Before long the first wave reached the front line of his army. The first line of men that clashed with his army almost immediately died to the longer reach of his mens spears. The entire first wave stuttered to a halt as the enemy tried to press through and suffered grievously as a result. The first wave was dropping like flies. While his men were holding strong with only a few deaths so far.

By this time, the second wave was a little over five hundred yards away. Seeing the first wave getting cut down, they rapidly increased the speed of their charge from a steady walk to almost a sprint.

Harry gestured to lord Manderly who was quick to understand what he wanted.

“Archers!” The lord shouted. “Nock!” The archers were quick to follow his commands.

“Draw!” Fifty longbows were drawn back.

As the second wave was just a little under three hundred and fifty yards away, Harry nodded to Lord Manderly who was quick to comply and bellowed. “Loose!”

Fifty arrows flew into the air, before the arrows had even reached into the climax of its flight. Lord Manderly was calling for the men to nock and draw again. Before the first wave of arrows had reached the enemy two hundred and fifty yards away, Lord Manderly was calling for the second volley of arrows to loose.

When the first wave of arrows hit it had minimal effect on the enemy forces. They were still at a very far range and his archers weren’t skilled enough to be accurate at that range. Quite a few arrows landed short still. Less than half a dozen men died from the first volley with a few more injured.

Harry was a bit disappointed in that. He should have waited a few seconds longer and it would have had a greater impact.

The second wave of arrows did a lot better. All of the men were well within range by this point. Over a dozen men were killed with another dozen injured. Unfortunately, his men still weren’t that accurate at this range.

Bing hit by two consecutive waves of arrows at such a long range away had the desired effect on the enemy army. The shock of being pelted with arrows from so far away caused a lot of men to stutter in their running. Greatly slowing their advance from the run it had been for a few seconds.

That was long enough to be hit by the third wave of arrows. Killing and injuring even more men than the previous wave. At this point, close to forty men in the second wave of infantry were killed with twice that injured.

While this was happening Harry could see the hesitation to approach his men visibly growing across the men in the first wave. Before long, over two hundred men were dead and three hundred were standing still. Too afraid to approach any closer.

Seeing that they were continuously being pelted with arrows and that the first wave was close to running, the second wave started charging even faster than they were before they slowed down. As they got closer, his archers kept sending more waves of arrows. By the time they had reached the bottom of the hill seventy yards away, two more volleys were fired upon them. With each doing more damage than the previous volleys.

The men were in such a rush that a lot of them ran into the hidden pit traps that weren’t uncovered by the first wave of men. This once again caused dozens of deaths and caused the army to slow. It also had the added effect of causing the enemy to form into lines and wind their way between the holes. Making them more clumped together and as such easier targets.

“Fire at will.” Hadrian said.

“Fire at will!” Lord Manderly repeated his command in a bellow.

His archers were only to eager to let loose. At this range his archers were fairly accurate and the bows had enough power to punch through all but the best made armor. Dozens fell under the constant onslaught of arrows before the men reached the first wave. By this point over two hundred men in the second wave had been killed by a combination of arrows and traps.

“Shield wall.” Harry called.

One of the men by his side blew the horn once. The men in the front three ranks of his army, being relentlessly drilled by this point, quickly locked shields with the second rank supporting the first and the third supporting the second. The rest of the men in the fourth and fifth ranks with spears and shields tried to imitate them but weren’t that well trained yet and only managed a sloppy imitation. The men without shields and spears were scattered throughout to kill anyone who manages to get past the reach of the spears.

The momentum of the second waves charge pushed the first wave forwards, forcing them to charge his forces or be trampled under the larger force behind them.

It was honestly a more effective strategy than Harry would have liked. The first wave became almost a sacrifice to his forces as they were shoved onto the spears by the men behind them. His mens spears were weighed down by enemy corpses, giving the men behind those corpses a chance to close the distance with the front ranks.

Luckily, the most well trained men were in the front few ranks. All of them trained extensively in how to hold a shield wall, the hill also gave them an advantage as the enemy forces were slightly tired at this point from running up it under arrow fire, while avoiding traps.

The enemy army crashed into the front ranks and pushed them back slightly, but the wall held. One or two of his men died but in general their armour and shields protected them well. The enemy forces were less fortunate as his men in the second and third ranks used their spears longer reach to stab at the enemy through the gaps.

While this was happening his archers were still using their greater height advantage to pour arrow fire into the enemy ranks. At this range most of their arrows landed and most of them killed enemy soldiers.

This battle was turning into a gradual slaughter of the enemy soldiers as they kept trying and failing to pierce through the shield wall. A few of his men had died, but the soldiers were well trained and filled in most of the gaps pretty smoothly when that happened. Soldiers who got through any gaps were quickly taken care of Lord Umber and his forces.

The enemy commander must have realized that things weren’t going well. For the rest of his army started charging. All of the cavalry formed up into four lines quickly before breaking off into a charge at his formation. Quickly closing the gap to the bottom of the hill.

Harry would admit he was impressed by their ability. The cavalry of the North he has seen was nowhere near as good as this.

It didn’t really matter though, as the cavalry got to the bottom of the hill and the different lines started to quickly make their way between the holes, Harry spoke again. “Give the signal.”

The horn blower was quick to comply.

Two quick blasts of the horn rang out.

The results were almost immediate. By the time the enemy cavalry was half way up the hill the plan had already started. Howls came from the woods only fifty yards to the left of the charging cavalry. Hundreds of them. All at once.

Then hundreds of wolves sprung out of the forest under the direction of the Children he had hidden there. They charged straight at the cavalry while snarling and howling. The effect of the enemy cavalry was immediate.

The horses and men panicked. Some men were kicked off their horses while other horses panicked and stumbled into some of the pit traps. When the riders had managed to regain control of their mounts it was already too late.

Much of the momentum the horses had was lost so when they crashed through gaps left by their second and third wave, into his front line, they did a lot less damage than they otherwise would have.

They managed to push through the first and second lines before they were stopped and the gaps filled in. Unfortunately, they still managed to cause a lot of chaos and death to Harrys men before the charge was completely stopped.

That was when the wolves had finally closed the distance on the enemy cavalry. What happened next was easy to guess. The wolves took down horses and men alike in groups of three or four. The horses who weren’t attacked freaked out and went on a stampede in the opposite direction throwing even more men from their saddles. It was absolute chaos.

That was when the Giants and Mammoths came around the North side of the hill and hit the enemy from the other direction. The enemy army crumbled. The giants and the mammoths cut through them.

Harry gestured for the horn to be blown once again.

His men, who had only been holding their positions until now, started to advance. Slaughtering those in front of them. The battle turned into a route. The enemy only had one direction to flee and they did so by the hundreds, in a panicking frenzy. He saw more than one person cut down their own allies on their way to safety. Through the eye glass he could see that the Septons in charge of this army were already fleeing as fast as they could.

Harry smiled coldly before turning to Leaf. “Have the rest of the Singers hunt down all the survivors with the wolves. I don’t want any of them leaving the North.”

Leaf was quick to turn to one of her sisters and speak in her language. A few moments later the Singer rushed off and she turned back to Hadrian. “It will be done.”

Harry turned back towards the battle and saw the few pockets of survivors rapidly getting cut down. He knew they won today but he couldn’t help but clench his teeth in anger because he knew the truth.

They were lucky. This army was filled with untrained peasants with commanders whose idea of strategy was to just rush him with superior numbers. If this group had stuck to their original plan and tried to spread out in the North to cause chaos, then the damage they could have inflicted could have been severe.

He would have to take steps to stop this from happening again.

I want to apologize to everyone for the extremely long hiatus. My laptop got damaged and I lost my summary for the future of the story as I didn’t back it up, like an idiot.  I only got the laptop replaced a week ago and have been writing to catch up since. I am back now and the long break has given me a lot of enthusiasm and ideas.

A Confession of Truths

A Confession of Truths

After the Giants and Children of the Forest agreed to bend the knee, things proceeded smoothly. The Giants and the Singers of the Earth, as the Children told Hadrian they preferred to be called, followed Hadrian back to the Weirwood to bend the knee and swear their vows with little trouble.

They came up one by one, bent the knee and swore to serve House Stark and follow them faithfully. Hadrian in turn swore that he would defend them against those that would do them harm, as he would for all of his people. He would help them flourish, as he would for all of his people.

It was a long, tedious process. But it was needed.

The only real problem happened with some of the Giants grumbling about being forced to kneel. Hadrian solved this quickly by telling them that they don’t have to kneel, they just won’t be welcome in his kingdom unless they do. There weren’t any problems after that.

Once that was done, Hadrian informed everyone that there would be a gathering in Winterfell in a few moons, where the leader of the Giants and Singers could give their oaths in front of all of The Lords of the North. Where they can speak to those Lords and learn more about The North and her people.

Harry knew he would never be able to hide the fact that the Singers and the Giants were real for long. No matter what he does, rumours would start. Those would make their way south quickly. More fanatics would immediately join the Faith Militant in response to the rumours. Tales of Giants and Children of the Forest are only going to pour gasoline on the flames of the Faith uprising. The movement would start gaining power quickly unless it is squashed now.

Hadrian doubts either Jon Arryn or Robert Baratheon will act decisively enough to end things before they get significantly worse.

According to Lord Manderly, the South isn’t prospering nearly as much as the North. Some of his merchants said Kingslanding was in a worse state now than when Aerys ruled. With the city getting worse every year. The more desperate and angry people become, the more likely they are to lash out. Unfortunately the North makes a perfect scapegoat for their anger and the Faith Militant the perfect place for them to gather.

All the smallfolk in the South will see is that the North is starting to prosper and their lives are getting worse. Any skilled speaker can make it seem like the Norths fault instead of the incompetence of the King or their ruling lords. Hadrian can see that the Faith Militant will only explode in numbers in the future from the desperate and angry.

So if he was going to be dealing with prejudice from the Faith towards the North anyways, he might as well try and control the narrative for his benefit as much as he could.

Hadrian decided he would try and get the newcomers integrated into the North as fast as he could. The sooner they manage to show their worth to the Northern lords, the more the lords will see them as assets to be protected. The more the lords would be willing to fight for them if the need ever arises.

So the first obstacle was to get them introduced to the Northern lords and to start getting them all to mingle among themselves and integrate. The next would be to have them start contribute towards the North and its prosperity. Hadrian knows it won’t be an easy or quick prospect but there are certain things that can be done to speed the process up.

He will have to buy as much time as he can before the South finds out about this though. At least the whole South. He will, of course, need to inform the King. He will try and do so in a way that the King hopefully takes it as a joke and not as serious news. With any luck, Robert will dismiss his words about Giants and Children and pay more attention to the rest of the letter, as long as it’s filled with reasonably important news that he will be more interested in. Harry will need to think more about that on his journey to Winterfell.

The first step to controlling the narrative will be in the purge of spies in Winterfell and the rest of the North. Doing so in Winterfell and Wintertown will be easy, by now he knows of every spy in the castle. He has spent years skinchanging looking for spies and his Huntsmen have done the same. The rest of the North is a different matter though. He knows about a lot of spies but he highly doubts he can get them all. At the very least, he should be able to take care of some of the more obvious spies. Such as that Lannister Maester at White Harbour.

With any luck that should prevent solid confirmation of giants from reaching most Southern courts for a few moons at least. Even then, hopefully the news is dismissed by most who can’t get a solid confirmation by a trusted source. After all, Maesters have been teaching nobles that Giants and the Children of the Forest are extinct for generations. Who would easily believe otherwise?

Just to muddy the waters a bit more, Hadrian decided he could spread some of his own propaganda. Write a couple of plays about some important histories of Giants and the Children of the Forest and spread the plays as far and wide as he can. Get some good costumes for some of the actors and then send them south to play in a few moons. Maybe some of the nobles will believe that’s what all the talk of giants was about?

He doubts it will work on all of them. Or even most of them. But it should cast some more doubt and hopefully slow down the inevitable realisation that the North has the most powerful military tools in Westeros now. That should hopefully give him at least a year to get the North ready for any type of backlash that is sure to come from that realisation.

He will need to heavily expand upon his spy network so he can start keeping a closer eye on things. Both in the North and the South. Hopefully some of the Children can fill in the gaps until he gets more Huntsmen.

After the kneeling ceremony, Hadrian immediately started heading back South, followed by his expanded party.

Getting past The Wall wasn’t an issue. Hadrian and the Lords that accompanied him left most of their men at Castle Black. So the men of the Nights Watch had no choice but to let him back through The Wall even accompanied by creatures straight out of legend.

For to try and stop him from crossing back into his own Kingdom would not only see many, if not all of them killed today, but it would bring the wrath on the North down on the order should they somehow manage to defeat Hadrians men. Which he highly doubted, as all of his guards were well trained and had good weapons and armour.  While the men of the Nights Watch were not close to their level, no matter how much his gold has improved their situation.

So, no. Getting past The Wall wasn’t an issue. That isn’t to say everyone was happy with his choices either.

He saw many men of the Nights Watch shoot him looks of anger and hatred in between their looks of fear. Most of those men were from the South. The ones from the North were generally in too much awe or disbelief at the sight of the Giants and Singers to really pay Hadrian much attention. Beyond the occasional curious glances and awe filled whispers of some of the younger members.

Hadrian decided for everyone’s comfort to not stay at The Wall for more than a few minutes and started bringing everyone back to Winterfell immediately.

It wasn’t until the next day that the Lords finally decided to question him. He was travelling at a sedate pace in the middle of the column next to lord Umber and Lord Karstark. Lord Manderly was sitting on the back of the cart in front of them, that was covered in blankets and had a lot of different food laying available for the Lord to eat at his leisure. Leaf was riding bareback on a spare horse that was gifted to her on Hadrians other side. The horse wasn’t muzzled, nor did it have reigns of any kind. Despite that, Leaf was guiding it better than any rider Hadrian had ever seen.

Most of their journey so far, they have spoken to Leaf about some of the histories of their people and of Westeros. The Lords were suitably interested in what the Singer had to say. She spoke to them about when men first came to Westeros and how their peoples warred with each other. She spoke of a few battles and a few sights she’s seen. She spoke about how their races eventually came to a truce that was honoured for thousands of years, until the Andals came.

Most of what she spoke about were stories that the Lords already knew but she had been alive during some of these events or knew others that were, this added an interesting perspective to them.

It wasn’t until a few hours past midday that Lord Umber finally brought up the question that Hadrian was sure was plaguing their minds for a while now.

“How did you do it?” He asked.

“Do what my lord?” Hadrian smirked.

Lord Umber huffed. “Don’t play the idiot boy. It doesn’t suit you. How did you arrange all of this? When did you meet the Children or the Giants and convince them to bend the knee?”

Harry smiled and gestured towards Leaf. “Perhaps you would like to explain?” It was probably time for some truths to be known to some of his most trusted Lords anyway. They need to get more used to his magic for the world he is trying to build.

She tilted her head at Hadrian slightly in curiosity but nodded her consent. “Hadrian Stark is a powerful greenseer. When one gets to that level, they are able to navigate the Weirwoods and speak with another greenseer from great distances. We met when Hadrian was practicing his gifts and stumbled across us. We had a conversation and Hadrian offered my people a deal. After some thought, we accepted. We were the ones who set out to find the Giants and propose that same deal to them on the Starks request.” He noticed she left some details out, but he didn’t really want to talk about the Three –Eyed Raven either.

The lords were looking suitably awed at her words.

Lord Umber was definitely staring at Hadrian very intensely now. Lord Karstark was silent but the expression of disbelief on his face was funny to see. Lord Manderly, always the most curious of the bunch, was the first to ask. “What exactly is greenseeing and what can it do? I’ve read myths about it. But they are never clear. “

Leaf hummed. “Greenseeing is a difficult thing to explain. Especially to those that lack the gift. Essentially, at its most basic, it allows one to see visions through the Weirwood trees. Those can be of the past, present or even glimpses of the possible future. It is an incredibly rare and powerful gift.”

Wymans eyebrows rose to the top of his forehead. “So you are able to do these things my lord?” He asked.

Hadrian hummed slightly. “It is a lot more complicated than it sounds. Essentially what is seen is random, unless you are skilled at directing where you want your visions to go. I am starting to become skilled, but it is still nearly impossible to find a specific thing in the visions unless you know exactly where it is. The Weirwoods have seen countless things through countless ages. Finding something specific is almost impossible unless I know exactly where and when to look. It is like navigating a maze that branches out infinitely with no clear right or wrong direction. Just different directions that go on forever. If one is not careful they can become lost.”

Lord Manderly looked even more interested now. If that were possible.

“How is this possible?” He asked.

Harry laughed. “Magic.”

Lord Manderly tried to look incredulous at his answer but instead he appeared resigned. He let out a sigh. “All the Maesters agreed magic was dead. Then again, they said the same about the Giants and the Children of the Forest.”

Lord Umber spat on the floor. “Bah! What do those Southern cunts know?! I always knew they were a useless lot!”

After a moment, Lord Umber looked at Hadrian again. “So those stories about you being a skinchanger are true? Did you really destroy the Ironborn army at Moat Cailin with snakes?”

Harry hesitated. “You don’t seem very surprised?”

Umber barked a laugh. “Boy, my House is the closest one to the Wall. I’ve seen some strange things. Heard some strange tales too. My uncle Mors is a skinchanger himself. He treats that squirrel of his like…” He trailed off and shuddered. “Nevermind that. I believed the tales the first time I heard of them. I just want you to confirm it for these two. “ He slapped Lord Karstark on the back and pointed at Lord Manderly.

Harry smiled wryly. “Yes. I am a skinchanger. All greenseers are. Greenseeing is the rarer ability.”

Lord Umber grinned and laughed loudly. “Hah! A Stark blessed by the Gods! Giants! Children of the Forest!“ With another laugh he slapped the Hadrian on the back. He held back a wince. “Things are going to get interesting in the next few years!” With that the lord absolutely started roaring in laughter.

Lord Karstark meanwhile was more focused on the opportunities this revelation brought. “If others could learn this skill, it could revolutionise our army. Our navy. The Norths strength would be greatly increased.”

Harry frowned. “Unfortunately, either you are born with the ability to learn or you aren’t. Both of my uncles have the ability, but I doubt they will ever be great at it. It is easier for children to learn than it is for adults and will always be dangerous if one is not careful. The instincts of the animal can bleed into the person making them unstable. Besides, I don’t want the ability to spread too far, too quickly. It is useful if it is under our control but if others used this against us, it would make life a lot harder. Even bandits could become much more dangerous if they abused this skill. So it will be a number of years before I consider expanding into the military. There are things that must be thought about first. That’s not to say I haven’t already started putting plans in place though.” He smirked.

Hadrian is planning on building a Kingdom that accepts magic users. That means, inevitably, there will be many more magic users and not all of them will be law abiding citizens. Magic has been slowly growing stronger all his life and will probably only continue to do. After saving the Giants and the Children, Hadrian doubts that magic is in danger of dying anytime soon as long as he can keep them safe. That means there will definitely be more skinchangers in a few generations. There will be more Giants and hopefully more Children of the Forest. There will also be a rise in the power of other magic, as Harry doesn’t believe he knows even a fraction of what is possible in this new world, and with it the rise of dark magic users is all but guaranteed.

So Harry has to think about laws to make now and how to set up his Huntsmen for future generations to include taking care of any possible Dark Wizards that might appear. He needs to probably create another organisation like the Aurors to look over the general population, while his Huntsmen remain the elite who are commanded by The Stark of Winterfell.

Lord Karstark looked satisfied. Hells, the lord was probably over the moon with the revelation of this skill and the fact it might soon be introduced on certain levels in the military. With skinchanging, Giants and Children of the Forest, the North is well on its way to having the greatest military in the world. Just a few more years and a few more changes and the Norths military will be the greatest in the world. Even if it won’t be very large yet.

Lord Umber laughed. “This will give us a big advantage over those southern cunts!” Lord Karstark let out a few small laughs at Lord Umbers boisterousness.

“Are the Gods real?” Lord Manderlys question instantly brought silence to all everyone. Hadrian noticed that Lord Manderly wasn’t looking towards him for an answer, but rather towards Leaf. Everyone looked toward the Singer in expectation. Even Hadrian.

He never really believed in Gods in his last life, but after he became Master of Death and was reborn, he finds the idea much more plausible. After all, it seems as if death was a real entity.

Leafs face had gone deadly serious at the question. It took her a few moments before she began to speak. “My kind has long since worshipped the Gods of the trees and forests. Of the rivers and lakes. Our oldest stories sing that the first of our kind was born from the earth itself, in front of a Weirwood tree. Born from the will of those gods to care for and protect their domain. Born to look over the world and try to keep a balance with nature. To try and understand it. To listen for the voices of the gods of the forest and rivers and Sing their will for the world to hear.” There was a slightly bitter tinge to her tongue. She looked heartbroken and sad and longing. Maybe at the thought they perverted that balance by creating the Others. Or at the silence of the gods. Or for a completely different reason. He didn’t know and didn’t think it right to ask.

“Once long ago, the gods were more active in the world. If one listened to the Song of the World well enough, they could hear their will. They spoke often enough for us to not doubt that they exist. There were many of them. The gods of trees and forests weren’t the only gods. There was the Mother Rhoyne. She was very real but is sleeping now. The Drowned God and the Storm God were both real too. Whether they are sleeping or faded, I cannot say. There were many other gods over time, whom followed the same path and interacted with mortals throughout history before fading into slumber. Some have some power over the world still. Like Rhollor. The Gods of the trees and forests used to speak just as much, if not more than them. They have been slumbering for thousands of years now, but they are still watching. Still listening and still influencing the world when they desire.” She finished, her words trailing off as she stared at Hadrian at the last part.

He wondered if she thought the reason for his existence was the will of the Old Gods.

He wondered, if in some small part, it might have been.

Now she was back to looking neutral. “Although they do not speak as often as they once did. Do not doubt the power of our Gods. For they are still there. They are still watching and they are still guiding us.”

All the Lords had deeply enthralled looks on their faces. Lord Umber soon broke out laughing. “Ha ha ha I knew the gods were real! But to have proof…” he broke off into a reverent whisper.

“And the Seven?” Lord Manderly interrupted.

Leaf frowned at him. “I have never seen proof of their existence. I did investigate a little when the Faith first landed on Westeros. In every instance I found, men who have claimed to speak for The Seven, their septons, were lying about hearing their voices. Either they were blindly following a scripture written by other men born long before them in hopes of finding salvation, or they were doing it for the power it gave them over other men. Whether the Seven themselves are real I cannot truly say for certain. I do not know what the original scripture was or how the Faith came about. But I have never personally seen proof of their existence as I have other gods. I have never heard their song or their voice as I have with other gods. And I have never heard of anyone who has genuinely done so either.”

Lord Manderly had a strange look on his face. It was a mixture between disappointed, sad and Hadrian even thought he might have looked a little relieved. The Lord let out a sigh and looked away. The look on his face showed he just wanted to think.

The next few days of the journey were relatively pleasant. Lord Manderly was pretty silent and deep in thought but Lord Umber and Karstark made up for that. Both of the Lords seemed to be in good moods. Laughing, joking and even singing at one stage.

They passed Last Hearth without any trouble and didn’t stay longer than a night before they were back on the road again. Harry was eager to get to Winterfell and so were his Lords. Even Lord Umber didn’t make a fuss about leaving his castle again so soon. Luckily he managed to avoid most attention as they arrived at the castle after the sun had set and he had the Giants and Children spend the night in the woods and had the lords keep quiet about them. A few people still stumbled across them, but Hadrians men generally handled those occasions and did all they could to keep the smallfolk quiet and calm, even if it meant giving away some gold.

They were only four days ride South of Last Hearth when things changed.

Harry was in the middle of listening to one of Lord Umbers amusing tall tales. It was close to midday and the sun was shining down from the clear sky bringing a level of warmth that was uncommon this far into the North.

“….size of three men she was! But she still couldn’t handle my enormous strength! With a cry I tackled that bear and-“

“My Lord!” Lord Umber was interrupted by one of the two Huntsmen that Hadrian took with him on his journey, riding as close to Hadrians horse as he could before he was stopped by the guards.

Harry hardly needed any time to think and told the guard to let him pass once he recognised who it was. “Ven.” He greeted the man with a nod. “ What’s the matter?” He asked.

Ven was a younger man just a little over sixteen years in age. Jod, Hadrians First Huntsman, found him a year ago living on the Western shores near Sea Dragon Point with his mother and little sister. His father was dead and Ven used to hunt to keep his family fed. Jod found out that he skinchanged into a falcon and decided to train him with Harrys permission. His family moved into Wintertown and now, Ven was one of his better skinchangers.

He bowed on his saddle. “My Lord. I was scouting with…” He glanced at the other lords and at Hadrian. At Harrys nod he continued. “my falcon, Sharpclaw, and I saw an army to the south-west of us. They are less than a day away and marching to meet us on our journey. “

The first thought to go through Hadrians mind was ‘The mandatory lessons I force each of my huntsmen to undergo is working wonders on their vocabulary.’ His second thought was ‘It looks like I will get to see the Giants and Singers in action a lot sooner than I expected. ‘

Harry let out a sigh and voiced his third thought while the lords were now a lot more focused. “How many men and what banners do they carry?”

He hesitated. “ I counted at least a thousand men, but I believe there are more. There were a lot of men within the treeline.”

The lords around him broke into mutters. A thousand men meant they were already outnumbered almost two to one. If there are a lot more, there might be some serious problems. Harry ignored the mutters and gestured for the man to continue.

He did so without hesitation. “They were a mixed bunch my lord. Many of them looked as if they were wearing decent armour and looked like they were well armed. They actually looked like soldiers. They even had cavalry. There were many others though who looked like they were common peasants. Some of them were wearing the seven pointed star. A lot of them were dressed in simple furs and some were even carrying tools as weapons. I didn’t see any banners though my lord.”

Harry frowned. He suspects the Whitehills are probably involved if there are signs of the Faith present. He doubts Lord Manderly had anything to do with this. The Dreadfort was to the South. He doubts an army could march across Boltons lands without him knowing, so Bolton was probably involved as well.

How he wished he had more Huntsmen so events like this wouldn’t surprise him.

How he wished he sent Huntsmen to watch the Whitehills or Boltons like he meant to, instead of sending one to Kingslanding to keep an eye on the crown. But it needed to be done. He needed to know what was happening.

Harry sighed slightly. There was no point in useless regrets.

He took a deep breath and hardened himself. “Lord Umber.” He said interrupting the lords rant about traitorous cunts.

When the lord quietened down and turned to face him, Hadrian spoke. “You know these lands. Is there any good places to meet them in battle we can reach quickly? Preferably somewhere we will have high ground.” Harry rubbed his chin. “And if there is a forest nearby for some of our forces to hide in, that would be even better.”

Lord Umber grinned. It was not a very nice one.

Major Steps

Major Steps

290-AC The True North: Just beyond The Wall

The journey to The Wall proved to be quiet boring for Harry. He was used to spending the entire day rushing between different projects and ideas. Used to seeing progress every day. So for Harry, spending weeks travelling at a sedate pace by horse and carriage up the kingsroad was quiet …difficult.

Unfortunately, he wanted a few different Lords to join him on his journey to The Wall and Lord Manderly was one of them. Hadrian never told anyone the true reasons for the visit to The Wall. Convincing the Lord to go at all was a chore. He was under the impression that they were going to look at the farms and speak to Lord Umber about subduing the wildlings. Not exactly an important reason to drag him out of the castle. So Hadrian had to allow him his comforts.

So they were travelling by carriage.

In the end, it took them two weeks to reach Last Hearth. Two weeks of travelling at an agonising pace, feeling every bump in the road, trapped in a confined space with nothing to do to pass the time but talk.

Harry found it agonising.

When they finally got to Last Hearth, Harry wasn’t sure whether to laugh in happiness at finally getting there, or cry that they still had to go all the way to The Wall.

He spent a night in the castle speaking to Lord Umber and Lord Karstark, who he summoned from the Army. In this time he convinced/ordered both Lords to join him on his procession to The Wall as well. Both were understandably confused about why they were asked to join his journey to The Wall, but they agreed to come anyway.

Not before they spent a night in the castle, with Lord Umber trading outlandish stories and drinking the other Lords under the table.

Lord Umber was under the impression Hadrian wanted him there to inspect some of the farmlands and give advice where he could. Lord Karstark was under the impression Harry wanted to talk to him about the army. That he wanted his advice on assessing The Wall. Both reasons were true. Neither were entirely correct.

Hadrian did spend some time looking at the growing farmlands. He studied the geography and the climate as much as he could. Harry didn’t know much about farming, but he did notice one or two places he could create some lakes from rivers coming from some of the mountains. A few places some streams might be able to be diverted to make ponds or dams. He made a note of those places.

He also had a discussion with Lord Umber about laying the foundation for a couple of huge grazing grounds. He hinted to the Lord that those would be for the mammoths and Giants. Lord Umber looked amused when Hadrian said that. Even more amused when he told him the mammoths would be allowed to roam the Gift and graze and the Giants would be allowed to roam the North unbothered. Hadrian didn’t think Lord Umber believed him. The Lord seemed to be under the impression he was joking and that he wanted those fields for something else.

Hadrian didn’t mind. He let the Lord believe whatever he wished. When the mammoths do graze on the land, he will make sure Lord Umber gets to sell mammoth fur and meat to make some profit.

After that conversation, Hadrian spent even more time looking over the farmlands for lack of anything else to do on their journey. As their procession was moving even slower with the additional lords and their men.

He came to several conclusions about the farms. They were at a decent size and probably wouldn’t grow too much more in the next few years, unless they get an influx of people. It was best to start focusing on cash crops soon before they ran out of people for those industries.

That problem seemed to follow him everywhere these days.

There were plenty of farms and fields that were springing up, there was just a lot more space and nowhere near enough people to make a dent in the land. Not for many generations at least. That’s part of the reason Hadrian believed it would be a good spot for some of the Giants and their herds of mammoths to roam. At least until he can get them somewhere more permanent. Possibly back beyond The Wall once he has conquered it.

There were also growing issues with wildling attacks. They were increasing in number. When asked, Lord Karstark promised to place two hundred men from the Army in the Gift for protection in a few moons. The first batch from the army training should be ready by then and this will make a decent first assignment for some of them.

When with the Lords, sometimes they asked Hadrian about some of his plans. For the most part, he talked about fixing and improving the Kingsroad. He talked to them a bit more about how he plans to subdue the Wildlings and the plan he has to do that. He informed them he would most likely start doing that within a year. He spoke to Lord Manderly about some of the work he was doing on designing new ships.

He spoke to Lord Karstark about how the training of the Army was going. Harry told him more about the plan to trade with and subdue the wildlings and informed him of how those plans would affect him.

Hadrian informed Lord Karstark and the other Lords that the army would only be providing four hundred men for the first part of the endeavour. Those numbers may increase later on once there were more men in the Army. The men from the army would cycle in and out every six moons. They would need to get experience in other places for the army as well.

Hothar Umber would be leading another four hundred men from a few different houses who would be stationed there for a year. He would be in charge of building a small fort and creating a trade post. More men would be sent at a later time if they were needed.

Hadrian expected it to take a while for any kind of organised resistance to mount against them. By then he should have more trained men from the army to put towards stopping that.

Harry offered Lord Karstark some praise for some of the decisions he made with the Army and their training then he gave the Lord some suggestions on how to make the army better in some places. He even gave Lord Karstark a marching song he wrote that he wanted the men to learn, to bring more unity and a sense of belonging. To create a culture for the Army.

So Hadrian did accomplish some things on his journey to The Wall. He also got a proper sense of how large The North really is. It didn’t stop the entire experience from being painfully boring though.  He was used to being stimulated for most hours of the day.

Still, he considered it worth it when he got his first glimpse of The Wall.

He could see the structure rising over the horizon in the far distance. As he got closer, he started to become more and more appreciative of the pure size of the structure.

Harry admired the marvel from a hill few leagues away from Castle Black. He saw some of The Wall when he was a Bear Island. He could take in that the structure was large even from that distance, but he never truly understood how large it was, not until he was standing in its shadow.

The Wall stretched across the entire continent. A thin part, sure, but it was still a massive distance. It stood larger than almost any structure in this world. It was a structure that would be legendary even in his old world. Harry considers it the most impressive structure on Planetos.

That’s why it was so disappointing to ride into Castle Black and see that the Castle in such terrible shape.

The walls were crumbling on the southern side. The towers were also mostly in ruins. Harry found himself slightly disappointed on the progress of the Nights Watch. He has been giving them thousands of Gold Dragons a year, he thought they would have done more with it.

Still, he was happy that they were getting some use out of the gold. He noticed some of the towers were undergoing repairs. The stables were being expanded and another castle on The Wall was also slowly being fixed up for habitation. Some of the men at the gates also had decent quality steel.

So while he was disappointed in their progress, he was just happy they were at least progressing.

They only spent a two days in the castle. A lot of that time was spent with the Lord Commander. Or with some of the more reasonable Brothers. Otherwise Hadrian was with one of the Lords or standing on top of The Wall, admiring the view from possibly the closest he will ever get to flying in this lifetime.

On the third day, they set out beyond The Wall.

“Are you sure about this lad?” Lord Umber asked as they rode through the ice tunnel leading to the wild unclaimed lands North of The Wall.

Harry spared the Lord a smile. “There’s nothing to be afraid of my lord. We are only going to the Hearttree just North of here.”

Lord Umber huffed. “I fear nothing! I’m just making sure you’ve thought this through.”

Lord Manderly laughed from the top of his horse. The lord was so covered in furs, only his nose and mouth were visible. At least the man was finally travelling by horse instead of that awful carriage. Even if Harry felt slightly sorry for the poor animal that seemed to already be struggling under his weight.  “I’ve seen you with your wife Umber. I’ve never seen a man more scared in his life!”

The Greatjon paused for a second before a great bellowing laugh escaped him. “Aye, you’re right on that Manderly! “

Hadrian blinked the light out of his eyes as they exited the tunnel. After a few moments he turned back to his lords and noticed Lord Karstark was looking at him with a serious expression.

Before he could question it, the Lord spoke. “My Lord, you never did tell us the reason you wanted to be out here. The real reason you wanted us on this journey. I know they aren’t the reasons you gave us, which could easily be discussed over raven.”

The other lords fell silent as they listened for Hadrians answer.

Harry blinked at the lord for a moment before his mouth curled up in a tiny grin. “I wanted you all to witness something. “

Lord Karstark frowned. “Witness what my lord?”

Harry turned forward and kicked his horse into moving a little faster. “You will see soon.”

With that, Harry rode further into the North. Leaving the lords grumbling behind him as they followed.

It only took them a few hours to reach their destination. Around midday they rode into a clearing.

It would be nothing more than an average clearing in the woods if it wasn’t for the single Heartree standing in the middle of it.

Harry was quick to dismount his horse as he entered the clearing. The other Lords followed his example. The guards that followed them beyond the wall stayed on their mounts and were ordered to stay on the outside of the clearing.

Hadrian was quick to go towards the Hearttree. The other lords followed him in silence until lord Umber broke it. “No matter which Godswood, the Heartree never fails to bring a sense of comfort and calm.”

Harry spotted Lord Wyman making uncomfortable faces besides the other Lords. He knew the old Lord would probably never convert from the Faith. Wyman should easily be able to keep The Seven worshippers in his city calm. So he wouldn’t ever really be forced to choose as long as he can keep his city from rebellion or civil war.

Even a moon or two absence shouldn’t make a big difference at this stage, most Seven Worshippers in White Harbour already get along with Old God worshippers and the Faith Militant has only just started gaining steam in the South. It will be a while before they can truly try something in The North

It doesn’t mean Hadrian won’t aim for the younger generation though. He wants more people to worship the Old Gods, just because he can’t convert Lord Wyman doesn’t mean he can’t convert future generations in White Harbour.

Harry cast those thoughts out of his mind for now as he kneeled on the ground in front of the tree.

With a slight bit of concentration, Harry brushed his mind against the tree, only instead of entering into the tree and into the Green, he brushed his mind on some of the magic energy coming off the tree and used this energy to amplify his magical and mental abilities outwards. He wanted to see everything this specific Weirwood was seeing in this moment.

Suddenly Harry found his mind expanding. He saw everything. Every object, every insect, every root, tree and animal within a huge radius.

Harry was the forest. At least part of it. He knew every crevice, every shadow, every leaf. He saw a thousand different views from a thousand different eyes. Time felt like it was lasting an eternity but Hadrian knew it was really only a moment.

As suddenly as the experience came, it left. He slumped forward slightly and felt his vision grow black and his head start to ache. Harry groaned slightly. He figured out how to do this a while ago and the experience never got any better. The amount of sensory information he took in from his surroundings would probably fry a normal brain easily. The only reason Harry can even do this trick is because his memory is influenced by magic from being the Master of Death. He imagines a normal wizard would probably go insane or braindead from a fraction of the information. Still, it’s worth it to Harry. He now knows every inch of the forest immediately around him.

“My lord are you okay?” Lord Umber asked.

“Aye.” Harry sat up and wiped the blood from his nose off his chin with his sleeve.

Harry stood and turned to the lords who were watching him with various expressions of worry on their faces.

He just grinned at them. “I’m okay my lords. More importantly, they are here.”

All three of the Lords tense up. Harry could see some of the guards on the outskirts tense as well.

“Who is ‘they’?” Lord Karstark is the one to voice the question.

Harry just ignores them and looks into the forest. After a moment he speaks seriously and loudly, his voice carrying to all members of his party. “Keep your weapons sheathed! They are not our enemies!”

No one has the time to question him because on the other side of the large clearing a small shape starts making its way through the bushes. Harry can clearly see some men tense but fortunately no one draws their weapons. The mood gradually gets more tense until the figure steps out from the foliage and into full sight.

It was almost like a spell was put on everybody. As soon as the figure was visible, the clearing became unnaturally quiet. Like everybody was holding their breaths. The spell was broken by the gasps that started coming out of the men.

Lord Umber choked on his spit. “Is that….?”

“A Child of the Forest.” Lord Karstark breathed quietly in awe. Lord Manderly just stood frozen, not moving his eyes from the sight in front of them.

Hadrian cast an amused glance at the lords and the rest of the men. Allowing for an amused smirk to be seen on his face, Harry spoke. “I ask for your silence for a while my lords. I swear I will explain everything to you in a little while.” Then he turned back towards the Child of the Forest.

“Leaf.” Hadrian called as he confidently walked up to the small creature.

The Child of the Forest bowed its head slightly. “Stark.”

Harry could hear the lords muttering to each other behind him as they drew closer. When Leaf turned her attention away from Harry towards those lords, the muttering stopped and the clearing dropped into dead silence.

Leaf inspected each of the Lords for a few seconds. Just long enough for them to start fidgeting uncomfortably.

After a moment, she nodded to each of them and then Leaf turned away from the lords and back to Harry. “You are late.” She said shortly.

Harry laughed and rubbed his neck sheepishly. “Nothing I could do about it. There are a lot of things happening in the North these days, I had to be there for most of it. This was the soonest I could make this trip.”

Leaf just nodded before asking. “Is our agreement still in place?”

Harry got serious quickly. “Yes, there are other smaller details to be discussed but they are not time sensitive and can be debated upon at a later date. Are all the others here?”

Harry already knew they weren’t far. He saw them when he connected to the Weirwood. He found it was probably more polite to ask though.

The Child of the Forest didn’t look particularly pleased at his answer but she didn’t look displeased either. She was probably expecting it. “Yes. All of my kind North of The Wall were gathered and are prepared to meet our end of the bargain. As many Giants as possible were gathered as well. We managed to convince them to at least meet you but getting them to agree is something you will have to do. Be warned, Giants are proud, stubborn beings.”

With that she turned and walked deeper into the forest. Harry was quick to follow her, but he just managed to hear Lord Umbers incredulous laugh and the word ‘Giants’from behind him before the lords followed. Harry resisted the urge to laugh.

They only had to walk a few hundred metres into the forest before they came across a large area devoid of trees. He found a group there waiting for him that almost anybody on Planetos would find strange. Harry just felt nostalgic.

There were Giants moving about a makeshift camp. Some of them were trailing after mammoths while others were just sitting on the ground, waiting. There were dozens of Children that were also mingling with the giants. A few dire wolves roamed around the make shift camp and so did a few other animals such as a large majestic buck, a few normal wolves, a great big snow bear, some foxes and a few different species of birds.  Truly it was a magical sight.

Harry turned and spared the lords a glance. He smiled when he saw how they were gaping at the scene. Then Harry brought his attention back to the others who had now started reacting to their arrival.

All the giants that were sitting stood up and started coming closer. Harry noticed the Children of the Forest moved off to one side out of the way. The largest giant was leading the group walking up to Hadrian. He was big, but not quite as big as the giants he remembers. He felt some of the lords next to him tense, but he remained calm.

When the lead giant got close to Hadrian it spoke in a strong deep voice. “Mor Stark?” It asked.

Harry could hear Lord Umber start translating for the other lords. “Are you Stark?”

Harry answered. “Sen da men Stark. Mu se?”

“ I am Stark. Who are you?”

The giant huffed slightly. “So Magnar bi di, Mag Mar WunToh Weg.””

“I am the leader of these giants, Mag Mar WunToh Weg. “ Lord Umber starting changing the very simple words that the Old tongue is comprised of, into a more comprehensive form.

The giant spared Lord Umber a glance as he continued translating, before grunting loudly. “Mal si noer Stark?”

“Why did you want to meet us Stark?”

Hadrian glanced at Lord Umber and decided to tune him out as he focused on his conversation. “Have offer for you. It’s same as one I gave Children. Have they told you offer?”

The giant kneeled down to look closer at Harrys face. He saw Lord Umber and Karstark take a step back and reach for their swords for a moment before stopping.  The giant then growled. “They tell of bargain. They kneel, you protect them.“ With that the giant spat on the floor. “Cowards. “

Harry could see the Lords were physically restraining themselves from drawing their weapons. Not that they would help all that much in this situation. He just kept himself perfectly calm as the giant growled in his face.

He continued to keep calm and smiled before answering. “I say smart. Every year, your numbers fewer. You struggle for food. For mammoths and giants. Going south gives mammoths better grazing. Maybe you can rebuild numbers over long time. Giants long lived, but don’t have many children.”

The giant looked at him more keenly at that. Harry was sure it wasn’t a very well-known fact that giants only have one or two children in their lives and very rarely more than that. It was one of the things he discovered while researching the giants through the Weirwood. Giants can live a few centuries if they’re lucky, but they don’t reproduce anywhere near as fast as humans. “Why must kneel? Many giants here. With help of free folk, we break Wall.”

Harry laughed. “We know you need more numbers. You won’t kill your people. Even if you break Wall, North would crush you.”

The giant growled. “So must become pets?”

Harry answered placidly. “Become my people. Come south, have greater lives. The Stark of Winterfell protects their people. If you protect them and follow laws. You kneel, you become my people. Have better future. No longer feared or hunted. Build great marvels. Kneel. “

The giant just stared at Hadrian, Harry saw its face go through a variety of different emotions. For a brief moment he saw resignation shoot across its features before it stood. “Giants not follow weak. Prove strength. Fight.”

When Lord Umber translated, Lord Manderly was quick to cry out. “My Lord, you cannot do this. “

Lord Umber and Karstark were quick to agree with him.

Harry turned his gaze away from the Lord towards the giant that was just watching him impassively.  After a moment he gave his answer. “Fine.”

“My Lord-“ Hadrian cut Lord Manderly off with a glance.

Without wasting any time, Hadrian strode into the middle of the field a large distance away from the giant. Then he shouted. “Begin!”

The giant was quick to start charging across the dozens of metres between them with a roar. Harry just stood and calmly watched as the giant charged him. He could hear the lords and his men freaking out in the background but he stayed focused as the giant rapidly got closer. When it was less than half a dozen metres from him it was suddenly impacted by a large blur and knocked off its feat.

The giant grunted and started rolling onto its feat. The mammoth never gave it the chance. Within a few moments the giant had been knocked over again and one of the largest mammoths in sight placed its foot on top of its chest.

Hadrian didn’t know how strong giants were. He doubted they could survive the full weight of a mammoth on their chests though. Luckily for him, he was right and the giant chief immediately stilled after the mammoth started applying more pressure.

After a few moments he had the mammoth release him and back away.

The chief of the giants made it way to his feet before he turned to Harry and snarled. “You cheat!”

Harry just smiled. “I show strength. “ With that he gestured to the sight behind the giant.

When Mag Mar WunToh Weg turned he was met with the sight of every mammoth kneeling on one of their knees. Close to one hundred mammoths showing absolute subservience to Harry.

Hadrian saw the giant become absolutely still for a moment before slowly turning back to him with a more considering expression than he had showed the whole meeting. Harry just tried to keep his face neutral to hide his growing discomfort from influencing this many animals of such intelligence. He could feel a strong headache already.

When the giant spoke, Harry stopped skinchanging and felt immediate relief that he did his absolute best to mask. “You strong. How giants trust your word?”

Harry smiled, more truly than he had in a while. “There is a Weirwood. We make oaths to Gods.”

The giant agreed before going to talk to his people.

Harry sighed and approached his lords reluctantly, for what he knew would become a long conversation. He must admit the baffled expression on Lord Karstarks face, the dawning realisation of what this means on Lord Manderlys and the open respect on Lord Umbers was almost enough to make the politics of all this worth it.

Sorry these last chapters were late. The story is getting more complicated now that I’m bringing The Faith of the Seven into it. I took time to write out a proper story board with all of the important parts covered in the story, to make it easier to remember what I’ve written and so that I can see where I’m going more easily. It should help me write faster without running into so many blanks in the future. Then i decided to rewrite the last two chapters a few different times because I just could not get happy with them and I needed to make sure I included certain things for certain future plot points in both chapters. Took me longer than I would have liked.

To read ahead: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

A Merman's Dilemma

A Merman's Dilemma

White Harbour-290 AC

Wyman Manderly sat on the balcony of his solar, overlooking his city and the ocean. He was enjoying the rising sun of the morning while eating a well put together breakfast.

It was one of his traditions to watch the sun rise over White Harbour every morning he could. Seeing his beautiful city light up in pink hues and soft golden colors like a painting always managed to take his breath away. It filled him with immense pride to see his people walk the streets on their way to their daily jobs. Watching the city come alive and seeing his people prosper always managed to make him smile. It also served him as a reminder. A reminder that he could make his city even more prosperous.

Today was one of the rare few days that Wyman didn’t feel relaxed when looking out over his city in the mornings glow.

In truth, Wyman found himself conflicted the last few moons. Just six moons ago, things looked like they could not be going better for the North. The North had greater amounts of food being produced each moon. More coin was staying in the North, meaning the economy of the whole Kingdom was slowly but surely improving. A few more years on the same path and the North might be much more powerful than he ever dreamed.

Then things started to get more….complicated.

Turning away trade from Riverrun didn’t faze Wyman. He could understand Hadrian taking advantage of the slights Riverrun gave to weaken the alliance between the two Kingdoms. A strong alliance between the Riverlands and the North has its advantages, such as getting cheaper food and an ally in times of war.

But they are being increasingly outweighed by its disadvantages in these changing times.

The North is growing more of their own food now and purchasing much less from the Riverlands. Making that part of their agreement less valuable as time went by. In a few more years the North might not have to purchase any more food from the Riverlands and the Reach, which will no doubt cause some of those Lords to be angered. Meaning they will be more likely to try plotting against the North. So he can see where distancing the North from these nobles might be a good idea, lest they be taken advantage of.

The Riverlands has also almost always been the center of every war that Westeros has faced. No doubt a strong alliance between the North and Riverlands will mean that the North would be expected to fight in any conflict that takes place in the Riverlands.

This is a large liability for the North. The North has always been at its weakest when they try and fight outside their Kingdom. If they just protect their borders, they are almost impossible to conquer. Something Wyman is sure Hadrian understands. Hence why Wyman believes Hadrian doesn’t care about fostering relations with outside Kingdoms like his grandfather did. Hadrian seems to want to go back to the old days, where the North is mostly isolated by the affairs of the rest of Westeros.

Something Wyman agrees might be a good thing. Although Eddard Starks relationship to the King might be an issue.

Wyman is much more concerned about other problems though. Things that are much more complicated and less straightforward than the Norths relationship with the Riverlands.

Wyman is much more concerned about the resurgence of the Faith Militant.

About three moons ago he started hearing whispers about Old God worshipers in the Riverlands and Vale being brutally murdered from some of his traders who did business in those areas. It filled him with concern but he had faith that Lord Arryn and Lord Tully would bring the situation under control in short order, so he didn’t really think about it too much.

He was wrong.

Instead of cracking down and crushing those fanatics, Lord Arryn only asked the High Septon to condemn these men. To preach against them. Lord Tully halfheartedly sent out only a few groups of men to search for and capture the culprits, with no success.

Unfortunately these fanatics only seemed to take the lack of harsh punishment as encouragement, so little changed.

Then things started getting worse.

A moon later, a small village and Sept was burnt down to the ground by the Mountain Clans, according to the Vale Lords, leaving no survivors. It wasn’t long after, that some Septons in the Vale started preaching against the Mountain Clans. Stating they were such savages because they followed the Old Gods and not The Seven. That they wanted to gather men of the Faith, to wipe out the savages and protect the people of the Vale.

Lord Arryn once again only tried to argue with them instead of taking action. It filled Wyman with concern that the man who is running The Seven Kingdoms showed such little backbone and that the King hadn’t taken any action at all.

Soon, murders in the Riverlands also only increased in number and brutality. Lord Tully finally started taking the situation more seriously, but has still met little success.

A week ago one of the Septons in White Harbour even started preaching against the Old Gods. The man was originally from the Vale and Wyman made him disappear quietly and quickly, but the fact such a thing happened in White Harbour at all filled him with dread.

Despite living in the North for thousands of years now, the Manderlys are still not totally accepted by all the Lords in the North. They may have a large amount of power compared to many Northern Lords, they may have brought a large amount of prosperity to the Eastern coast, but they are still seen as outsiders. Never truly accepted by many.

This war between Faiths has the potential to truly worsen the problem. Wyman found himself in a bind with no good options.

He can’t give any support to the Faith. That’s a given. Not only does he despise the goals of the Faith Militant and respect the Starks too much for that to happen, supporting the Faith would have the Starks and the rest of the North crashing down on House Manderly. He couldn’t even blame them.

If his House survived such a thing, Hadrian Stark would make sure they only worshiped the Old Gods from then on, to prevent such a thing from happening again. The boy was always practical like that. He wouldn’t allow the chance for a repeat performance from House Manderly. They would also always be looked at with suspicion for betraying the liege Lords they owed so much too.

So no, even if he wanted to, he can’t support the Faith.

Unfortunately he can’t really turn against the Faith either. Those are the Gods his House has followed for thousands of years.

Lord Manderly never really considered himself a religious person. He always preferred to put his faith in in facts over blind hope. He followed the tenets of the Faith all his life as that was what his father taught him, but he never really believed in The Seven. Not truly. He donates to the Sept in White Harbor as doing so helps his people while gaining their good will. Not because he believes in The Seven.

Unfortunately a lot of the smallfolk in his city are a different story.

There are many in White Harbor that worship The Seven and much less who worship the Old Gods. There are bound to be fanatics in his city just like there are fanatics in the South. The problem is, he can’t just kill them all and hope for peace, lest they become martyrs and make the situation even worse. He can’t leave them on their own either. As that will also cause everything to spiral out of control.

To be honest Wyman was a bit lost.

Hopefully meeting Hadrian Stark later this day would help give him some perspective. He should at least be more informed once he knows how Hadrian is managing the crisis.

It was around midday when he finally got notified by one of his guards that Hadrian Stark was nearing the city. In a few moments there was a scramble to get ready for his arrival. Messengers were sent to Benjen Stark and the rest of his family were collected.

Half an hour later his family was greeting Hadrian at the gates of the city.

The welcoming ceremony was short and to the point as Wyman knew from Benjen that Hadrian wasn’t one for wasting time on things when he felt there were more important issues to deal with.

Judging by the heavy gaze in the Lord of the Norths eyes, they would be having a very serious discussion soon.

This didn’t mean he should skip on being a good host though. So with smile he offered to throw a small feast to celebrate the Stark of Winterfells arrival.

To his relief, Hadrian accepted and showed a brief smile.

Luncheon was a simple affair and over far too quickly in Wymans opinion. It wasn’t long before he found himself sitting on the same balcony as before with Hadrian Stark, Benjen Stark and his son Wyllis.

Wyman and the others were happy to keep their silence as Hadrian Stark looked over the balcony at the city, with most of his attention staying on the docks and the fleet of ships that were sitting there.

After a moment Hadrian took his attention away from the horizon and brought his gaze to meet Wymans. “You’ve done well.” It was said with a small nod of the head and it immediately brought Wyman a surprising amount of relief.

‘When was the last time I felt this nervous?’ He thought to himself. He never felt this nervous when speaking to Rickard Stark. Then again, Rickard Stark is not Hadrian Stark. Seeing the intelligent gleam in the young boys’ eyes, he knew that Hadrian was significantly more dangerous.

After a moment Wyman bowed his head and accepted the praise with a small quirk of his lips. “Thank you My Lord.”

Hadrian slouched back into his seat and for a moment Wyman felt some of the tension in the room fade away.

“Tell me about this mess with the Faith.” It was said as an order, Wyman knew. The tension was instantly back.

“My lor-“

Hadrian cut him off with a wave of a hand and spoke after a moment. “Let us be blunt in this meeting Lord Manderly. With the topics being as delicate as they are, we need to be clear to each other.”

Wyman sighed slightly. “What do you want to know My Lord?”

Hadrian hummed to himself. “Everything you know. Everything you believe you know. I am aware you have many more contacts in the South than I do because of your merchants. I want to know as much as possible before making any decisions.”

Wyman thought about where he should start for a moment, before deciding to just tell him everything from the beginning.

So he does. He tells Hadrian of the Septons in the Vale and what they are planning against the Mountain Clans. He tells him about some of their atrocities and about how there is another group growing in the Riverlands. He tells him about Jon Arryns passiveness and the Kings inaction. He even tells Hadrian about the Septon they found preaching in White Harbour and what they did with him.

Once the explanation is done, Hadrians face is nothing but a blank mask but Wyman can see the thoughts swirling behind his eyes.

Wyman doesn’t know what he was expecting, but the brief expression that broke through the mask on Hadrians face sent chills down his spine.

Resignation and sadness.

It lasted only a moment, almost too quickly for Wyman to see it. But see it, he did.

It was the face of someone who knew they would probably have to do terrible things in the future, someone who desperately didn’t want to do those things but was prepared to do them anyway. Because it was needed.

That expression on his Lords face sent Wyman into a state of fear he hadn’t felt for a very long time. He knew Hadrian would do whatever was needed to keep his people safe. To keep his family safe. What would happen if White Harbour ever became part of the problem?

Wyman felt another shiver go down his spine.

He made a choice right then. He couldn’t support the Faith. No matter what. If he needed to convert to the Old Gods in the future, to save his family, he would.

It doesn’t mean it will be easy though. Wyman is not a man of Faith but there are plenty in his city who are. Who would not take it well if Wyman just changed his worship. He didn’t really want to change his faith either, but he can’t deny the benefits.

For one, the other Northern Lords would be much more accepting of his family. Perhaps it might even be enough to stop their family from being seen as outsiders? It will also show proper loyalty to Hadrian Stark, which means he would be much more likely to favour White Harbour in the future.

Wyman wants that favour. Hadrian Stark is genius. A genius born once a millennia. There is no other way about it. The boy excels in everything he puts any effort into. His mind is possibly greater than some Archmaesters. In a few years his mind will only improve. The boy has the potential to revolutionise the North, and he knows it. He has already started.

Wyman wants Hadrian to look favorable upon the Manderlys when he continues to do so. The balance of power in the North has already started shifting and will probably only shift more in the years to come. If White Harbor has Hadrians patronage, it will undoubtedly grow much greater.

He was brought out of his musings by Hadrian speaking. “Things will only continue to escalate in the next few years. You know this as well Wyman. Even if we could get rid of the people who started this mess, it would make them a martyr and will just worsen things if it’s tracked back to The North. That might work to escalate things even more. While it is in the South, it is not my problem. I can’t at this time, spend coin to take care of a problem that doesn’t directly affect the North.”

Hadrian paused to take a breath before continuing. “That said, I will not allow this problem to affect the North. There is to be more border control, to make sure no Septons or others who want to cause chaos are let into our borders. All Septons are to be sent back South if they come from there. The Septons working for the Sept in your city are to be left alone but are to be quietly watched, to make sure they aren’t spreading dissent. They are allowed to recruit more Septons, but each one must be from the North and must be screened and watched for a while. No new Septs are allowed to be built until this mess is over, but you can repair and expand the current ones as you like though.“

Wyman nodded along. It was pretty much what he expected. A bit harsh in some places, but understandable in wanting to keep things contained.

After a moment Hadrian continued while watching him carefully. “In a year or two, I will be planting Weirwoods in key locations of this city and some outside the city as well.” Wyman tried hard not to tense. It was what he was expecting, Hadrian wanted to convert the city into worshipers of the Old Gods. He didn’t want a problem at his back if this blows up into a full blown war of the Faiths.

Hadrian continued before Wyman could finish processing his thoughts. “No one will be forced to worship or pray to the Old Gods. They will be forced to live more closely among them though. Hopefully exposure will help prevent some of them from joining the Faiths side.”

It was honestly a kinder method than Wyman was expecting. He assumed Hadrian would inevitably have something planned to change some of the smallfolks faith into that of the Old Gods. He will probably do as much as he can to subtly encourage Old God worship in the next few years. Some of the people from the Neck have already started calling him the Champion of the Old Gods, maybe he will try and encourage that by providing the smallfolk with something he invents. Making them thankful to him and more receptive to the Old Gods. Therefore replacing the Faith in White Harbour as peacefully as possible.

Wyman honestly didn’t know if he should be thankful for Hadrians mercy or curse him for encouraging him to change his religion. No matter, he knows he has a lot of thinking to do and despite himself, he is still not able to blame Hadrian for his decisions. Not when even he can see how practical they are.

Wyman bowed his head, feeling a deep sense of resignation. “I understand My Lord.”

Hadrians eyes softened. “I’m not making you change your religion my lord. You can still keep your faith. But I can’t have The Seven followers grow disenfranchised with the Old God worshippers in the North. The easiest way to take the North is from within. I will not allow the North to fall to infighting my lord. “

Wyman glared slightly. “But it would still be easier for you if I did.”

Hadrian didn’t even flinch. “Yes, it would be. Not just for me either. But for you as well. If things continue to escalate in the south, which they will, then the tension for White Harbour will only increase. Between both you and the Northern Lords, and the Old God worshipers in the North and the Seven worshipers in White Harbour. I need to get on top of this situation as soon as possible. We might find ourselves at war with the Faith in a few years.”

Hadrian took a breath. “To be honest, I have no faith in either Jon Arryn or Robert Baratheon to get this situation under control before then. So I have to take steps that I really don’t like taking to protect the North.”

His shoulders sagged. “I am not very religious my lord. But it feels wrong to just give up my Religion. “

Hadrian smiled. “I won’t force you to change your Religion my lord. If the people of White Harbour learn to live in peace with the Weirwoods I will be planting, then I don’t care what religion they are. I won’t lie and say I wouldn’t prefer for you to follow the Old Gods. But you are a loyal Lord. I won’t force you to make a choice like that. I just want you to keep the people under control, no matter their religion. Make sure the people here are accepting of Old God worshipers even if they follow the Seven and the other way round. Just keep the problem out of White Harbour. “

Harry then continued with a smile. “If people choose to follow the Old Gods, that’s their choice. I won’t force anyone to follow them, but I will try to convince them to. If you choose to continue following The Seven then I won’t punish you or let other lords do so, but I will try and convince you to follow the Old Gods for the rest of either of our lives.”

Wyman let out a breath he didn’t know he was holding. It was reassuring to realise he wasn’t going to be forced but rather coerced. It helped him greatly to know he wasn’t going to be persecuted by the other lords. It gives him time to see what is happening so he can make more evaluated decisions.

Hadrian let out a light laugh. “I will just have to try and convince you the Old Gods exist so you can choose to follow them on your own.”

Wyman almost laughed at such a claim. He didn’t believe in The Seven, never mind the Old Gods.

After a few seconds of quiet Hadrian relaxed and offered a small and dare Wyman say it, genuine, smile. “It’s good to get all that unpleasant stuff out of the way, now we can talk about something more exciting and less depressing.”

He took two items out of his pocket. They were small metal things shaped in a circle tied to a thick piece of string. When Hadrian turned it, Wyman noticed one side was covered in glass.

He felt incredibly confused about why Hadrian would show him an item like this. Then Hadrian handed him one.

When he saw it, he noticed the quality workmanship on the steel and the clearness of the glass. There was a bit of a green tint but not much. The only thing of interest was a small piece of metal in the middle that pointed toward him.

Honestly for a moment he wondered how about how much gold Hadrian threw away to get this thing built. Then he remembered Hadrian was generally pretty practical. So he looked deeper into what the only thing of interest was. The needle was pointing towards him which was also toward the wall. To the North.

But…no..that couldn’t be it.

Wyman turned the device around always keeping an eye on the direction the needle faces. Every time, it continued to point North.

Wyman swallowed. This could revolutionize the Northern fleet. It would give their fleet a leg up on every other. They might be able to go into open sea and explore without getting hopelessly lost. It would revolutionise naval battles. It was a very useful tool.

Hadrian spoke. “I call it a compass. Incredibly useful, but dangerous in the wrong hands.”

Wyman had a moment to shiver about the thought of the Ironborn getting hold of such a tool.

Even though he already believes it, he just had to ask. “Does it always point North?”

Next to him, his son Wylis gave a small gasp when he heard those words and Benjen Stark focused his gaze much more firmly on the objects.

The Stark of Winterfell smirked. “Yes.”

While everyone else in the solar was trying to take in the repercussions of those words. Hadrian just continued, as if he had not revolutionised navigation. “Those are two out of three I have made. One is on me at all times. One will be given to my uncle Benjen and another to Wylis Manderly to help with a successful voyage to Yi-Ti and back. These are not to be reproduced. These are not to be seen. The North isn’t ready for what would happen should other parties get their hands on them. If something were to happen to either of you, either throw it in the sea or try to destroy it. They are to be protected.” He looked gravely at the two who nodded and agreed as quickly as they could.

Hadrian then took a few breaths. “Good, that should make your journey easier. The rest of my men should arrive tomorrow. After a week of rest I want the ships loaded and them to be prepared to sail. There are only a few minor things that are left to discuss with you Lord Manderly.”

Wyman dragged his gaze off of the marvellous device in his hands. A device that would see the fleet return alive. That would see untold riches come into the North. He couldn’t help but wonder.

If this is what Hadrian Stark is capable of now, what would he do in the future?

He answered quickly and brought himself back to the conversation. “Yes My Lord?”

Hadrian spoke. “I have a list of things I want my uncle to get for me from this trip. I want you to go over the list with me and tell me what you think. I would like us to get different items so we don’t over saturate the market. Some of the items are also …..”

To read ahead: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

Rumblings on the Horizon

Rumblings on the Horizon

Winterfell- 290 AC

“….made 20 thousand more Gold Dragons in taxes last year than the year before. Most of that comes from saving gold on food. Unfortunately our expenses have continued to increase exponentially. The Northern Army is a huge strain on our current resources and that strain will only continue to grow as the number of soldiers in the army grow. Luckily past Starks have always made sure to live frugal lives and made sure to save as much gold as they could in case of a serious winter. There was a little over a million gold dragons in the coffers three years ago but with all the new projects, we are down to a little over seven hundred thousand dragons. I expect that if we continue as we are, we will run out of gold within the next three years My Lords.” Luwin finished reading from his report before looking up at Hadrian.

Harry could hear his uncle Ned clutching the arm rests of his chair so hard that the wood was starting to creak. Harry himself just kept calm and stared at the flames in the hearth of his solar. His only reply to the Maesters words was a small “Hmm”. Other than that he was content to just sit and listen to the reports. Reports that the Maester continued when Harry continued to remain silent.

“Lady Mormont states that the construction at Sea-Dragon Point is going reasonably well, although they are starting to run behind schedule due to a lack of manpower. She expects them to fall further behind schedule in the future if she cannot get more workers. Some trading with the South has begun using two of the ships you captured from the Ironborn. As per your instructions, the ships have only begun trading with the Westerlands and are avoiding the Reach and further South.  This is starting to bring in a little bit of gold to the area but not nearly enough to even make a small dent in expenses. The only thing the North has worth selling is furs and wood and you stated they are not to trade wood and furs are not in that high of a demand in the Summer. So I don’t see trade in this area increasing much more in the short term.” The Maester paused. Hadrian could feel Luwins and his uncle’s gazes on him but he continued to keep his silence and watch the mesmerizing dance of the flames.

When it was clear he wasn’t going to say anything, Luwin continued. “Construction of the Naval base on Bear Island is a different story however. According to Lord Jorah Mormont, the construction is costing significantly more gold than expected. Maege Mormont has still managed to keep the construction efforts on schedule despite the costs as they have recently finished building a small port and dock but they are running out of gold. “

Luwin only glanced up at Hadrian for a moment this time before he continued speaking. “Lady Mormont claims that there is not enough gold to begin training sailors. She will need more before anything can be done.“ Harry could hear his uncle constantly shifting in his chair. Despite that he was content to remain silent for the moment.

“Hadrian.” His uncle called his name in a strained voice.

Harry released a small sigh before he dragged his attention away from the flames and towards his uncle. Ned had a grimace on his face and his hands were clenched on the armrests of his chair so tightly that his knuckles were white. Ned released a breath and noticeably calmed himself before speaking. “We are running out of gold. Perhaps it might be a good idea to stop some of the projects until others are finished, or until we build up more gold again.”

Harry immediately shook his head. “No. Those projects are necessary for the prosperity of the North. They will continue as planned.”

Ned grimaced. “Harry.” His voice was incredibly strained now. As if he was struggling to keep his emotions under control. “We cannot afford to lose so much gold. Winter is coming and we will need gold to feed the North if it is long enough. With our relationship to The Riverlands in tatters, The Reach is our best option for buying food. They know that though and are sure to charge us high prices. We need as much gold as we can get. We cannot afford to lose much more.”

Harry sighed. In truth his uncle was right. They did need as much of a safety net as possible in case of a harsh winter. That didn’t mean he was willing to stop the projects that he had already started. That would be the same as throwing away gold and it would severely hurt his reputation.

He turned to Luwin. “How many ships has Lord Manderly built for the trade fleet?”

The Maester quickly started shuffling through papers while Harry waited patiently for him to find what he was looking for. After a few minutes he started to get slightly irritated and let his mind wonder towards thinking of ways to improve record keeping.

He was brought out of his thoughts by the Maesters voice. “Here we are. Lord Manderly has built twenty trading cogs in the last two years for House Stark and a further twenty for House Manderly. There is also six warships that have been built for House Stark.”

Harry took a moment to contemplate those numbers. It was more ships than he originally wanted to be built. Harry originally only wanted a dozen trading cogs for House Stark and a dozen for House Manderly to take part in the trade expedition. Lord Manderly did ask if he could continue to expand the fleet but Harry never expected it to reach these numbers so quickly.

The trade expiditon was meant to take place over a year ago but was unfortunately delayed by the Ironborn rebellion. It seems Lord Manderly didn’t slow down ship production at all during the extra year. In truth, Harry considered it a boon. No matter what he told the others about testing the viability of the trade fleet, he knew it would be a success barring some unforeseen disaster. History on Earth showed him that much.

After considering things for a while longer he nodded to himself and spoke. “Send a raven to Lord Manderly. Tell him to begin preparing the trade fleet for its first voyage. I want all the ships but ten to be ready to sail in a moon. Tell him that I will be travelling to White Harbour to see the fleet leave and discuss other matters of import with him.”

The Maester nodded and started writing down notes of what Hadrian wanted done.

Meanwhile Harry turned to his uncle whose anxiousness hadn’t eased at all. “Say what you want to say uncle.”

Ned still looked hesitant but after a moment he took a few deep breaths to calm himself and began to speak. “I understand that you believe all these projects are important for the Norths development nephew but winter is still coming. If the winter is harsh, we will need all the gold we can get to prevent our people from starving. The trading voyage may work, but if it doesn’t we might be in serious trouble. “

Harry slouched back into his chair and looked his uncle in the eyes. “You have a point uncle; the trade voyage is a gamble. Barring a huge disaster, I have confidence it will work, but there is always a chance that a storm will destroy the fleet. Then we might have a problem on our hands. Still, there are options that should bail us out of trouble should the worst happen.”

Ned sat up in his chair and looked at Harry intently. “Oh, what options?”

Harry shrugged. “I have a few ideas in mind to help boost the economy further. I haven’t had the time to devote to them properly but I suppose it should be something I should start looking at more seriously. These include things like looking for new sources of wealth in the mountains. None of our ancestors have done that, so there might be something worth some value. There are also a few more ideas I’ve had but they will be more complicated.” Harry said, thinking of a few ideas, such as alcohol or glass production. Both of those ideas come with their own set of issues though. Not including the time he would need to spend to develop them that he could spend on other things.

Ned gained a gleam in his eyes. “You believe there might be wealth in the mountains?”

Harry shrugged, honestly unsure. “Some of the mountains in the North are part of the same range as mountains in the Westerlands. So there is a chance gold can be found there. If not, there should at least be iron or precious gems.”

After a second he continued. “I will start looking into that at a later time though. When there is more time to devote towards it. There is also always the option of taking a loan from the Iron Bank.”

Ned frowned severely. “I don’t like the idea of getting into debt with the Iron Bank.”

Harry nodded. “Neither do I uncle. It is something that I would like to avoid if at all possible. Still, it is something to keep in mind should we get desperate.”

Ned hesitated before speaking. “Would the Iron Bank even loan us gold? The North has never been known for its wealth. They might doubt our ability to pay them back.”

Harry couldn’t help the snort that escaped him. “I wouldn’t worry about that uncle. It would be easy to get them to loan us gold and it shouldn’t be a problem to pay them back either. Braavos is a coastal city that is well known for their shipbuilding. Despite that, there are hardly any trees near the city itself. They have to buy a lot of their wood. We could probably get away with selling them wood at a decent discount for a number of years until the loan is paid back that way. I doubt the Iron Bank would refuse.”

Ned looked towards the Maester. “Luwin?”

The Maester who had been watching Harry with an impressed expression answered the implied question. “It is well known that Braavos has a hunger for wood that is never truly sated. I agree with Lord Hadrian that the Iron Bank will probably agree to loan House Stark gold without issue and there is a decent chance they might be agreeable to a being repaid in wood. “

Ned visibly relaxed in his seat. “Good. That’s good.” He muttered.

Harry wanted to feel insulted that his uncle had so little faith in him but he could find it in himself to be so. He knew Ned was just worried and couldn’t deny his worry was justified when they were burning through gold at such a pace. He was just happy that some of the stress on his uncle had lessened. He knew Ned hadn’t had a pleasant few moons since returning from the war. What with the tension between him and Catelyn and the tensions with the Riverlands. He wanted to speak about that some but he wasn’t finished with the previous topic yet.

So he continued speaking. “Loaning money from the Iron Bank is the last thing I want to do though either way. Not only is it a bad look for House Stark but I would rather not be at the mercy of any foreign powers. So that is something that I would only consider if there absolutely no other options.” Not to mention it would mess with some of his other plans for the far future.

Namely opening a bank of his own. Not that something like that was likely to happen for at least a decade or two at the very least. If it happens at all. Harry so no reason to mention the possibility though. He knew it would just add more stress onto his uncles’ shoulders that wasn’t needed.

Ned nodded. “I understand and I agree. It should be the last option.”

The three of them sat in relative silence for a few moments. In which Hadrian let his uncle just relax for a minute before he decided they needed to continue.

Harry looked at the Maester. “Any news from the Riverlands? About how the Tullys are reacting to me cutting off our trade?”

Harry saw his uncle tense right back up at the question. He felt a moment of guilt for putting his uncle through this but squashed it as quickly as it came. He knew he probably over reacted to Edmure Tullys insults when he was in Winterfell but he had to punish the Tullys in some way for overreaching. Besides, this would be better for the North in the long run. He didn’t want his Kingdom to be dependent on another. This would just push his people to work even harder on increasing the number of farms and their food production.

Judging by the glance the Maester gave towards his uncle, he didn’t miss the reaction either. To his credit though, he was quick to answer without hesitation. “There hasn’t been any ravens from the Tullys my lord. So I can’t say how Hoster Tully is reacting to the news or if he even wants to reopen negotiations for trade.”

Harry sighed in slight disappointment. He was hoping that Hoster Tully might send a raven, either to threaten him or to try and repair ties. At least it would give him an idea of what to expect from them from now on. Unfortunately that wasn’t the case.

For a while after the feast that Edmure Tully crashed, Harry did consider sending one of his Huntsmen of Winter who skinchanged with a bird to spy on the fish lord so he could find out what Hoster Tully is up to. Unfortunately their numbers were still extremely limited and he already had them on other tasks that were just as important.

There were five of them located in Winterfell at the moment. One of them was the head of the organisation whose job it was to report to Harry and to keep track of all the others. Another one of them was tasked with training a new member of the organisation. Two of them were currently trying to locate all the spies that were in the castle and determine who each of them reported to.

There were another three members currently outside of the castle. One of which was watching Lord Karstark as he trained the army for any signs of disloyalty and to make sure he did a competent job, as the army was too important to risk. Another was sent to start investigating Skagos so that he could have as much information as possible before the war, while the last was searching the North for any more skinchangers that would be useful to add to their numbers. He would desperately like to keep an eye on others things as well but unfortunately he is forced to prioritise.

Luwin continued, taking out a letter. “There has been a raven from Lord Blackwood however.” Harry saw his uncle perk up before he saw the grim expression on Luwins face and settled into his usual mask of icy seriousness.

Luwin cringed. “There has been some tension from the Faith in the Riverlands and a few sects in the Vale. He states that some followers of the Faith have been killing those who worship the Old Gods that still exist in these areas. There have even been some signs of burnings that have happened. “

Eddard Stark looked grim. “Let me see that.” He commanded.

Luwin handed the letter to his uncle whose face looked more and more grim the longer he read it. After a while his shoulders slumped and he passed on the letter to Harry who wanted to hear from his uncle before doing anything. Ned composed himself after a few moments and spoke. “According to Lord Blackwood the Faith in the Riverlands has been growing more fanatical for a little over a year now. At first there were just a few murders of Old God worshippers, now there are dozens of murders every fortnight that have been getting more and more brutal.” His uncle sighed. “He believes it might be a resurgence in the Faith Militant. He wants me to write to the King and ask him to take care of the problem.”

Harry sighed and pinched the bridge of his nose. Harry has no hope that King Robert will be able to handle this problem. If this is truly a resurgence of the Faith Militant then he knows that things are probably going to escalate in short order. To the point of causing untold amounts of chaos in the South. It is not so easy to kill an ideal. After thinking for a few minutes he came to a number of conclusions.

In truth he doesn’t believe this is a bad thing for the North. Not completely anyway. He is obviously upset at the loss of innocent life but there isn’t really much he can do for those in the South. His power is meaningless there. There are advantages that can be found in this disaster for the North though. If it is the Faith Militant resurging then this will probably keep most Nobles in the South occupied for quite some time, allowing him to move with much greater freedom. It also means that the South might become drastically weakened in the next few years. Another advantage is that many Old God worshippers might look to flee North, providing him with greater amounts of manpower that he desperately needs. It also provides the North with something to rally against. Meaning it will be easier to command some of the more stubborn nobles.

That’s not to say there won’t be challenges however. He will have to keep an eye on the Nobles in the North who are devoted to the Seven, such as Lord Whitehill. He will send one of his Huntsmen who are in Winterfell to keep an eye on that Lord, just in case. Another issue is that he is supposed to bring the Giants and the Children of the Forest South of The Wall soon. This will probably create even more members for the Faith Militant. Not that it will stop him. It is still something to keep in mind though.

Harry sighed and spoke to his uncle. “Gather two hundred men and send them to Moat Cailin. They are to prevent any Septas or Septons from coming into the North. The last thing we need is for them to spread their words in the North and create chaos. They are allowed to accept refugees, but each one must be thoroughly searched before they enter into the North. After that I want you to instruct Ser Rodrick to start training more men, there is a chance we may need them in the future.”

His uncle pursed his lips but nodded. Harry looked at Maester Luwin. “I want you to write ravens to all my banner men and inform them of the situation in the South so that they are prepared. Inform them they are also to be on the lookout for and Septas or Septons who may be preaching violence against Old God worshippers. They are to be executed. I also want you to write to them and inform them that I am forbidding the construction of anymore Septs in the North until we can be sure that the situation is resolved. Those practicing the Faith of the Seven are allowed to repair and maintain the Septs they currently have but are not allowed to build anymore. We don’t need this problem spreading to the North. Write to Lord Manderly and Lady Mormont to instruct them that all Septons or Septas who travel to White Harbour from the South are to be send back immediately. I don’t care if it is the High Septon himself. “

His uncle pursed his lips. “Does this not seem a little excessive? I’m sure Robert or Jon will be able to fix this before it becomes too much of a problem.”

Harry shook his head. “Something like this can spiral out of control very quickly. Robert is the Protector of the Faith and Jon Arryn isn’t ruthless enough to stop that from happening. Desperate men are the most likely to join the Faith Militant. The more chaos in the South the more desperate men there will be. It is important that we cut any attempts to spread such chaos in the North off at the knees.”

Ned sighed. “Very well.”

After thinking for a few more moments Harry spoke again. “No member of our family is to leave Winterfell without at least ten guards. We make for a tempting target for any members of the Faith Militant who will manage to sneak into the North. Other than that it is business as usual. I will still be going to White Harbour. Afterwards I will make a trip up to Last Hearth and then the Wall.”

With that Harry stood up and made his way out of his chambers. He was deep in thought as he thought of all the implications of a new Faith Militant. He went through dozens of plans and discarded just as many as he slowly walked through the halls followed closely by his guards. He passed the courtyard where Jon and Rob were learning their forms for the sword and where others were sparring. He knew the next few years were only going to get more difficult.

Harry stopped and just watched his cousins for a few minutes, enjoying the sight of their carefree smiles and their boundless optimism. He only hoped that he would be able to protect those smiles in the years to come.

After a while he carried on walking, his legs taking him towards the Godswood.

He didn’t hesitate to enter once he found the gate. His guards stopping to protect the entrance. Harry walked through the natural beauty of the Godswood followed only by his dog Padfoot.

He immediately dropped onto his knees once he reached the Heartree and extended his hand towards the bark while closing his eyes and stretching out his mind. In moments he found himself in the Green. He flew though the different paths and branches at an incredible speed compared to when he first started practicing Greenseeing. It was only a few short moments before he found himself standing in a familiar looking cave covered in roots where he waited.

He didn’t have to wait very long before a small figure approached out of one of the tunnels connecting to the chamber.

Harry took a deep breath before looking down into the eyes of the Child of the Forest. “Leaf.” He greeted. “We need to talk.”

I sincerely apologise for the late chapter everyone. There really no excuse to make up for it. All I can say was it has been a hectic month at work because of all the time I missed beforehand due to my illness. I had no energy or time to work on this story. I am all caught up now so I can devote more time to writing.

For my Patreons, I am incredibly sorry. I am going to be doing my best to release a chapter every day or every second day for the next two weeks on my Patreon to make up for some of the time I have missed. I have already got most of the next chapter done, it just needs to be edited.

To read ahead: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

Designing an Army

Designing an Army.

Winterfell-289 AC

Sitting on the back of his carriage on soft blankets and eating a fine course of crab cooked in garlic and butter washed down with a cup of fine Arbour Gold, Wyman Manderly eagerly counted down the hours until he arrived at Winterfell.

He had always considered himself a practical man. He would try and use every resource he could for the benefit of his House and White Harbour. He invested heavily in trade and in building up a network of merchants to keep him informed of the greater happenings in the world. He was always careful with any investments and while he and his family lived lavishly compared to most Northern Lords, he knew the value of gold and made sure his family knew it as well. As a result, White Harbour flourished under his rule.

Still, growth had always been slow for White Harbour and for the North as a whole. It didn’t help that most Lords in Westeros, especially the North, look down on trading as something only merchants and smallfolk should involve themselves in. They didn’t see how trading could be used to make their lands and people flourish. How it could be used to develop the lands to make them stronger.

Wyman never blamed any of the Northern Lords for this of course. None of them had the fortune of ruling over a city. None of them had the advantage to easily trade like White Harbour does. None of them really even had the ability be very successful in trade, even if they dedicated themselves to it. They either lacked any goods that could be a constant source of gold or they had no way to safely transport their goods over the North, due to either a lack of gold, roads or just banditry. Most Northern Lords didn’t have gold that they could waste, so most would never even think of risking their gold on trading ventures that may not succeed.

So no, Wyman never blamed any of the Northern Lords for not seeing things the way he does. How could he, when he knows how difficult and risky trading like he does can be for them? Still, it was always a slight disappointment that the North was seemingly destined to always lag far behind the South in wealth, due to nothing besides location.

Then Hadrian Stark came along.

Wyman Manderly was good friends with Richard Stark. He would even go as far as to say he was one of a handful of very fortunate lords in the North, who truly got to know the late Stark behind his lordly mask. He got to know all about Richard Starks plans to strengthen the North. Plans that mostly relied on Southern alliances to increase the Norths trade and food security. Those alliances would also give the North extra protection from Aerys madness should it ever turn their way.

While Wyman was not very happy about Richard trying to make the Starks and the North as a whole more involved with Southern politics, he never tried to argue against it either. Not when he believed as Richard Stark did, that something must be done to increase the Norths power. As after almost three centuries of Targaryen rule, the North was in the weakest state it had ever been in. Lacking any better ideas to increase the Norths power, he threw himself into supporting his liege lord.

Now, years later, he can’t help but look back on that time with regret. Perhaps if he argued against Richards decision, many would still be alive. Or perhaps the Targaryens would have done something even worse if the North lacked the power and alliances to fight back. He just didn’t know.

When Rhaegar was defeated and they all thought the war was over, Wyman thought that the North would finally get its due. He thought that they finally had a chance to have a say in the politics of Westeros. That they would be given opportunities to grow stronger from the new king that they had put on the throne. While he never liked Robert Baratheon for his whoremongering ways and how he spit all over the reputation of Lyanna when he continued to sleep with anything that moved during the war, he held his tongue. He hoped that justice might finally rule over The Seven Kingdoms.

He lost that hope upon witnessing the horrors that took place in Kings Landing. While Wyman never liked the Targaryens, it didn’t mean he supported the senseless slaughter of the children and Elia Martell. Honestly, Wyman found the whole affair revolting. The butchery of a city was a terrible start for a new dynasty. The fact that Robert was so proud of the butchery of a mother and her two children, was just as bad in the eyes of many lords.

He developed a great distaste for Southern politics after witnessing how Lannister was rewarded for such atrocious actions. He developed a great dislike of Robert Baratheon throughout the war that only grew once he was officially crowned King.

Wyman expected to go back North after the Rebellion, where he expected the North would continue to remain isolated from the rest of Westeros. The difference was that he was happy with that outcome now. As far as he was concerned, the less the North had to do with Southern politics the better. He was just disappointed that the North would continue to decline.

Then Hadrian Stark started single handily improving the North. Not through Southern Alliances but by strengthening the North itself through innovation and trade.

These days Wyman was hopeful. The North was already the strongest it had been in a few centuries and he had no doubt that Hadrian was just getting started.

As the carriage came to a stop in the courtyard of Winterfell, some attendants ran around the side to help Wyman climb onto the ground. It was a struggle of a few moments before Wyman was standing comfortably on his own feet, watching as Benjen Stark eagerly greeted his family.

Wyman waited patiently for the family to greet each other while he met eyes with his son Wylis for the first time since before the Greyjoy Rebellion began. When Wylis smiled at him he couldn’t help but let out a slight breath of relief. He knew that his son was unharmed during the war but sometimes things need to be seen with your own eyes.  After gesturing to Wylis that they would speak later, he started approaching to give his own greetings.

Hadrian Stark was the first to tear his attention away from Benjen and notice him. Wyman instantly started to drop to his knee with a greeting of “Lord Stark.” He never managed to make it even halfway down before Hadrian gestured for him to keep standing. So with only the slightest struggle, Wyman straightened his legs.

“I trust the journey was smooth my lord?” Hadrian greeted with a smile.

Wyman laughed boisterously. “As smooth as can be expected Lord Stark. It will be nice to sleep in proper chambers on a proper bed again, I’m afraid that my body is not so fond of long trips as it used to be.”

Hadrian laughed. “I can understand the sentiment, I found myself missing my bed too when I was as Sea-Dragon Point. “ Hadrian turned and gestured to a number of servants who quickly came running. “Some servants will escort all your belongings to your chambers my lord while another has already been sent to the kitchen to get you and your Household refreshments. “

Wyman bowed his head. “Thank you my lord.”

Hadrian just nodded. “There will be a small feast tonight and the lords will be gathering into a council tomorrow to make decisions regarding the future of the North. For now, you are free to relax from your journey. “

After a small pause Hadrian continued. “I have a few things I have to get ready for tomorrow’s meeting. I hope you can forgive me….”

Wyman instantly nodded. “Of course. I have no doubt it is very important. Please, don’t let me keep you Lord Stark.” Wyman truly didn’t mind. He had no doubt that Hadrian Stark was working on something important that would benefit The North. The boy had done more for the North in his few short years than the last ten generations of Starks. If anything, Wyman was excited to see what Hadrian had planned.

As Hadrian walked away, Eddard Stark who had come up besides his nephew, took over from there. “It’s good to see you Wyman-“

The next afternoon found Wyman sitting beside his son in the Great Hall of Winterfell. Instead of the normal arrangement of tables they were arranged into a semi-circle, so that each of the lords could see each other, with a separate table at the front for the sole use of the Starks.

Wyman was one of the first Lords to make it to the meeting. He and his son took the opportunity to whisper about one of the big things that happened in Winterfell,  that Wyman only learned about on his arrival.

The topic being Lord Edmure Tully.

According to Wylis, no lord had spoken out against Hadrian Starks decision to quit all trade with Riverrun. Most lords seemed to agree with Hadrians decision even. While Wyman won’t say that he is very happy about having one of the Norths largest and most reliable trade partners being suddenly cut off from Northern trade, as a decision like that will affect the Norths incomes and expenses in all sorts of negative ways, he can’t say he was very upset with the situation either. Tully had clearly overstepped and needed to be punished. In truth, he was even happy that Hadrian affectively ended the Tullys influence in the North. All Northern Lords are proud, even Wyman. The less influence the South has over the North the happier he would be.

He and Wylis spent a few minutes gossiping about the issue. Talking about some of the consequences of Hadrians decision and about how House Tully might react. They arrived at the conclusion that besides petitioning the King, there was not much Tully could do about Hadrians decision.

Once the hall started to fill up a bit more, they moved onto more lighthearted topics. Like how Benjen Starks education was going or about some of the more amusing things Wylis’s daughters got up to in his absence. Before Wyman knew it, everyone had arrived and the meeting was beginning.

The meeting started when Hadrian Stark stood up from his seat and addressed the lords. “First I would like to thank all of you for coming. Today we are about to make history my lords. In a century, when our descendants look at the North and its power, they will know that much of that power came from the decisions we made here today. They will learn that this is when the future of the North began to change for the better. Today is the day we redesign our kingdoms security and protection into something that will make us stronger than any other Kingdom in time. “

Hadrian took a pause amidst the sound of cheering. Wyman himself just clapped politely while trying to hang onto every word that was said. After a few moments Hadrian continued. “We have a number of topics that need to be discussed my lords, but the important one for now, is the formation of a proper Northern Army. I want this army to be the most powerful army ever seen. To accomplish that, I will need the Lords of the North to give their best ideas.”

Hadrian took another break to let the lords process that before continuing. “For now, I want to build up an army of five thousand men. This will not include the cavalry or the Navy, who will have to undergo different training methods and will be a different discussion. I want the army to not only very well equipped but to also make sure that each of the soldiers are extremely well trained. Once those numbers are filled to satisfaction and the army is stable, the size of the army can be expanded.”

He took another moment to look out at the lords before continuing. “I leave the floor open.”

With that, Hadrian sat down. It was quiet for several long moments as each of the lords just looked at each other, trying to determine who would go first.

After a few moments Wyman decided to go first. So with a small clearing of his throat he spoke. “If there will only be five thousand soldiers at the start, then there will not be enough men to protect the entire North, at all times. The  army will need to be positioned in the correct place. So that it can quickly and effectively march anywhere in the North. I would suggest that the army training grounds and fortress be placed at the base of the mountains to the North of Winterfell.” He looked around the hall to see some lords nodding along while others looked less convinced. When Wyman looked at Hadrian, he thought he saw a flash of victory in his eyes.

He decided to think about that in a minute, for now he continued to explain. “It is a very defensible location near the centre of the North. Therefore the army can march to any point in the North without having to cross the entire kingdom. Most importantly, it is a location close to Winterfell. Which I am sure all the lords would agree is the beating heart of the North and the place that needs to be the best protected. “

All the lords were nodding along to his words with muttered ayes. Even Lord Umber, who Wyman knows would prefer the army be stationed near The Wall for protection from wildlings and Lord Glover, who would prefer the army be near his lands to protect it from Ironborn raids.

Hadrian spoke. “Does anyone have any other ideas for the location?”

The hall remained quiet. After a few seconds Hadrian continued. “It’s decided then, the army training grounds and first fortress will be built in the Mountains just North of Winterfell. We can come up with a name for the fortress at a later time.”

Hadrian took a breath before gesturing to the lords to give more ideas. Lord Karstark was quick to raise his voice. “There’s five thousand men. Even if they rest their swords in the mountains North of Winterfell, there’s more than enough men to do constant patrols across the North for bandits, Ironborn or Wildlings. We need to figure out how the men will be divided for these patrols and who will lead these groups of soldiers. We need to figure out what type of soldiers they will be. Will these groups be made up of archers, swordsmen or spearmen? We need to discuss who will be in charge of running the army.”

Mutters started going up through the hall again before the Greatjon stood up and bellowed. “The Stark of Winterfell is in charge of the army! They are the only ones who I would trust with command of such a powerful force!”

Maege Mormont was quick to agree. “Aye! The army will stay under control of House Stark! We won’t trust another with that type of power.”

Lord Karstark was looking a bit flustered now. He opened his mouth to speak but was interrupted by Hadrian. “Peace! Peace my lords. I’m sure Lord Karstark would agree that the army needs to stay under the control of House Stark, lest there is a major imbalance of power in the North. But Lord Karstark is also right in a way. I am incredibly busy with my duties and don’t have the time to oversee the army every day if there is no war. A general or several generals will have to be chosen to oversee the daily operations of the army. They will have to have their powers restricted, so that they can’t order any military operations without the permission of the Stark of Winterfell except for in times when independent action is required or when organising patrols for bandits, wildings and Ironborn. That way they will be restricted from encroaching on another Lords authority.”

He paused with a nod to Lord Karstark who was looking significantly calmer now that it seemed Hadrian was agreeing with him. Hadrian took a breath before continuing. “Fortunately this is one problem that I have spent a lot of nights thinking of solutions for. I have come up with different ranks and different groupings for the soldiers. Each group of five thousand troops will be known as a Legion. Each Legion will have a single General overlooking them in peacetime and wartime. This general will report directly to House Stark and will take orders only from The Stark of Winterfell. Each Legion will be divided into ten groups known as Cohorts, made of five hundred men each. Each of them will have a leader known as a Major who will report to the General. These Cohorts will be divided again into Centuries of one hundred men lead by a Centurion who will report to their Major. Each Century will be split into groups of ten called Units. Lead by an Officer who will report to their Centurion. “

Hadrian took a moment to make sure all the Lords understood what he was saying. At the same time there were scribes moving about the hall placing parchment in front of the Lords with Hadrians ideas for the composition of the army written on it. It seems Hadrian already knew what he wanted out of the army. Wyman was starting to suspect the only reason the Lords were included in this discussion was so that none of them felt insulted and so that none of them could complain about the formation of the army if they were involved in its creation.

After all the parchment was handed out and Hadrian could see the Lords were examining it he continued. “Each Unit will have one builder whose job it will be to make siege equipment or to make defensive fortifications and one healer who will be in charge of keeping the men alive. The builder and healer will also be trained in arms, same as the rest of the soldiers. Each Unit will train together, eat together and fight together. Unity and discipline will be encouraged and enforced. It is my hope that each of these soldiers will fight all the harder if they know the men or women next to them.”

Wyman could see most Lords were making noises of agreement as they looked through the parchment in front of them. Wyman himself was very impressed with what he has read so far.

Before any of the Lords spoke Hadrian continued. “If you have noticed, there are a few different levels of command that the soldiers can rise through. I am saying this now so that no one acts surprised later. Promotion in the army will be based on merits. On how well the soldiers perform and how well they can perform their roles. I will not have men or woman who have no idea what they are doing command the army just because their father is an important Lord.”

There was significantly more grumbling from the Lords at this proclamation. Although none of them dared say anything directly to Hadrian about his decision, because it was a smart choice all things considered. Nobody wanted the army to be destroyed because a Lord was chasing glory instead of commanding properly

Hadrian continued before the Lords got any louder. “It is still important that Lords and Ladies of the North are in positions of command though. I just want to make sure that those that do have positions of power in the army are competent at their jobs. After much thinking, I have come up with an idea that I would like to propose to you all. “

After making sure he had everyone’s attention, Hadrian continued. “I would like to make a Military Academy just outside of Winterfell for the children of Lords or Ladies who are interested in having leadership positions in the army. It is my idea to gather the most skilled soldiers and commanders in the world, to come and teach what they know to the future leaders of the Northern Army.  From there, if they prove themselves, then sons and daughters of Lords will be given command over a Unit or a Cohort. Whoever proves themselves the most skilled and loyal over time will be most likely to be given command over a full legion as a General. It is my hope that this will lead to unity between the different Houses in the North and that it will lead to the North having the most skilled commanders in the world.”

When he looked out across the hall, Wyman saw most lords were unsure of the idea even if they could clearly see the benefits. Hadrian must have seen it too because he continued. “My cousins will be joining this academy when they turn ten name-days. The training will last for six years with three moons off once a year for the children to see their families. Lords are of course allowed to visit or write whenever they wish.  I would join this Academy myself, but I’m afraid I will not have the time to train for all those years because of my other duties to The North. Instead as the Stark of Winterfell, I will listen seriously to any advice that the General of the Army has in military matters before making any final decisions involving military action. Lords will not be forced to send their children to this academy. Their children will just not be given any power in the Northern Army if they don’t. ”

In the silence, Wyman looked over the Lords of the North again. Most of them were nodding along and agreeing to Hadrians words. Once Hadrian stated that his cousins would be going for this training, even the Lords who might not like the idea lost their ability to complain. After all, if the Starks were going to be held to these standards then it is only right the rest of them should be too.

“I understand this is a large decision my lords. Why don’t we leave this part of the discussion for later so that everybody has a chance to think about what I said? We will vote on whether or not the idea is good later.“ Wyman had no doubt that almost every Lord would vote in favour of what Hadrian proposed. None of the Lords wanted to get on Hadrians bad side and risk missing out on future opportunities for their Houses. It helped that Hadrians proposal was a genuinely good idea that could see the North bound more closely than any Kingdom before it.

After a moment of silence Lord Glover stood up. “I understand raising the next generation of Lords to be competent commanders My Lord and I agree. Having competent commanders is even more important than having well trained soldiers. The issue is, it will take years to train the leaders. We will need some commanders now.” With that, Lord Glover sat down.

Hadrian just nodded calmly. “Aye, you are correct. We do need competent commanders who will work to make this army a reality. A lot of Lords are already not viable for these positions at the moment, purely due to the fact they have other duties on their lands which are just as important. Some may be located on the West coast and will have a duty to develop their lands and defences to the best of their ability over the next few years. I will not have these lords being distracted. Having a properly developed West coast will not only bring in some much needed trade to the North that will help finance this army, it will also act as a deterrent for any Ironborn.”

Lord Glover didn’t look particularly happy to be told that he will not have a position of command but he nodded his head in understanding. Wyman agreed with Hadrian in this instance. It was important for Lords with less developed lands to take advantage of the growth in the Northern economy. Distracting them with other duties would slow or stop most progress on their lands, hurting the North.

Hadrians voice brought Wyman out of his thoughts. “It is the same story for the Lords who have gotten new lands from The Gift. It is incredibly important that those Lands are developed so the North can produce more food. I will not have these Lords distracted and progress slowed.”

Wyman saw the Greatjon grumble under his breath and down a goblet of wine.

Hadrian continued. “I have thought a lot about who would be the best candidate for General my lords. At first I thought about making my uncle Ned General, but I decided he has other duties that are just as important. After a lot of thinking, I decided that the best candidate was Lord Karstark. “

Rickard Karstark had a dumbfounded look on his face for a few moments before he started smiling widely. Unfortunately the other Lords weren’t so happy with not being chosen and the hall started getting progressively louder.

After the noise went on for a few seconds longer with no sign of stopping, Hadrian raised his voice. “Silence!’

The hall quietened instantly. None of the Lords had ever heard Hadrian raise his voice. The surprise was enough to stun them. “Now if you will allow me to explain my choice?”

When nobody spoke, Hadrian continued. “Lord Karstark has a son that is almost a man grown and ready to take on his duties. He is an experienced commander who has served House Stark and the North faithfully for years. Most other Lords will be incredibly busy in the next few years developing their lands. Our first military campaign, to bloody our soldiers, has also already been decided and Lord Karstark is uniquely motivated to make sure that campaign is a success.”

Lord Umber spoke. “Who are we fighting?”

Hadrian had a deadly serious look on his face. “Skagos.”

The hall broke out into mutters but Hadrian raised his hand and stopped them almost immediately. “I summoned the Lords of Skagos to this meeting as well. They chose to ignore me. It has become increasingly obvious that Skagos does not respect House Starks authority despite being officially part of The North. I will not have it. Skagos is where the army will cut its teeth.”

Lord Karstark had a positively bloodthirsty grin on his face. Not that Wyman could blame him. The Skagosi had been raiding his lands for centuries.

Hadrian continued. “Now does anyone disagree with Lord Karstark as a choice?”

When all the Lords stayed quite Hadrian continued. “Now we need to discuss the type of training the soldiers will go through. I have being doing a lot of research on the Ancient Ghiscari Empire and I believe…..”

I am so so so sorry for such a late chapter. I went on a trip a few weeks ago in South Africa and caught swine flu. I was seriously sick and had absolutely no motivation to write. Last week I thought I was better but then ended up having relapse and got sick again, luckily not as badly this time. I am fine now and am determined to make up for all the time that I have missed. I want to apologise to everyone again, I feel terrible about messing up my schedule so badly. I will be writing a lot this week to make up for all the time I’ve missed and will be releasing two chapters a week for the next few weeks to make up for lost time.

Criticism is welcome as long as it’s constructive.

Next chapter Friday 30 June 2023

To read ahead of the update schedule: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

An Uninvited Guest

An Uninvited Guest

Winterfell 289- AC

The great hall of Winterfell was an incredibly cheerful place this evening. Filled with the sounds of laughter, cheering, drunken boasts and revelry from the Northern Lords. Everywhere Ned Stark looked, he saw smiles on the faces of all the lords and ladies of the North in attendance of this feast.

This was Neds first day back in Winterfell. Himself and the rest of the Northern Lords had only just arrived around midday to loud fanfare and cheerful greetings from the towns folk. After greeting his family in the courtyard Ned immediately went to his chambers to spend a bit of quiet time with Catelyn and enjoy relaxing for a while now that he was home.

He even had a nap that wasn’t invaded with dreams of war and death. Unfortunately his peace didn’t last for long after he woke.

First he was summoned to his nephews solar, Hadrian was understandably upset about his arranged marriage. Ned himself wasn’t very happy with the betrothal either, but when Robert came to him and practically demanded that Ned agree to marry Hadrian to his daughter, Ned had no choice but to agree.

He tried to turn Robert down, he really did. Unfortunately there was only so many ways he could do so without Robert taking offence. Arguments that he was only Hadrians regent did nothing, Robert waved them off and said his nephew would learn to love his daughter. Robert said he was King, Hadrian owed him his fealty and Myrcella would marry whoever he said she would.

Those weren’t easy arguments to dismiss. Not without causing a huge scandal and questions about The Norths loyalties.

The arguments that Myrcella was only a baby were similarly ignored. Robert just said the wedding would take place once she had flowered. In the end he had no choice but to relent and agree. He also promised Robert that he would make sure Hadrian agreed. To do otherwise would no doubt upset Robert a great deal and he was always unpredictable when upset. It would also risk upsetting Tywin Lannister a great deal, meaning the Lannisters would look for other ways to get their claws into the North now that they were growing in power.

Hadrian still wasn’t very happy with him in the end. Nevertheless he agreed to uphold the betrothal, which brought a great deal of weight off of Neds shoulders.

His nephew then started informing him of some of the things he had done since returning to Winterfell a moon ago. First he found out about Hadrians plans for an institution to rival the Citadel and his ultimatum to Maester Luwin. Ned wasn’t very happy to hear about that but he understood Hadrians reasons and in the end it worked out, with Luwin choosing Winterfell.

His biggest concern at the moment was their financial situation but he decided to raise the point another day. He was far more drained than he realised and their gold should last another two years minimum. That conversation could wait for another day.

Unfortunately the tenseness in the castle didn’t end there. His nephew and his wife got into an argument. To be honest with himself, Ned wasn’t really surprised by that. Hadrian and Catelyn had always had a frosty relationship. He knew it was only a matter of time before something set them both off.

The topic of their argument was equally unsurprising and something that had the potential to sour things between Ned and his Catelyn as well. He knew Hadrian would have a problem with his children being taught to worship The Faith by their mother, just as he knew Catelyn would insist on doing it anyways. He saw this issue coming but was lucky enough to put it off until now.

So he was forced to console his enraged wife on his first day back home from war.

Luckily he was able to delay speaking on the matter any further with Catelyn that day, due to having to go to the feast that was thrown in honour of himself and the rest of the Northern Lords who fought in the war. It was a relief that he was able to escape that conversation because as much as Catelyn may not like it, he agreed with his nephew. Ned would feel better if his children married in The North and he also acknowledged his nephew had a point about how the rest of the North would see it if his children were raised worshipping The Seven.

So here he sat. At the head table with his wife sitting on one side, in an easily recognisable bad mood, and his nephew sitting on the other, smiling and laughing with the lords like everything in the world is right. Something that only seemed to piss off Catelyn even more.

Ned shifted uncomfortably as he listened to Lord Umber boast about some of the Northerners participation in the Tourney of Lannisport. “-flew right onto his arse he did! Tywin Lannister looked like he was about to shit a bucket of gold at the sight of his golden heir rolling around in the dirt! Ha! Ha! To SerJorah Mormont! The man who showed those lions and the prissy Southron cunts what the North is made of!”

The sound of dozens of cups banging on the table echoed around the hall along with the cheers. “Ser Jorah!” As Ned watched, dozens of men and woman did their absolute best to drain their tankards.

This wasn’t anything new. Men and woman in the North knew life was short and so whenever the opportunity came up, they celebrated vigorously. Especially after a war. Lord Umber was guiltier of this than most. The man had already raised a dozen toasts this evening and didn’t seem to be slowing down at all.

The next few hours went on in the same way. Lords would boast about The Norths accomplishments in the war to cheers and congratulations from the others. After an hour or so his nephew gave another short speech about unity and the strength of The North and its people as he did before the war. Afterwards he dismissed everyone back to celebrating, stating a proper meeting will take place in three days to discuss the future of The North.

Ned found his mood improving as the night went on. It was hard not to get sucked in to the cheer and good mood, even with Catelyn looking even more displeased than at the start of the night. By the second hour of the feast, about an hour after the sun had set, Ned found himself forgetting about his troubles and just living in the moment. He was making his way around the hall, sitting by each Lord for a while to share some conversation. Catelyn was still sitting at the main table, not really interacting much with anyone besides Robb and Sansa. Hadrian was also still in his seat, seemingly content just to watch over the festivities with a small smile on his face, completely ignoring Catelyns existence.  Of course, that’s when things went wrong.

Ned was in the middle of a conversation with Wylis Manderly, who was representing his father at this feast as Wyman was teaching Benjen what he needed to know to run a city, about an amusing story Wylis had in Braavos when a guard entered the hall and rushed up to Hadrians personal guards.

Only fifteen  guards were allowed in close proximity of his nephew now, each of them was carefully vetted by Hadrian over the past moon to make sure that they had at least some skill and that they were young but they were loyal. Most of them had been born and raised in Wintertown before becoming guards or soldiers. None of them were elite swordsman but they were all good and were still young with time to learn.

Hadrian said that he would keep increasing their numbers until he was satisfied and he would make sure only the most skilled and loyal would get in. They were raised a rank above the other guards or soldiers, given more pay and a more benefits and respect. They also had much more intense training. Ned almost blanched when he saw the training regimen Hadrian made for them.

Miles of running and marching every day. Weight training for different muscles each day. Weapons training for four hours a day where they learn to fight with swords, daggers, spears, maces and hammers. Then another hour spent on archery practice after a long break. Each of them would get one day off from training a week to relax and another two days off from training to complete their duties in rotations. This would change once there were more of them and they were trained up to a good enough level but it was the best that could be done for now. Strict discipline will be constantly drilled into them as well as teamwork and loyalty. All to be overseen by Ser Rodrick, while another senior guard takes on the training of the regular guards. His nephew called them the Winter Guard. He wanted them to eventually be the best soldiers in The North, whose sole priority was the protection of House Stark and all its members.

Unfortunately the training regimen proved to be too much for most people selected. Hadrian had originally picked one hundred young men to be given the opportunity to be trained for this role when he came back to Winterfell over a moon ago. Eighty five of them quit already after the training became too much. Ned tried to tell Hadrian to make the training easier but his nephew seemed to see it as a good thing. He said that the intense training made sure that only those who were dedicated would be able to complete it and those are the people he wants. Ned found it hard disagree, as he usually did with Hadrian.

Ned had already had many conversations with Hadrian about his paranoia. Unfortunately his nephew was nothing if not stubborn and seemed to double down on his protections as a result. The rest of the family wasn’t spared either, he was told each of his children would be followed by at least three Winter Guards at all times once their numbers were high enough. Including Jon.

Ned wasn’t the only Lord in the hall to stop their conversations to stare as the guard whispered something to the Winter Guard, who then moved forth to whisper into Hadrians ear. Even with the great hall suddenly going very quiet, he was too far away to hear what was said but judging by the displeased expression on Hadrians face, he guessed it wasn’t anything good.

His nephew said a few words to the guard who then proceeded to swiftly exit the hall. After that Hadrian turned to the rest of the Lords and stood up from his seat to address them. “Apologies for interrupting your feast but I have just received word that…. a suprise guest has just arrived to Winterfell. Please continue the feast.“ With that Hadrian sat back down and threw an irritated glance at Catelyn who seemed pleased with herself for some reason.

The Lords immediately started muttering among themselves about who might be foolish enough to travel at this time of night in The North. Especially in the small snowstorm that was happening.

Ned was more focused on the pit he felt a pit form in his stomach. He hastily excused himself from his table and the Lords who were trying to ask him who arrived before he walked quickly over to the high table and his nephew.

Hadrian noticed him coming and gestured for him to take his seat with his head, so Ned walked around the table as swiftly and calmly as possible. When he sat, he saw Catelyn try to get his attention but he ignored her for now and turned to his nephew and spoke quietly. “What happened?”

Hadrian just closed his eyes and sighed before speaking. “You’re about to find out.”

Ned turned a wary gaze on to the door. He didn’t have to wait very long before he got the answer to his question.

The door to the great hall opened and a group of five men entered. Ned immediately recognised the man in the front. Wearing fancy black breeches and a bear skin cloak, Edmure Tully walked into the great hall of Winterfell shivering like a leaf and covered in a light layer of snow.

Neds eyes darted towards Catelyn, where he saw a large smile on her face.

The sinking feeling in his stomach increased further.

Neds attention was directed back to Edmure Tully when he saw the young man start walking over to the head table.

The heir of the Riverlands didn’t even glance at Hadrian as he gave Ned a greeting. “Lord Stark, it’s good to see you! Winterfell is a splendid castle and it is a great relief to get out of the cold. I don’t know how you Northerners handle it.” He laughed.

Ned didn’t even have a chance to react to Edmures words before he turned to Neds wife. “Cat!” He called and opened his arms wide as if receiving a hug.

“Edmure!” She replied, jumping to her feet and walking swiftly around the table where she met her brother in an embrace.

Some of the Lords started muttering angrily to themselves about Edmures actions, both in showing up to Winterfells victory feast without an invitation or notice and in greeting Ned and Catelyn first instead of the Lord of the castle as is expected. Nobody liked the disrespect and even Ned himself was having to supress his anger, lest he do something foolish. As it is, he found his eyes narrowing at the heir to the Riverlands. This statement said that Riverrun and consequently the Riverlands don’t respect his nephews authority, at least not yet, and that they see Eddard as the one in charge.

He didn’t know if Edmure and Catelyn believed that this would weaken his nephews hold on the North and increase his own and indirectly Catelyns power as a result. Maybe they thought the Northern Lords would look to Catelyn and him more if she reminded them that she has a strong influence in the Riverlands and the Vale through her sister? Maybe they thought some lords would see opportunity in pressuring his nephew in certain decisions in exchange for benefits from the Riverlands?  Or through subtle threats that they have the power to influence much of Northern trade?

Honestly it was like they knew nothing about The North.

The North didn’t care for subtle power plays and the Game of Thrones. If this was the Reach or another Kingdom and Hadrian was anyone else, this wouldn’t be seen as such a slight, or at least the other Lords wouldn’t care about such a slight very much due to Hadrians age. Not truly. Not to the extent The Northern Lords will.

This was the North though.

“You are looking as beautiful as ever sister!” Edmure exclaimed while holding Catelyn.

Ned saw his wife smile at her brother with a light blush. “Thank you Edmure. You always were a charmer. You have grown much since I last saw you. Much more handsome as well.”

“Thank you sister I –“ Ned stopped listening to their words as he watched the spectacle in front from of him in slight disbelief. Both of them were completely ignoring the Lord of the castle. It was extremely disrespectful and the angered muttering was only growing louder, the only reason none of the lords had jumped from their chairs to confront Edmure yet was that his nephew held up a hand to stop them. Somehow, Catelyn and Edmure seemed to be completely ignorant of the growing anger of those around them. Either that or they just didn’t care.

As Ned watched Lord Tully turned to his children, Robb and Sansa, whom he gave a smile and a joyous greeting. As the Fish Lords gaze travelled over Jon, his face scrunched up but at least he decided not to comment and simply moved on back to his conversation with Catelyn. Completely ignoring Hadrians existence.

Ned had no idea why they were doing what they were. Both of them should know how this would be perceived. There were some ways in which Lord Tully could apply some political pressure on his nephew in politics and this was not one of them. If this was supposed to be a display of power and dominance, in order to show the Riverlands recognize Neds power as regent and not Harrys power as a lord yet, then it was the most ill-conceived one Ned had ever heard of.

He glanced towards his nephew to see Hadrian sitting with a face carved from ice and a gaze that seemed completely devoid of emotions. He supressed a shiver. Sometimes it was terrifying how much discipline and control Hadrian had over his own emotions. He realised the sinking feeling he was having was dread. Hadrian had never been one to act well against purposeful slights. He would never tolerate one in his own hall from a foreign Lord Paramount.

Ned quickly turned back towards the fools in order to stop them from digging themselves any deeper. He knew that Hadrian was probably thinking of ways to punish House Tully for this already. He needed to stop this before it got any worse. “Lord Tully.” He called.

When the heir of the Riverlands turned to him, Ned wasted no time on pleasantries. “Why are you here?”

Edmure frowned slightly. “I am here to represent my father and the Riverlands in a few matters of diplomatic importance between our two kingdoms. With me are my companions Ser Patrick Mallister, Ser Marq Piper and Ser Lymond Goodbrook. “

Ned frowned severely. “Why did you not write to ask for this meeting? Or inform us you were coming?”

Edmure smiled. “But I did. My Maester sent a raven to my sister a fortnight after the Northern army crossed The Twins.”

Catelyn gasped and covered her mouth. “I forgot all about it in my excitement and relief once I heard you were safely back in the North. I’m sorry my love. “

He sighed. Whether or not that was true didn’t matter right now. What did matter right now was the blatant disrespect that they were showing to Hadrian. Ned knew this had the potential to become very bad if it continued. All Lords are proud people. The Northern Lords more than most. The Northern Lords were also very loyal. By disrespecting Hadrian in such a manner, in front of his lords, Edmure was deeply offending the Northern Lords. They had a great love for his nephew. As can be seen by the growl that seems to be escaping Lord Umbers throat. Edmure didn’t fail to notice it either if the way he tried to subtly move further away from Lord Umber was any indication. Hadrians reaction would also only get worse the longer this went on.

Just as he was about to open his mouth to put Eddard Tully in his place, Hadrian spoke. “What does House Tully have to discuss with House Stark?” Instantly all the Lords quietened.

Lord Tully turned and finally acknowledged his nephew for the first time. “That’s a manner best spoken of in private between the adults lad.”

Ned spoke quickly before things escalated dramatically. “My nephew is old enough to have a say in these decisions. If he wants to speak of this now, then we will.”

Edmure frowned slightly. “Very well. My father sent to me to speak to you about a few different topics Lord Stark. There were a few issues regarding trade that need to be gone over, but that is not the main reason I am here. “

Edmure took a breath and puffed his chest out slightly in pride. “Us Tullys care about family above all else. Making sure that close ties remain between members of our family is incredibly important to both my father and I. That is why we would like to take Sansa as a ward. The main reason for my presence was to discuss such a possibility with you. “

The murmuring broke out among the lords in the hall again. Ned could tell that none of the lords were particularly pleased about the idea of another Stark being fostered in the South.

Just as he was about to open his mouth to give Edmure a platitude that Sansa was too young, his nephews voice rang out across the hall. It wasn’t especially loud, but it quieted the hall immediately. “No.”

Edmure seemed to be confused. “I’m sorry?”

Hadrian seemed to have stopped paying Edmure Tully any attention. As he watched, Hadrian was focusing on cutting a piece of steak rather than the heir to the Riverlands. Hadrian left Edmure standing there in silence for an insulting amount of time as he chewed and swallowed his bite very slowly and calmly.  Ned could physically see Edmures face starting to redden.

Just as Ned thought Edmure might explode, Hadrian spoke again. ”I said no.” With that he plopped another piece of steak into his mouth.

Ned could see Edmures face go even redder before Catelyn stomped on his foot. Edmure then managed to take a few calming breaths before he spoke again. “I’m sorry lad but I’m afraid that isn’t really up to you.“

There was an immediate uproar.

“Fucking fish thinks he can-

“I’ll shove my sword –“

“Telling the Stark of Winterfell what he can and can’t do in his own cas-“

It seemed the fish lord finally started to understand he may have made a mistake as he hastily rushed to correct himself. “What I mean to say is that such a decision should be left to her parents. “

Hadrian put his knife and fork down with a clatter before he looked up to the Lord Tully. “She is a Stark, where she is raised will affect my reign as the Lord of Winterfell. Therefore when I say she won’t be fostered in Riverrun, it means she won’t be fostered in Riverrun.”

Catelyn ignored Hadrian completely. “Ned, it will mean the world to me if Sansa could grow up where I did. There will be so many opportunities for her in the South and my father would teach her much.“

Edmure spoke straight after her. “She will love it! She will make so many frien-“

Ned felt like things were only getting worse the longer this conversation went on. If it was up to Ned then this conversation would have taken place in private. Not in front of every Lord in the North. Ned didn’t know why Hadrian wanted to have it take place like this, but based on the malicious gleam in his nephews eye, it was not for anything good. Perhaps it was because he wanted an audience to whatever he was about to do?

Hadrian interrupted Edmures sentence with a warning. “Do not continue to push me or you will not like the results Tully. “

Ned thought he saw the slightest of smirks come across Edmures face. “I did not mean to upset you. But you are not in charge of Winterfell as of yet. At least not officially. Your uncle is. He and your aunt are older and wiser than you and it is their daughter, so this choice should rest with them.”

Hadrian sat back into his seat and folded his arms together. “Very well.”

Edmure smiled brightly. “I knew you would see- “

“Winterfell is cutting all trade with Riverrun from this moment on. “ Hadrian interrupted.

For a few seconds the hall was quiet. Honestly when Ned saw the look on the fools face when he heard what Hadrian said, Ned almost burst out laughing. The only reason he didn’t was because he almost burst into tears when he thought about the implications of this. The good news was that most Northern Lords would probably support his nephews decisions regarding Riverrun after these insults.

Before Edmure could speak Hadrian continued. “I don’t know who came up with this …childish scheme Lord Tully. Just looking at this degree of idiocy and incompetence makes me more sure than ever, that I would never send a member of my family to be fostered by you. They might turn out to be half as much of a moron as you are. I truly fear that prospect.“

Laughter broke out across the halls.

Edmure started spitting. “How dare you! You can’t speak to me like that! You can’t cut trad-“

Harry smiled. “I believe I just did. Now get the fuck out of my Kingdom.“ With that he gestured to the guards.

Edmure Tully was swearing the entire time he was dragged out.

This was a difficult chapter to write. I ended rewriting it three different times and I’m still not happy with it.

Criticism is welcome as long as it’s constructive.

Next chapter 12 June 2023

To read ahead of the update schedule: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

The College of Winterfell

The College of Winterfell

Winterfell-289AC

It had been a fortnight since Harry returned to Winterfell and it was only now that he was finally caught up with all that had happened during his absence. There wasn’t too much he had to catch up on luckily. So most of his time was spent with his cousins making up for lost time and he spent the rest of his time settling minor disputes, that were outside of Catelyns or Luwins ability or authority.

Some of these disputes were due to numerous criminals or Nights Watch deserters who took the news of war as opportunity. Lady Catelyn and Maester Luwin did not have the authority to execute anyone except in exceptional circumstances.

So twenty three people sat in the dungeons of Winterfell, some for moons, waiting until someone could get around to giving them a trial or an execution.  Harry got through those people in one day. He was still young enough that he wasn’t expected to execute the men himself. He still had to give the order and witness the executions though, which wasn’t present.

He also received a raven from his uncle Ned from Lannisport a week after his arrival. He just informed Harry that the tourney of Lannisport is finished and the Northern Army would be making their way back home.

Hadrian sent a raven back, telling him to call all the Lords to gather at Winterfell for the discussion about the formation of the Northern Army.

He spent significant more time speaking with various leaders of the Mountain Clans. Lord Liddle and Lord Wull had come had come to Winterfell in order to enquire about what the increases in food means for them and how they can best profit off of it. Normally Luwin would be more than able to explain the new farming practices and send a few farmers with them to their new land in the Gift, in order to get the farms started.

The problem was that no one in the Mountain Clans, least of all their lords, respected the Maesters authority or the authority of Catelyn. So they refused to listen to them and insisted on waiting for Hadrian or his uncle to return.

Harry couldn’t even find it in himself to be annoyed with either of the Lords. The Mountain Clans had long been some of House Starks fiercest and most loyal supporters. For the Mountain Clans, House Stark is the only House in the North or South that was worth listening to and was the only House they would ever consider as their overlords. When past Starks called them to war, they always answered eagerly and without reservation. They might not have been the strongest force or the most well equipped but they never delayed when House Stark called on them. They never required any kinds of threats or bribes to follow House Starks will. For the Mountain Clans, House Stark are still the Kings of the North and their word was law.

He could appreciate that loyalty.

That’s why he went the extra mile and gave them three dozen work horses that they could use either on their farms or to transport their food once it has grown and been harvested. He even organised a few trading caravans that would make their way to the farms to give them a bit of extra wealth. Harry couldn’t help but smile to himself when he saw how much they appreciated it.

Harry then spent another day in their company, going on a hunt. During which Harry managed to deeply impress them, by tracking down and killing the largest game. It was almost trivial to track the deer with skinchanging. He was lucky he was allowed to use a crossbow for the hunt though. Afterwards he threw a feast in their honour.

He invited both Lords to stay in Winterfell until the rest of the lords joined them for the discussion about the Northern Army. Luckily the lords were understanding that Harry had a lot of work to do, so they took no offence when he spent the rest of the time going over some of his plans for the development of Winterfell. Instead of spending it in their presence.

He wasn’t able to do much at the moment, but he designed a small building to act as a school. It wasn’t going to be anything special. He would build it out of stone for now as that would give it some permanence. The building was going to be two floors. The first floor was composed of two different classrooms large enough to fit at least fifteen students each and another room on the side for storage of equipment or parchment. There would also be a small kitchen and living quarters for a few guards to keep the peace and protect the place. The building would be built on the very outskirts of Wintertown a decent distance away from Winterfell or any nearby building. This would give plenty of space for expansion in the future.

The top floor would have various research stations and a small living space that would eventually be for the person who he puts in charge of overseeing the place. Ideally, Hadrian is hoping to come across an educated man who is interested in pursuing knowledge. He hopes to then hire them to run the administration of the school and to do some research for him in the future.

Hadrian has a lot of projects and ideas that can help the North. Advancements in metalworking and medicine, the creation of concrete or glass and improvements in shipbuilding was just beyond his reach, as while Harry has some basic knowledge about those subjects, he doesn’t know enough to advance The North in those areas. At least not without a significant amount of time spent of experiments that he needs to spend elsewhere.

Not everyone agreed with his decisions to make a school though. That’s what lead Harry to his current predicament.

He was sitting in his solar in Winterfell with Maester Luwin and Catelyn. Harry decided when he got back to Winterfell that Catelyn needed some serious help integrating in the North, so he started including her in more of his councils. To get a better idea of her mind-set so he could see about changing some of her more….difficult aspects. He hoped she would feel more welcome if she was occasionally invited into his council, hopefully making her start to consider the North her home more than the South. He didn’t really know how well it would work but he would try.

Unfortunately, Catelyn was educated to run a household and little else. She was also a very opinionated and stubborn about her opinions. To Harrys great frustration, both Luwin and Catelyn were united against him on his newest project.

Harry was massaging his temples with his eyes closed listening to the ongoing conversation. It wasn’t about anything he hasn’t thought of before. Both of them seemed unable or unwilling to help him come up with solutions to some of their budget problems, to help make the project easier on their coffers. Instead they seemed determined to change his mind.“….citadel will take this as an attack my lord, I don’t know how they would react.”

He opened his eyes to see Catelyn nodding along with Luwins words. “The Citadel holds a lot of power, lords all over Westeros listen to their words. We can’t afford to make enemies of them. House Stark is also already losing coin my lord. It will be a few short years before we are in debt at this stage. We must start saving coin my lord.”

Harry opens his eyes and stares at the Maester, choosing to ignore Catelyn for now. “I wish to collect knowledge in Winterfell. Part of the reason is so that the North is no longer reliant on a Southern institution, whom we have no control over, an institution located in the centre of the Faith of the Seven in Westeros. So I don’t really care if they react badly, it is something that has to be done. It will be much more difficult to gather the knowledge without their cooperation, but there are plenty of books out in the world, belonging to merchants or lords. I have no doubt that I can acquire a decent collection over time. The more important question is what will you do Maester? I have great respect and trust for you Luwin, but you need to decide where your loyalties lie first and foremost. To the Citadel or to House Stark?”

The Maester looks uncertain and when he opens his mouth to speak, Harry raises his hand and cuts him off. “I don’t want any of the secrets behind any discoveries or inventions created to be given back to the South. Not without my blessing. So I need to know whether or not you will keep anything you learn away from the Citadel. This is no easy decision Luwin, so you are excused to your chambers to think about your answer. If you choose House Stark you will be given the opportunity to help me start this new institution in the North. You will not run it, as I will still need your services in Winterfell, but you will help me with it. If you choose the Citadel, then you will be provided enough coin to live the remainder of your life in comfort as thanks for your dedicated service and sent on your way. What you choose to do from there is up to you.”

Catelyn spoke loudly. “You can’t just dismiss the Maester my lord. The Citadel will not take it well.”

Harry frowned annoyed. “That is exactly why I am doing this. I refuse to let the Citadel have power over me and the North.” He then looked back at Luwin, who was remaining quiet. “You are dismissed Luwin.”

The Maester got up to his feet and made his way out the door with a thoughtful frown on his face. Harry had already assigned someone to watch him and any letters he sends. His first Huntsman would use a bird to catch any ravens over the next few days. Trust, but verify.

When the door closed behind Luwin he looked at Catelyn to see her all but scowling at him. “That was incredibly foolish. We need a Maester. Who will help me give birth to my child?”

Harry looked at her blankly. “I have already sent a raven to Lord Manderly asking him to look for and send someone. He is also on the lookout for learned men and books. Other than that there is a midwife in Wintertown who has been helping woman give birth for thirty years. There are many options available.”

Her scowl becomes even deeper. “You would trust an old peasant woman to help deliver my child, your cousin?”

Harry kept his emotions carefully controlled lest he lash out. “A woman who has helped bring many more children into this world than Luwin has. She is very experienced and she will not be alone, there will be other learned men there as well. Lord Manderly won’t have a problem finding anyone. Besides, Luwin may decide to stay.”

Her face didn’t shift. “It was still an incredibly stupid thing to do. I will be having words with your uncle when he gets back. “

Harry had to control himself still so that he wouldn’t leap over the desk and smack the woman. “Who do you think you are?” It came out in almost a growl.

Harry saw her shift uncomfortably but continued on. “You are Catelyn Tully. A Lady of a House in the Riverlands, who was handed their power and are still barely holding on to it. A House that seems to have an inflated ego, if you are anything to go by. You come here expecting to rule yet never try to get to know our peoples customs, history or traditions. You never tried to adapt to the North. I was content to hold my tongue. To try get along with you for the sake of my family but I will not be talked down to by you. It is time to hammer some facts into your head. “

He could see her face twisting but continued on before she could speak. “House Stark has worshipped the Old Gods for thousands of years. For as long as we have ruled the North. We have fought off invasions from the Faith for thousands of years. As almost every House south of The Neck was beaten and converted, House Stark stood strong. Protecting our gods, our heritage and our traditions. House Stark is basically the Champion of the Old Gods at this stage. I will not have any member of House Stark be raised to worship The Seven. My ancestors would curse me if I did. So you will stop taking Sansa and Robb to pray to The Seven.”

She jumped to her feet. “They are my children! I should be able to raise them as I please!”

Harry just kept his face calm. “True, and for all your faults, you are a good mother. What you don’t understand is that I am doing this for them. If they worship The Seven they will never be truly accepted in the North. Especially because they are Starks. Your children will also never marry outside of the North if I can help it. I can protect them more easily if they are in the North. In the South, there is not much I can do if anything does happen.”

He could see her trembling with rage, but he had to give her credit, she kept her silence. “I do not do this to hurt you or harm your children, no matter what you may think. I’m doing this for them.”

He took a deep breath and released it along with some of his rage before continuing. Catelyn was almost purple in the face by that point. “Try and –“

“You can’t do this!” She screamed. “Ned will never agree-“

“I am Lord Stark!” Harry stood. “Ned may be my uncle and my regent, he may have my love and respect. But who his children marry affects House Stark and therefore the entirety of the North. I will not allow my uncle to marry my cousins to a House that would inevitably drag us into war, when the South inevitably goes to war again. They will stay in the North where they are safe, protected and can’t be used against us.”

He sat back down, ran a hand over his face and let out a sigh. He was about to try and stop the conversation, end it before it got any worse. Unfortunately Catelyn never gave him that chance.

“My father will hear about this!”

Harry couldn’t help it. He tried to stop himself, he really did. He pressed his lips together as firmly as he could. Unfortunately, he just couldn’t help himself. “Mmmp..mp…hp..ha..ha ha HA HA HA!!” He laughed in Catelyns face. She just reminded him too much of a certain ferret with that remark.

Judging by the offended look on her face and the way she was slowly reddening, she didn’t like the fact that he was laughing at her. It took a supreme effort of willpower, but eventually he managed to calm himself down. Eventually once his laughs trailed off Harry looked at the serious disposition on her face and calmed completely. “Your father has no power over me my lady. We will have this conversation again when my uncle gets back. Once we have both had time to calm down.”

She didn’t even bother to give a response before storming out of the room and slamming the door closed behind her.

Harry groaned and banged his head on his desk a few times while muttering to himself. “..stupid..fuc…”

After taking a bit of time to calm himself down, Harry sits up and admits to himself that both of those conversations could have gone better. He probably could have found better ways to go about discussing those topics with Catelyn and Luwin besides direct bluntness. He also probably shouldn’t have laughed in Catelyns face.

He shrugged. What’s done is done.

Hopefully they both actually thought on his words though. Hadrian really wants Luwin to choose to stay in Winterfell because he actually likes the Maester and he is a very useful man. Catelyn would make his families lives a lot easier if she just tried to adapt.

For now, Harry decides to focus on other matters. He decides to focus on doing what Catelyn and Luwin were originally supposed to be helping him with in the first place. Coming up with specifics of how the school will work and working out solutions to any problems there might be. It would be useful to have another point of view but he would just have to do it alone.

Even if Luwin stays in Winterfell, he would be too busy to coordinate and run the school full time. Harry would need to find someone who could do that for him. Someone who is smart enough to do some of his experiments for him. Someone who could lead the school and help Hadrian develop it into the centre of knowledge he hopes it will one day become.

As it stands, Harry was currently hoping to stumble across someone or have his uncle Benjen find someone on his voyage because a person like that was difficult to come by.

Another problem was actually making the place into the centre of knowledge in the world. A task much easier said than done. First he needed to gather knowledge and books at Winterfell. In order to attract those who might be interested in learning. Gathering so many books was a huge task, it would probably take decades or even centuries to gather enough books to rival the Citadel.

He has ideas that will no doubt give The North a large advantage over the Citadel. Such as creating a very basic printing press, to make the producing the books faster, cheaper and easier. From there, The North could sell off printed copies of the more common, less valuable, books in order to make some coin. Creating the printing press itself would be easy. All that Hadrian would do was modify a wine press, which already exists in this world. The far more difficult task was inventing the ink to make using such a press without smudging the page possible. As the normal ink used was simply too prone to smudging and running across the page.

Harry didn’t have the chemistry knowledge to even know where to begin on such a task. He didn’t have the time to try and figure something like this out either, as such a thing might take years to figure out for all he knows. So finding someone who could do this research for him was incredibly important.

The Alchemists Guild in Kings Landing would be perfect for such a task. Trying to move the guild North would create all sorts of issues though, as he is sure that some people in Kings Landing keep an eye on them. The King is known to have a distrust of them and might question why they went North. Anyone competent would notice they were missing, no matter how stealthily he managed to move them. Then when the Alchemists are inevitably found, he would have to answer some awkward questions and even greater scrutiny will be placed on the North in the best case scenario.

He would have to think on the matter more. Getting people who can work on those projects as soon as possible was incredibly important but he couldn’t cut any corners and have the risk of his new inventions being leaked South before he was ready. If one of the individuals are corrupt and accept a bribe from the South, releasing details and specifics of his inventions and how they were made, it would take a huge advantage away from the North and give more power to the South. Harry would need to be extra careful and have some trusted people keep watch over those who will be researching on his behalf.

For now, all he could do was keep an ear open and hope he hears of someone who would suit his needs. Perhaps once his spy network was more developed he could send some them out to look for suitable people? A question for another time.

Harry finished writing some notes before moving onto the next issue.

As much as he disliked admitting it, Catelyn and Luwin had a point when they said building the school would add a large strain on their coffers.

Winterfell was now losing money at a steady pace. The cost of all the projects Winterfell was paying for, was now well above what Winterfell was bringing in with taxes. It was a concerning prospect but wasn’t something that would have an immediate impact. Winterfell could afford to lose money at the current rate for another two or three years before they would truly be broke.

As more farms are set up and taxes increase and importing decreases, that number of years should stretch. The farms alone might be enough to bring Winterfells coffers back into the positive in half a decade if he is lucky. Unfortunately this means that House Stark has very little gold that could afford to be spent on any more projects at this time. Not without bringing House Stark to financial ruin.

Hadrian really hopes this trading voyage to Yi-Ti was going to be as successful as he thought it was. With any luck, it would bring a large amount of gold into House Starks coffers. Enough gold that he could continue developing The North without worry.

Harry knows that the school was incredibly important. The school would continue to shape and develop the North well after Harry is dead.

Unfortunately it is also probably one of the projects that would take many years to become successful. It would take constant investments of coin, time and resources. The larger the school grows the more it will cost to actually run it. There will be more teachers, more students, more guards, more books, classrooms and more experiments that cost more gold. He needed to start looking into alternate revenue streams for the North. The trading voyage will help his finances but he couldn’t rely on only one thing to keep the North afloat.

Hadrian sighed as he finally closed the books on House Starks accounts deciding to take a break. He then called a servant and ordered some lunch. Hopefully that would help him get rid of his oncoming headache.

Next chapter 2 June 2023.

As always criticism is welcome as long as it’s constructive.

To read ahead of the update schedule: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

Home Sweet Home

Home Sweet Home

Winterfell -289 AC

Harry smiled as he rode his horse through Wintertown. When the smallfolk first started to notice him, there were cheers and shouts from those few. By the time he was midway through the small town, most of the residents crowded around him shouting their greetings and praises. Harry was popular among the people of Wintertown before he went South and destroyed an Ironborn army.

“Welcome back Lord Stark!”

“You showed those squids not to mess with the North!”

“It’s good to have you back my Lord!”

Now they really seemed to love him. Harry just smiled and waved at them, happy to have to the love of his people. When he rode past a group of children he gave one of his guards a bag of copper coins to give them. The children were quick to scramble their way to the guard and wait to be given a few coins each.

He rode up to the main gate of Winterfell and through it without slowing at all. Sparing the guards at the gate, a nod and receiving enthusiastic greetings in return. He rode into the courtyard and saw his family waiting to greet him.

He got off his horse and handed the reins to a stable boy. While he was doing that, his guards were dismounting their own horses and were going to Ser Rodrick to report in after so long away.

Lady Catelyn was waiting at the front, standing with a regal and composed face as always. She kept her face blank upon spotting Hadrian. This didn’t surprise him. They had never been very close and their relationship only got further strained due to him sending the Septa away and allowing Jon all the same privileges as Robb.

What did surprise him though, was that she was pregnant. He could tell that she was pretty far into her pregnancy. Probably around seven or so moons. Hadrian hoped his uncle would be back in time for the birth. Harry made a promise to himself, to at least try and mend their relationship slightly. For all her faults, she was the mother of his cousins.

Next to her, holding her hand stood Robb. His cousin had grown since he last saw him, but as Harry spotted him shaking with barely suppressed excitement he realised he hasn’t changed at all in his time away.

Holding Catelyn’s other hand was Sansa. The little girl stood there shyly holding her mother’s hand, looking at all the people in the courtyard with childlike curiosity. Harry wasn’t sure if Sansa would remember him properly. She was still a young girl and Harry left when she was even younger.

He couldn’t see Jon, but Harry didn’t really expect to. Catelyn had never been able to let go of her dislike of him and Harry knew she would take whatever opportunities she could to take to teach him what she believes his place is. Harry never liked that fact but he had given up on trying to change her behaviour a long time ago and those times caused fights with his uncle. He managed to limit her actions towards Jon as nothing more than complaints and petty glares. Now that she has had the run of Winterfell for a while though, he would see what she did with her power and the freedom to use it.

As he approached the group Catelyn curtsied. “Lord Hadrian, welcome back to Winterfell.”

Robb broke from his mother’s grasp and rushed to hug him with a cry. “Harry!”

Harry braced himself and caught his cousin, laughing and giving the boy a tight hug back. “Ha Ha Ha. It’s good to see you too Robb.”

Then the boy started rambling. “Harry you’re back! You were gone for so long! What did you see? Where did you go? Did you bring me anything? Where’s uncle Benjen?”

“Robb.” Lady Stark spoke sternly but not unkindly. “Hadrian just arrived home. Give him a chance to settle and rest before speaking of his journey.”

Robb pouted. “Yes mother. “

Harry just laughed and ruffled his hair before moving on to Sansa. He crouched to come closer to her level and gave her a smile. “Hello Sansa. You’ve gotten big since I last saw you.”

She looked at her mother, receiving a nod, before she looked back at Harry and smiled softly. “Hewwo.”

He gave her head a few small pats before he stood up and spoke to the courtyard. “Thank you all for the heartfelt greetings. It is appreciated.” He said with a smile. “Alas, the journey has been long and I have missed my bed. I will be retiring early tonight to rest.“

Then he turned and addressed his family. “Come lets go speak in my solar.”

Then he addressed Maester Luwin who was standing a little way behind Catelyn. “Maester Luwin, I will summon you to my solar later to inform me of all that has been happening in the South. “

“Of course, my lord.“ Luwin bowed.

Harry told a servant to bring some food and drinks to his solar and to inform Jon to meet him there before he started walking followed closely by his family.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Harry sat behind his desk in the main solar of Winterfell, listening with a faint smile as his cousin Robb rambled on about what he and Jon did in the time that he has been away. “- and then Jon and I ran away before he could see us. “ He said with a big smile before pouting. “Mother found out though. She punished us. “

Lady Catelyn gave her son a look. “You know it’s wrong to put horse dung in peoples shoes Robb. “

Harry smiled as Robb looked at his lap and muttered to himself. “But he was mean.”

Sansa didn’t really understand the conversation, but she laughed brightly at the look on Robbs face from her place on Catelyn’s lap.

Jon himself was sitting on Robbs other side, so that Robb was between him and Lady Catelyn. He was being quiet which wasn’t a surprise with the presence of Catelyn, but anyone could see the small smile he had on his face as he listened to the rest of them speak.

They had been sitting together for well over an hour already. At first, the solar was filled with endless questions from the boys about the war. About the battles he fought and how he won them. Harry told the boys some details of his encounters with the Ironborn. Giving them only the general facts about where he fought them and how and why he beat them as easily as he did. He tried to turn his story into more of a lesson for the boys. Trying to teach them the strategies he used while leaving out the more….brutal details. He doubted the boys would really learn anything he was trying to teach them though, they were too young. That didn’t mean Harry wouldn’t take whatever opportunities he could, to impart what he believed were important lessons on to them.

The next portion of their talk was about all the places he had been to. Harry spent a good amount of time describing Moat Cailin, Greywater Watch, Sea Dragon Point and Bear Island to the boys. He spoke about what he did at those places, leaving any details that might involve magic out of his telling. He would wait until they were older to let them in on that secret.

Then Harry told them about Benjen. He informed them of his betrothal to Dacey Mormont, how his castle was coming along and about where he was now. When the two boys learned that Benjen would be sailing a great distance and seeing much of the world they were in awe. Lady Catelyn had a sour look on her face when they spoke of Sea Dragon Point and Benjens castle though. He guessed she was upset about Benjen getting Sea Dragon Point, when in her mind it should go to Ned. Or to one of her children. She never said anything though, so Harry was content to let it be for now. Hopefully when his uncle Ned got back, he would explain things to her in a way that helps her let go of her bitterness about the situation.

The rest of their time was taken up by Robb. He seemed determined to inform Harry about everything and what everyone in Winterfell had been doing in his absence. He was still a young boy though. He told story after story about the last few moons. Going on countless tangents, mispronouncing words and losing his place more than once. Harry just sat and listened with a smile on his face, happy to be home.

Harry smiled at the prank Robb pulled on one of the guards. While Lady Catelyn seemed determined to wipe all mischievousness out of her son, Harry couldn’t help but encourage a little. After all, he was the son of a Marauder in his last life. “As long as you had a good reason.” He said with a smile.

Robb perked up from where he was sulking into his lap. His mood instantly turning around. “Yeah, he called Jon a bastard and was mean to him.”

Catelyns mouth was a thin line. “He is a bastard Robb. You cannot do such things. It is inappropriate for a son of a noble House. People talk Robb. You will look immature to the rest of the North. ”

Robb looked down. “Okay.”

Harry could see that Jon was even more upset. He just stared at his lap sullenly.

Harry wanted to scream at the woman. He was still a child, he was supposed to be immature. He wanted to tell the woman to let Robb have his fun before he grows up and is forced to take responsibility and lead. Jon was a child, she didn’t have to constantly put him down.

Instead he took a deep breath. Robb was her son and as much as Harry may love him, he has little right to tell Catelyn how to raise him. Especially as she is by all means, a good mother. She may have many flaws, but she loves her children above all else and that was something Harry respected about her. That didn’t mean he would do nothing in regards to Jon though.

After calming down he decided to ask Robb a question. “Which guard was this Robb?”

Robb shrugged. “He was by the gate.” Then he looked at me. “Will you punish him?”

Catelyn interjected. “That might not be wise my lord. He didn’t really do anything wrong and got humiliated. The other guards might not like it.”

Harry stared at the woman. If she was going to try and manipulate him, she needed better arguments than that. The guards are loyal to House Stark, he doubts most would give a damn about a new guard getting punished. It might cause some resentment from the guard in question but Harry really didn’t care about that. If the man was going around disrespecting his family then he didn’t want him as a guard in the first place.

Harry took a moment to think about how to put his thoughts into words without causing an argument.  “It doesn’t matter if Jon is a bastard. He has Stark blood in his veins and that is what matters in the North.” He said giving her a level look. It wasn’t entirely true as there were plenty in the North who would disrespect Jon because of his bastard status. That would change though. “I will not have anyone disrespect our blood, especially here at the heart of our power.”

She didn’t look happy but knew she couldn’t argue against him, so she nodded with pursed lips. Harry resisted the urge to sigh.

Jon looked a bit happier at least.

Sansa started making a fuss saying she wanted the bathroom. Honestly Harry was surprised that she stayed still for this long. Weren’t babies supposed to be difficult at her age?

Catelyn stood. “If you would excuse us my lord?”

He waved her off.

She turned to Robb. “Come Robb. It is time for your bath.”

Robb immediately started whining but Catelyn was adamant. Before long a sulking Robb was pulled away by his mother with Jon and Hadrian laughing silently at him. Once they had left he turned to Jon. “How was she?”

Jon stopped laughing immediately. His mouth slamming shut and his back straightening up. “Who?.”

Harry just gave him a flat look. “Come Jon. I can read you like a book, there’s no point in lying to me.”

Jon just deflated and stayed quiet for a few moments. “She left me alone most times. ”

He didn’t elaborate on those times that Catelyn didn’t leave him alone. Harry frowned he would have to do some investigating. For now he just nodded at Jon. “Very well. I won’t push you. “

Jon stood. “May I also leave?”

Harry decided to give him space and gave his assent. “Please tell Maester Luwin to come see me.”

A he was walking towards the door Harry called out to him. “Jon.” He turned back to look at Harry. “You may not have the name, but you are a Stark. More of one than Catelyn will ever be.”

Jon brightened up considerably when he left.

Harry took the time alone to just relax and stare into the fire. A few minutes later the guard on the door knocked and announced Maester Luwins presence.

“Enter.” Harry called.

Maester Luwin walked into the office. Holding a few scrolls and books. “It is good to have you back my lord.”

Harry smiled at him. “It is good to be back Maester.” Harry might not trust the Order of Maesters or the Citadel in general, but he does trust Luwin. He proved his trustworthiness when he didn’t release the new farming practices to the Citadel until Harry gave him permission. Harry also spied on him for a while using the ravens and Luwin had proven to be loyal.

He gestured to one of the empty chairs in front of his desk. “Please take a seat.”

He quickly did so while laying all he was carrying on the table. Harry took a sip of water before he began the conversation. “So, fill me in Maester. What have I missed?”

Luwin cleared his throat. “I am sure you are aware by now that the war is over my lord. You probably don’t know the finer details. The war went almost exactly as you predicted it to. The Ironborn attacked the Arbour first instead of Lannisport though. While the Ironborn lost some ships I can only assume the Reach Lords never took your warning seriously. The Arbour lost almost all their ships and suffered some heavy raids. The Ironborn never managed to penetrate their castle though so the Redwyns are alive and well. After that there was some more raiding on the mainland of the Reach and the Shield Islands before the Ironborn gathered to attack Lannisport. The result was the decimation of most of the Ironborn fleet and much of the Lannister fleet due to a trap by Tywin. Once the Kig gathered the army at Lannisport they sailed for the Iron Islands and quickly overwhelmed Balon Greyjoys forces. Balon lost his head shortly after.”

Harry smiled. “Excellent. It is good to know that the Ironborn weren’t able to cause too much chaos.” It was also nice to know that the Reach and Westerlands lost much of their fleet. It gives the North a chance to catch up or perhaps even pull ahead in that area.

Luwin nodded and carried on reading. “Tywin Lannister threw a tourney in Lannisport to celebrate the victory. Your uncle and the other Lords are there now.”

Harry just nodded. He didn’t really care about Lannisters tournament. There were other things he was interested in knowing about. “What of the Greyjoy children?”

Luwin smiled at this. “Ah, your uncle succeeded there My Lord. Asha Greyjoy will be fostered at Winterfell, while Theon will be fostered at Casterly Rock. Kevan Lannister has also been chosen to act as the new Warden of the Isles until Theon Greyjoy comes of age.”

Harry laughed at this. It seemed like everything in the south worked out just the way he wanted it to. The Lannisters would have no choice now but to use some of their resources to keep the Iron Islands in line. If he was lucky, they would attempt to deal with the religion of The Drowned God.

Harry knew such an attempt to get rid of that religion would be incredibly difficult. There are many smallfolk on the Iron Islands who are likely to revolt for their religion. He also knows that Tywin Lannister would stamp out any revolts. This will cost the Lannisters resources and hopefully keep them slightly distracted. He doesn’t believe the Lannisters will succeed in stamping out the religion. At least not in only a decade. But if they do it can only be a good thing, and if they don’t at least a lot of the progress would have been laid to destroy the religion. Progress that Harry could take advantage of if he ever decides to conquer the islands.

After laughing a few moments Harry started to calm down. That’s when he noticed the uncomfortable look on the Maesters face. “What’s wrong?”

Luwin hesitated slightly before speaking. “Two days ago a raven came from your uncle. The King has betrothed you to his daughter.”

Harry gaped at the man. “He never asked my permission though?”

Luwin just looked sadly at him. “He is the King. He doesn’t need to.”

Hadrians shoulders slumped. “I didn’t even know the King had a daughter. Doesn’t he only have a son?”

The Maester grimaced slightly. “His daughter, Princess Myrcella Baratheon, was born only a few moons ago my lord.”

He just stared at the Maester. “So not only am I being forced into marriage. I am being forced to marry a baby?”

Luwin tried to reassure him. “The marriage will only take place when she is of age My Lord and it is a good match. The best match possible. “

Harry just shook his head. It was his own fault, really. Someone in the South picked up on some of his moves and decided he could be dangerous if left alone. Marriage was a good way to bind Harry to The Crown to make sure he doesn’t ever rebel. Harry thinks Tywin Lannister was probably responsible for this move.

Tywin probably noticed Hadrians moves with the Iron Islands. Harry would need to be more careful in the future. He was lucky Tywin decided to retaliate in this manner. That probably won’t be the case in the future.

He sighed. “There’s nothing for it I guess. I will just have to cross that bridge when I get to it.”

Harry decided not to think about that particular problem for now. He had at least a decade to figure out what to do about the marriage.

After rubbing his eyes for a few seconds He sat forwards and spoke. “Let’s leave that alone for now. For now, tell me everything I’ve missed.”

Luwin cleared his throat. “Very well my lord.” The Maester started shuffling through papers until he found a specific one. Passing it across to Harry to read while he was speaking. “The war never had much of an effect on the North, My Lord. Majority of the troops stayed in the North and most of those who went south were men at arms or otherwise full time soldiers, so there was only a small impact on farming and trade. Over half the farms in the North have switched to the new practices My Lord. While others still need to be taught. The Umbers and Mountain clans are struggling to populate the gift, so much of the fertile land is going unused there but they are slowly moving people there and starting what farms they can. Overall there has been a decent increase in available farming in the last six moons my lord. Right now, a little under half the gold the North used to spend on food a decade ago is still being sent South for that purpose. The rest is staying in the North.”

Harry smiled. That was good news. The North would only grow more food and become less dependent on the South. Still, there wasn’t much they could do to improve the pace of new farms, that would happen as the Norths population increases. He told as much to the Maester before they moved on to the next thing.

They spoke about the increases that Winterfell is getting in taxes, what to do with most of that money and where the biggest increases are from. They spoke about the lords all over Westeros, who had children, who was married, who died and who seemed to be looking for marriage alliances. They spoke about some of the projects he had started. Harry was informed of how many ships the Manderlys had built for the new trade fleet. Then he was informed about the cost of building Sea Dragon Point so far and the Maesters future cost predictions. After spending some time trying to figure out how to lower the costs slightly to no avail they moved on to something that Harry was very interested to learn the progress of.

“How has teaching some of the orphans going?” Harry asked.

Luwin sighed. Harry knew he never liked teaching the orphans, the Maester found it to be a waste of time. Unfortunately for Luwin, Harry knew he would need some more educated people to help him improve the North. The long term plan was to make a school, similar to the Citadel but more concerned with advancing technology and humanity and uncovering the secrets of Planetos than politics, like the Citadel seems to be.

After gathering his thoughts the Maester spoke. “It has been going better than I expected it to my lord. As you suggested, I started teaching two of the older children. It took a few moons but once they were good enough at reading and writing, I started teaching them basic numbers. That took longer my lord but they learnt. As per your instructions, I then hired them to teach others from a small building in Wintertown. There is now a little over a dozen children who are learning to read and write. The ones who are interested, will then start learning what they need to know to be tax collectors my lord.”

Harry smiled. While not as much progress as he hoped, it was still a decent start. The progress should start to speed up once they get some more people capable of teaching. “Good job Maester. It seems like everything went well in my absence. “

Luwin smiled and nodded. “Yes my lord, things did.”

There was just one more thing he wanted to speak about. “How was Catelyn?”

Luwin sighed. “I thought you might ask about that My Lord.”

Despite himself, Harry felt a small grin come on his face at Luwins reaction. He lost it a moment later when Luwin continued. “Normally I wouldn’t talk about a Lady behind her back but you are the Lord of Winterfell. Catelyn has been…okay my lord. She’s bitter about a few things and still has some trouble with adapting to the North but overall, I would say she ran Winterfell well.”

Harry frowned. “What exactly is she bitter about?”

The Measter sighed. “Benjen got Sea Dragon Point. Eddard is getting Moat Cailin. I believe she is upset that Benjen is getting what will one day be an important port while Eddard is getting, in her view, a ruin by the swamps. I overheard her praying about it one day while going to see her in her chambers.”

Harry sighed. There was nothing he could do to change her mind about Moat Cailin. Hopefully once his plans for the Moat begin, she will start to see the potential in her new home.

“And Jon?” Harry just had to ask.

Luwin grimaced a little. “He was ill for a while. A few days in which he was close to death”

Harrys head shot up and his eyes widened but before he had a chance to say anything the Maester continued. “It was the Spring Sickness my lord. It is common in children and dangerous for them. Now that Jon is past it, he shouldn’t catch it again.”

Harry breathed a sigh of relief. At least Jon was okay. He was upset about the fact it took so long to hear this news though. He would have to find a way to improve the way messages are sent in the North, to improve communication.

Luwin continued speaking. “Lady Catelyn was surprisingly concerned for his wellbeing during those days. Soon after he got better she carried on ignoring him though.”

Harry felt his eyebrows raise. He knew Catelyn was not a cruel woman but perhaps he underestimated her compassion. Or perhaps she had a guilty conscience for how she treated Jon during the time she felt he might not live. Regardless, it doesn’t seem as if that compassion persisted.

He decided he would watch her and see if anything changed.

For now he would move on. “Anything else?”

Luwin shook his head. “As I said my lord, she did a decent job of keeping the household organised while you were away and she never had any real power, to enact any changes you may not like. The only thing you might have an issue with, is that she is teaching Sansa and Robb about the Seven and she tried to convince your uncle to bring in another Septon before he left for the war.”

Harry sighed and massaged his temples. It looks like it was time to have a long overdue conversation with his aunt.

Criticism is welcome as long as it’s constructive.

Next chapter 19 May 2023.

To read ahead of the update schedule: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

The Thought of an Old Lion

The Thoughts of an Old Lion

Casterly Rock -289 AC

Tywin Lannister was on top of the world.

Standing on his balcony outside his solar on the top floor of Casterly Rock, he looked out over his domain.

The sun was beginning to set below the Sunset Sea, painting the sky as if a canvas with streaking rays of different shades of pink, orange and red trailing across the horizon. Lannisport buzzed below him, with ships constantly flowing into and out of the harbour, smoke trailing from the rooftops of dozens of blacksmiths. He could see dozens of tents either made or being put up for the tourney in the distance, some of the less important lords and knights would be sleeping in them.

From this height the people on the streets looked like ants under his gaze.

Tywin felt it was appropriate. As what were the smallfolk to a lion but ants?

Most of them were beneath his notice. They were just there. The ones he did take notice of either served him or were useful in some way. He didn’t really pay them much mind in ordinary circumstances and he knew most of the time, majority of the smallfolk never thought much about who ruled them. Still, he knew all it would take was a command to bend them to his will. Such was the power of a Lion.

Even still, Tywin wasn’t a fool, he knew enough ants could kill a lion.  If you pushed them too much they would be liable to rebel. Then numbers alone could bring down even the mightiest of beasts.

Tywin knew when to push, when reminders of power needed to be shown. He also knew when rewards and gold were a better alternative. He perfected the art of ruling young. When he still had people above him in power, he watched as their mistakes made them tumble down. He watched and he learned.

Sparing one last glance for the view, Tywin turned and walked back into his solar and out the door. The guards that were stationed there fell into step behind him as he walked. Even in Casterly Rock, Tywin never let his guard down completely. He stopped by another guard stationed at a large oak door.

With a nod to the guard, the door was opened revealing a small room. Tywin entered with his guards before the door was closed. A rope was then pulled by the guard outside. Tywin knew it pulled a bell that was by the operators of the elevator. Signalling them when to lower it.

A few seconds later, Tywin felt as the floor began to creak as they descended down Casterly Rock. This was Tywins personal elevator, anyone else who had business with him in his personal solar would be forced to use the stairs. He had another area to receive guests and do actual business lower in Casterly Rock. That space was just his to enjoy and his to plan in. Sometimes when the occasion called for it, he would invite others. But they would have to take the stairs. Tywin sometimes felt amusement when he thought back to when his third born was forced to walk that distance with his stunted body.

The floor suddenly came to stop and the door he was facing opened. On the other side was another guard whose sole job was to guard this elevator. Tywin walked down the passage, around a few bends, down five flights of stairs, past the library, a few chambers for guests and a ballroom that wasn’t being used to host guests for the tourney. That ballroom was in another part of the castle, more open to those who weren’t Lannisters. Then he came to his destination.

He nodded to the guards who were outside the door who were quick to announce him and open the door swiftly and announce him. He entered into a room filled with blond. Almost his entire living family was seated together for the first time in years. If he were a more emotional man he might be filled with joy. As it was, Tywin felt slight pride.

Everyone rose for him as he entered and walked to his chair. Greetings leaving their lips. “Tywin.” “Father.” “Tywin.” Multiple voices echoed at once. No matter their station or age. None of his family moved until he took his chair and spoke. “Sit.”

They all did so.

Tywin looked at the spread before him. Lobsters, prawns , freshly caught fish of different types and varieties, muscles, bread, cheese, steak, chicken, fresh vegetables and some slices of peach and watermelon were laid out on the table. Along with a few pitchers of different wines for different appetites. All served on plates and in pitchers of solid gold. House Lannister was a house that never went without.

He tore his gaze from the spread and started examining his family. With the war with the Ironborn officially over, Tywin took the chance to throw a tourney in Lannisport to show House Lannisters power. Naturally such an occasion brought Lords and Ladies from all over the Seven Kingdoms.

His daughter and her children arrived the previous afternoon from Kings Landing along with Jon Arryn, in order to finalise the decisions made regarding the Iron Islands. There was a feast thrown in their honour the previous evening, which all the Lords and Ladies attended, so this was the first time he had a chance to speak to Cersei with even a token of privacy. As a Lannister.

She brought her son Joffrey and her newly born daughter Myrcella, who she was holding, to the dinner. Tywin hadn’t had a chance to properly inspect his grandchildren since their arrival, he will use this dinner to do so. Hopefully Myrcella will grow up to be smarter and less…impulsive than her mother and Joffrey smarter and less of a drunk than his father.

On Cersei’s left sat his son Jamie. Who had been given leave of his duties for the night. Tywin couldn’t help but feel a slight ache when he looked at his son. He knew exactly what the feeling was.

Disappointment.

Jamie should be staying in Casterly Rock as his heir, he should be studying under Tywin learning all he needs to know. He should be getting married and having children to continue the Lannister line. He should be preparing to take over after Tywin has died. So that he can continue protecting the only thing that matters. The Lannister legacy.

Instead he was serving as a glorified servant to a whoremongering fool of a king.

It made Tywins blood boil slightly when he thought about it. Which just made the disappointment he felt sting even worse. He could easily get Jamie out of the Kingsguard. It wouldn’t be difficult. The issue was his son would never accept leaving if given the option. He knows, Robert has given Jamie the choice before because of Tywin. It enraged him when Jamie refused to leave.

Next his gaze fell on the drunken monstrosity that was unfortunately his son. Tyrion was casually drinking a cup of wine and eating from the food available. He was the only one who didn’t wait for Tywin before starting. He glared slightly at the dwarf before moving on. The less he has to look at Tyrion the better.

His ever faithful brother Kevin was sitting next to his sister Genna. Each of their children were with their respective spouses this evening. The only reason Joffrey and Myrcella were present was because Cersei threw a tantrum at being separated from them and Tywin felt the argument wasn’t worth the effort, when there were more important things to discuss.

Next to them was his other more troublesome brother, Gerion, who spared Tywin a nod before following Tyrion’s lead and beginning to eat. Tywin chose to ignore him, he learned it was pointless to argue with Gerion years ago.

Tywin grabbed a small clam, opening it and eating the centre. As he did so he could see majority of his family following his lead and start eating their own food. For a few minutes there was relative silence as everyone concentrated on eating their fill. It wasn’t long though before it was broken.

Cersei had a cup of wine that she casually sipped from before speaking. “Father, I have heard all sorts of rumours about the war. Including hours of Roberts idiotic boasts the night before, but I cannot trust those rumours and boasts. Would you please tell me what happened?” She asked with the most innocent face she could muster.

Tywin wasn’t fooled though. When you know who Cersei really is, you know she is up to something when she pretends to be innocent. He knows she is probably trying to get more detailed accounts of the war for any information she can use in one of her plots. She knows he will have the complete picture and not just pieces of it like others she would ask. Cersei has never been as smart or as subtle as she thinks she is. Despite that Tywin knows she can get the information from others and that there was only so much damage she could do. Tywin owns the court, not her. She just doesn’t realise that fact. Or wilfully ignores it. So he decides to answer her. Besides it leads nicely about what he really wants to talk about.

“It wasn’t much of a war.” He explained. “Once everyone was warned of what Balon Greyjoy might do, most Houses on the shore prepared their defences. Except for the Reach. A large portion of Balons army was lost in the North, against Hadrian Stark. He lost more attacking the Reach, but managed to destroy the Redwyn Fleet as a consequence. This led to some raids in the Reach before the Hightowers mobilised. When they attacked Lannisport, I expected them and decimated most of the Ironborn forces at the cost of much of our fleet. From there, the war was basically over. The Greyjoys had lost majority of their men and their dominance at sea, as the Royal Fleet and Hightower Fleet were still undamaged. The Lannister Fleet would have been enough to ferry all our men after a few trips on its own. As even just the men of the West and Crownlands would easily be able to kill what pirates remain. The only reason that we waited for the rest of the forces was that the King wanted to make a statement…and to meet with Stark.”

She laughed. “Balon Greyjoy was a fool. His pile of rocks didn’t even put up a good fight.”

Tywin nodded. “Yes, he was. He could have caused some chaos if he caught us unprepared but he would always ultimately lose any war through attrition. “

Tyrion made his voice known from further down the table. Tywin prevented himself from showing his irritation at hearing his voice. “Yes, yes, yes. We all know Balon Greyjoy was a fool who died a foolish death. I, for one, am much more interested in knowing what is going on in the North.”

Cercei scoffed. “The North is a wasteland filled with savages. What could be so interesting about it?”

Tywin withheld the urge to glare at her. Cersei always thought she was smarter than she truly was. She doesn’t take the time to look beyond the obvious, always jumping to the first conclusion and sticking with it no matter all evidence. As much as Tywin may hate him for what he is, he can at least acknowledge Tyrion has some intelligence.

Alas, Tywin learned a long time ago that trying to teach Cersei such lessons was a degree in futility. Tywin was saved from answering by Gerion, who spoke as he stabbed his fork in a piece of chicken. “The North has been making moves recently. Even I can see that, dear niece.”

Cersei glowered. Tywin withheld the urge to sigh, his daughter was much too quick to take anything as a slight. Sometimes there was no slight intended in corrections. Alas Cersei never truly learnt how to distinguish true slights from perceived ones. “The North is a frozen wasteland. What does it matter what the Starks do up there? They will never be a true threat to House Lannister. We control the Iron Throne. “

Tyrion laughed and plucked a grape from a bowl. “Robert Baratheon sits the Iron Throne dear sister. Not House Lannister. We may have power over much of the realm, but the North has always belonged and will always belong to the Starks. House Lannister has no say up there. Even the King has limited power over the Northern Lords. The Lords of the North will always answer to House Stark first and the Iron Throne second. “

She sneered. “Those barbarians would never-“

“Tyrion is correct.” How Tywin loathed that. The dwarf, among all his children, would be the best to take over House Lannister, if he wasn’t a monstrosity.  Tywin turned to his daughter and picked up a glass of Arbour Red.

He took a sip before speaking. “The North has been making moves. At first, I will admit I didn’t pay too much attention to what was happening but then during the war something interesting happened, that made me pay closer attention.”

Tywin paused and took another sip before continuing. “When we were discussing what would be done to punish Balon and what would be done with the Iron Islands as a result, at first the king was going to follow Lord Arryns advice and make Balon kneel and take his son for a ward but Lord Stark changed his mind. Eddard Stark argued for Balons execution, citing the fact Balon already ignored ravens warning him before the war started.”

Jamie decided to cut in. “What does that matter? Stark has always been rigid.”

Tywin pursed his lips. “The way it happened. Jon Arryn advised Robert to let Balon Greyjoy live if he bent the knee. Eddard Stark changed his mind. Then he convinced Robert to have Theon Greyjoy become my ward. While Asha Greyjoy becomes a ward of the Starks. Eddard Stark has never liked me. Everyone knows it. He is also a simple man who is easy to predict. I doubt it was his idea.”

Tyrion frowned. “You believe it was Hadrian Starks idea.”

Cercei frowned too. “Why would he do that? With the heir to the Iron Islands as our ward, the Iron Islands are in our control. “

Tywin drawled. “I believe that was half the point. In front of all the great lords of the realm, Stark stated that Robert should use the opportunity provided to try and change the culture of the islands away from raiding. Stark told the King that I was the only Lord on the Western Coast with both the competence and resources needed to tame the Iron Islands and start to bring them away from raiding, in a reasonable timeframe. So I should be left in charge of doing so and in control of the Islands until Theon comes of age”

Tywin paused to let his words sink in before continuing. “Robert ate it up, of course. He seemed happy at the idea of the Iron Islands being tamed in his reign, when the Targaryens couldn’t do it in three centuries. The king then told me I had permission to do whatever I needed to, in order to bring lasting change in the culture of the islands while they are weak. So now Kevin is the new Warden of the Iron Islands until Theon comes of age.” He finished while raising a glass to his brother who reciprocated the gesture.

Jamie smirked. “That’s true though. Those foppy Reachmen don’t have a chance of having a lasting impact on those Islands. They would lose control of them in the first moon. It seems to me like Hadrian Stark isn’t as clever as they say. He’s basically given House Lannister control of the Islands on a silver platter.”

Tywin glowered at him. He still doesn’t get it. Judging by the grimace on the dwarfs face, he is at least starting to pick up on the issue. He took a breath before explaining. “At first I didn’t believe the rumours about Hadrian Stark either. Then the farmers tested his new farming methods and found it works. Better than expected, even. Hadrian Stark capitalised on that by getting new land from the Gift, so now the North is no longer as dependant on the South. He changed how books are kept to make sure he is unlikely to be cheated from the increased tax he will be getting.  He is also starting a new city on the West coast, preparing for further trade. This means the North will only grow in population, wealth and power in the next few years, while southern kingdoms who rely on exporting food, will be weakened as food becomes cheaper and they lose income. All these facts tell me that Hadrian Stark is intelligent. It tells me he can and does plan for the future. The boy is only nine namedays old and he has done more to increase the Norths power and weaken their dependence on the South than most of his ancestors. He is no fool.”

Tyrion laughed. “It’s a poisoned chalice!”

Tywin nodded. “Indeed.”

Then Tywin remained silent as he nursed another sip of his wine. Tyrion took the invitation to explain to his siblings, while Tywin lamented the fact that neither of the twins understood the situation yet. “Ironborn raids were always going to be a problem for the North. If they’re trying to start a new city, the less raids the better. Hadrian Stark has pushed off the effort of curbing the Ironborn onto us. House Lannister will pay the expenses, House Lannister will have control of the islands and House Lannister will earn the enmity of the smallfolk on the Islands while House Stark reaps nearly as many benefits with none of the effort. To truly curb the Ironborn raiding and to change them for good, we will have to target the religion of the Drowned God. That will earn us the hatred of the smallfolk. We might have been given control by the King, but actually enforcing that control is easier said than done. The islands are notoriously difficult to control. This will be no small undertaking. We have Theon Greyjoy to raise, so theoretically we should be able to mold him and shape him. Making him and by extension the Iron Islands, allies to House Lannister for the next generation. Theon Greyjoy is old enough to remember his father though. There’s just as good a chance he grows to resent us and does something foolish. Hadrian Stark has Asha Greyjoy. She would make a good hostage to make sure Theon and the Iron Islands don’t attack the North and if Theon ever proves a detriment to the North, then Hadrian can always remove him for his sister. A women has never ruled the Islands but it is possible if she is the only Greyjoy left. Meaning the Iron Islands would be more allied to House Stark than House Lannister. He can even marry her if he wishes. He can swoop in and take the Iron Islands out right from under us after we put in so much effort there to change them. “

Tyrion took a deep gulp of wine. “The most genius part is, it looks like he is doing us a favour. Giving House Lannister influence on the islands. Most Houses will see this as the King granting us honour. If we do nothing and don’t curb the raiding we look bad, if we refuse to take control of the islands we look weak, if we do our best to bring the Iron Islands under our banner, spending gold and men for that purpose, we can have our control of the Islands stripped from us and handed over to the North with one move. Having the North reap the rewards for our effort.”

Tyrion raised a glass. “Truly, a masterful move.”

Cersei looked outraged. “How dare those barbarians!? Hadrian Stark needs to be taught his place!”

“Don’t!” Tywin snapped. When she flinched back, he took a deep breath before continuing. “We have to handle the situation delicately. The King holds more respect and affection for House Stark than he does for us. So we can’t do anything overt. Not to mention the fact that this is just speculation of the worst case scenario.  Hadrian Stark might have different reasons for his choices. I will have to find out more. For all we know, he is as honourable as his uncle and would never even think of removing Theon from power for his sister without proper justification. While there are options I have to remove the Starks, I don’t believe they are necessary yet. Not when there is an easier and more profitable solution.”

Cersei seemed to calm down. Jamie took the opportunity to speak. “What do you mean father? What solution?”

He took another sip of wine before continuing. “Myrcella will marry Hadrian Stark.”

“What?!”Cersei screeched. “I will not have my daughter marry some barbarian!”

He glared but otherwise remained impassive. “You will do as you are told.”

Tywin could see his daughter visibly seethe in her chair but otherwise she remained quiet. “There are few better choices for her husband. House Stark is one of the oldest and most storied Houses in Westeros. They have always been a strong military power. Now they are only going to get stronger. It is too late to change that fact. Now that they can grow their own food, the North will rise in power regardless of if the Starks are in charge. This way we can make sure House Lannister profits off of their growth and it gives us a strong alliance in the future. ”

Of course his foolish daughter still failed to see his wisdom. “We should punish them for overreaching! Not reward them with a royal marriage! Myrcella was just born, I won’t let you sell her off like cattle!”

Tywin resisted the urge to shout at the girl. She never listens! “How would we punish them? Most won’t see this as the Starks overreaching. They will see it as House Lannister being rewarded. I can take subtle action against them, of course. If this hurt our reputation at all, I would. As it stands, having control over the islands is good for our reputation. We are the only House to have control over two kingdoms. Even if temporarily. Worst case scenario, an accident can be arranged for Asha Greyjoy if the islands start to slip from our grasp. In the meantime, there are many ways having control of the islands will benefit us. For now, I am going to have more spies placed in the North. I am going to watch and learn. The Starks have always only cared about the North. They generally want nothing to do with the South. I doubt Hadrian Stark is any different. The South killed his father, grandfather and aunt. I expect he will keep his sights firmly on the North. As long as he does so, he is no threat to House Lannister and will make a good ally once bound by marriage. If need be, Joffrey can even marry Sansa Stark in order to keep Hadrian Stark completely under control. If his gaze does wonder South, then he will be treated as a problem and taken care of.”

Honestly why make enemies when it is not necessary. When having a strong ally would be so much better. Tywin is nothing if not pragmatic. Hadrian Starks ploy with the Ironborn was irritating but it does provide opportunities. He could even respect the move. It was impressive but it did show Hadrian Stark could be a threat. Once Hadrian Stark is married to Myrcella though, he would cease to be an issue.

He would let Hadrian get away with this manipulation, just this once, as it benefitted House Lannister.  If it happens again though, he would use the Starks as a lesson for the rest of Westeros.

Next chapter Thursday 11 May 2023.

Sorry for the extremely late chapter guys. My laptop gave me issues and I ended up having to retype the last chapter. The next chapter will be released tomorrow or Friday though.  I am off work tomorrow and will spend the day making sure it’s done. As always criticism is welcome as long as it’s constructive.

To read ahead of the update schedule: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

Population Problems

Population Problems

Bear Island- 289AC

It had been a fortnight since Hadrian arrived at Bear Island. He and his uncle would be leaving the next morning, to go back to Winterfell.  Today though, he found he found himself sitting beside Meage Mormont and her daughters Jorelle and Lyra, on a small alcove overlooking the sparring yard, where his uncle Benjen was sparring with his future wife. Each of them had drinks in hand as they watched the pair fight in their seventh spar that morning so far.

Over the last few weeks, Hadrian had watched Benjen and Dacey closely. The last thing that he wanted was to force his uncle into an unhappy marriage. So he wanted to make sure that he made the correct decision. Marrying Benjen to Dacey might have been smart politically, as the Navy will be on Bear Island and the financial power of the Western coast will be at Sea Dragon Point. Making sure that the two Houses have a strong, positive relationship can only be an advantage going forward. Despite that, he would cancel the wedding without regrets if he thought Dacey would make Benjen unhappy.

Thankfully it seems his instincts were right in this case. Benjen had been a quiet man since the war, prone to smiling less and hardly ever joking. Not like he used to.  Hadrian didn’t think Benjen would ever pursue a woman if he didn’t nudge him.

After he and Maege Mormont confirmed the betrothal between Benjen and Dacey, he left them on their own to get to know each other, while he was shown around Bear Island and kept company by the rest of the Mormonts. At first Benjen was awkard and shy around his betrothed but Dacey didn’t seem to be put off. She seemed accepting of the betrothal and actually seemed to put her all into it. Breaking through Benjens shell with pure determination. Harry found himself growing to like her and the rest of the Mormonts a great deal.

By the third day, Benjen seemed to have an almost permanent smile on his face at breakfast and Dacey seemed to take a particular joy in teasing him. He continued to leave them on their own and explored Bear Island as much as he could with Meage, Jorelle and Lyra in the time he had.

Bear Island was large as far as Islands go. Filled with rolling hills, pine and oak trees as well as an abundance of wildlife. It was perhaps larger than any of the Iron Islands and had many resources that those islands lack. Bear Island had many rivers, streams and bountiful forests filled with edible berries and animals. It was a beautiful island that probably made most Lords in the Iron Islands jealous.

With the resources found on the island, it would easily be possible for it to host a Navy. Wood for ships could be chopped down from the island or imported from Sea Dragon Point with ease. The biggest issue was the Bay of Ice was said to freeze in winter, freezing the ocean on the northern part of the island. He could easily have the Navy and shipyard built on the Southern part of the island, the only issue would be random chunks of ice in the water. He would see how the Navy handles the winter before he decides anything else. Worst case scenario, he can just move where the Navy is based after winter if ice proves to be a problem.

Hadrian decided on a place to build a shipyard and port within the first few days of arriving on the island. In the end he built it at the South-eastern corner of the island in one of the natural bays that the island had.

There was just a lot of work that had to be done to build that Navy. While the command structure, pay, equipment and training for the Navy would be decided at the same time as the Northern Army’s, when the Lords arrive back from the war with the Iron Islands, there are still a few things he can decide upon for the Navy without the presence of the Lords.

The first decision he made was choosing Bear Island to host the Western Navy. He didn’t think any of the Lords would disapprove. The Mormonts are an old House and are known for their loyalty. The second thing he started to do, was start work on the port for the Navy itself. He also created plans for some of the defences, such as watchtowers along the shore that can look for signal fires from ships out in the ocean, in case of an Ironborn attack. Those watchtowers would eventually be spaced all along the Western shore and will each have signal fires, so they can signal each other and pass word of Ironborn, long before any ships make it close to the coast. Giving time for the Navy to react.

He knew it would take a long time to build up some of the infrastructure, especially with the low population of Bear Island and the Western shore. The sooner he starts the sooner it will be done though.

Everything would have to be built out of wood. There wasn’t really any other choice. Stone would eventually replace it once everything is stable. The issue now was getting men to join the Naval Academy in any type of numbers. He would have to recruit from all over the North if he wants to build the Navy quickly and that would take men away from other places he needed them.

Gold wouldn’t be a problem for a little while, House Stark received a decent influx of Gold thanks to the new farming practices and access to the Gift. This has saved them a lot of money and kept a lot of gold in the North, having a positive impact on the rest of the economy. As smallfolk now have cheaper food and can more often spend their hard earned coin on other things. Unfortunately all the projects he is running has increased their expenses tremendously, meaning they are still losing money.  They can last for a few years at this rate, thanks to his ancestors who would rarely spend any gold and constantly save. It was thanks to them that House Stark had access to over a million gold dragons.

His grandfather considered that money emergency gold in case of a long winter and his uncle Ned felt the same, but Harry would much rather use that money to make the North more self-sufficient. The problem is that building a new castle wasn’t cheap. Hopefully in a few years, Sea Dragon Point will start attracting merchants and will turn a profit. The building of so many ships for the Navy and the training of troops for the Navy and army is sure to eat up a lot of funds too.

Hopefully Lord Manderly will have a decent amount of ships built for the voyage his uncle Benjen will take on his behalf. After a lot of thought, Harry decided to send half of the Ironborn ships he captured around Westeros to White Harbour. They would be added to the trade fleet. Those ships would be filled with furs first though. The men would trade on their way around Westeros, hopefully earning a decent amount of coin. Hadrian was just hoping that once his uncle Benjen got back from Yi-Ti, with the fleet and goods for trade, that they would have earned enough gold to keep up with demand so that House Stark can start earning more coin, instead of losing it as it currently is.

He knows the costs are just temporary though. Once the infrastructure of Sea Dragon Point was built and the trade fleet returned and sold their goods and attracted some merchants and smallfolk, and once his new tax reforms are fully implemented and all the farms are set up, there should be a decent economic boom that House Stark will be fully prepared to capitalise on. Gold will be much easier to come by, until he inevitably sinks it into his next project.

No, gold wasn’t currently the biggest factor holding him back.

Harry takes a sip of water while watching Dacey beat on his uncles shield with a mace and tries to think of ways around his biggest problem at the moment. The thing that is restricting him the most.

He lets out a small sigh and shakes his head as his uncle is swept off of his feet and has a mace held to his head. Next to him the Mormont sisters cheer. “Show him, Dacey!” “Tame your wolf girl!” Harry can’t help but blush slightly at how shameless the Mormont sisters are. Maege glares slightly at her daughters but does little else.

When Benjen looks at the stands and meets his eyes Harry can’t help but tease him. “I guess we know who will wear the pants in the relationship!”

Everyone laughs while Benjen throws him a weak glare. It fades off his face soon after, when Dacey helps him to his feet and challenges him to another spar.

Harrys thoughts soon drift off again to his current problem as they begin to spar. He is being heavily restricted by the Norths most valuable and hard to come by resource. People. He just never seemed to have enough people. He has countless projects that he wants to get done but even the first major one was giving him a massive headache with all its obstacles.

He finally got his first comprehensive report of everything he set in motion at Sea Dragon Point the day before. The report was over a moon in the making, it wasn’t very good and required him to send a list of instructions back. Unfortunately the man he put in charge of the operations at Sea Dragon Point wasn’t the most well educated. He was educated enough for what he needed though.

He put an elderly man named Jem in charge whom was a Glover bastard, who lived in one of the villages near House Glover. Jem apparently spent some time as a scribe for the citadel in his youth after having a very basic education. Meaning he learned to read and write and do basic numbers. As well as being more educated than most smallfolk. Unfortunately he never qualified to be a Maester, having spent less than a year in the Citadel before leaving and moving back North. Honestly Hadrian preferred it that way, he never had a chance to swear any vows and he can teach the youth to read and write, which will make it easier for Hadrian to eventually open his own Citadel and kick the Maesters out of the North.

Jem wasn’t an ideal choice. He got what Hadrian ordered done, but he had no sense of initiative. He would do until Dacey could leave to go and take command of her future holdings though. After which Hadrian would offer him a job in Winterfell teaching some of the orphans how to read and write. He would need as many competent scribes as he could get in the next few years.

Building a castle from stone is not an easy or cheap process. What the report showed was that Harry severely underestimated how long it would take with the level of development in this world. Mining the stone is slow going and transporting it is also incredibly difficult. After all this time, they still hadn’t gathered enough to do anything significant with. At the current rate the building of the castle was going, it would be half a dozen years at least before the castle was built.

Still, he decided he would continue building the castle out of stone. It would need to be done eventually; he might as well just do it from the beginning.  Eventually he would try and build roads to make transport easier, but even that would take many years to achieve throughout the North. There just aren’t enough people to really speed the process up.

Unfortunately getting more people is not an easy process. He has taken steps in the right direction by increasing the food available to his people, unfortunately it will take a few years to make a significant impact on the Norths population. Even then, it will take a few generations for the population increase to really show its full results. It doesn’t really help him with his problem now.

As it is, he desperately needs more people. He needs more merchants, more scribes, more builders, farmers, sailors and soldiers. He needs more people to build important infrastructure. Getting those people is a problem though.

He doesn’t have the time to wait for the Norths population to rise to the numbers he needs it at. At this rate it will well over a decade before Moat Cailin is anywhere near completion and that was meant to just be the start of his plans.

Hopefully the Children of the Forest are able to find some Giants that are willing to bend the knee. If they are willing to help build castles they would probably save a lot of time, effort and coin. Depending on how many of them there are.

Even still, they won’t make a large difference to the Norths population on their own. Hopefully within the next year, trading with the wildlings can begin. With any luck, a number of them would be willing to bend the knee, increasing the Norths population. Even with the most optimistic estimates though, he doubts he would get more than a few thousand people.

Hadrian would be lying if he said he didn’t contemplate trying to get more people to move North from the South. He believes there would be a lot of people who would be willing to take the risk of moving North. Many smallfolk from Flea Bottom in Kings Landing would probably leap at a chance to earn enough coin to live comfortably. Even if it meant moving to the North.

Unfortunately that would bring its own problems. They would want to build Septs for the Seven and that wasn’t something Harry was willing to allow. He won’t let The Faith get even more of a foothold in the North than it already has. He actually has to think of ways to loosen its hold on the North. If he could guarantee that only followers of the Old Gods moved North then it would be a different story. Hopefully the appearance of the Children and Giants will help give resurgence to the faith of The Old Gods in the North. He just has to keep them protected until such a time as Northerners are used to them.

The problem is, he knows that once the Giants and Children are known to the South, there will be some extreme reactions. There are a lot of Lords and Ladies South of the Neck who are very religious. There are plenty of smallfolk who are fanatics as well. He expects the Faith will throw a fit, some of them may even become militant again. Jon Arryn would probably try and soothe tensions as he always does. He is an Arryn though, historically they are a very religious House. They can even trace their roots all the way back to Andalos itself. They led the conquest of the Vale for the Faith.

Hadrian isn’t sure what Jon Arryn and the King will decide, but by then it won’t really matter. Harry plans on having the Children of the Forest and Giants bend the knee to him. When he accepts their oaths of fealty he will be taking them under his protection. If Jon Arryn or the King decide to side with the Faith and they order him to do something he doesn’t agree with, he will have no choice but to declare independence.

Jon Arryn should know that he can’t really push the North in this. Not when it comes to a matter of religion. Almost every Lord in the North would be happy to declare independence in such a scenario. Hells, most would be happy to declare independence now. Not that Harry can blame them with the south extorting them for so long. But the North isn’t ready, not yet.

Once he has access to Children of the Forest, Giants and hopefully a few dozen mammoths it will be a different story. Any army travelling up the Neck would be decimated under the combined power of himself, the Children of the Forest and other skinchangers from the Neck. Once they get to Moat Cailin, they will face waves upon waves of arrows, thousands of men behind a fortified fortress and giants. It would be a slaughter, even with the Moat damaged the way it is. If he manages to repair it quickly enough with the help of giants? There’s no chance of any southern army breaking through.

The coasts are a lot more vulnerable though. The eastern coast is decently strong with the Manderlys having good defences and a decent sized fleet. Over the next few years the fleet should grow in strength as the fleet on the Western coast will. An army that is determined enough and has enough ships and men could probably break the Manderlys fleet and take their city. It would cost that army a lot of lives though and the Manderlys could probably get most of their smallfolk and some of their soldiers to retreat into the North. The Western coast was much more vulnerable for now. In the next few years that should change as Sea Dragon Point developed and more ships were added to the Western Fleet. It would still take many years before he is confident in those defences  though.

If any army does managed to actually land on their shores and get a good position to garrison their troops, they will be marching into death traps no matter which direction they march in. Skinchangers will keep his armies one step ahead and giants riding mammoths would probably break any formation any southern armies will have on the open field. Especially if he manages to properly arm and armour the giants. Then they will be an incredible force multiplier. Charging mammoths and giants would be better than any cavalry force by a significant margin.

Hadrian almost drools at the thought of it.

Any southern army that tried to attack the North in the North where they are strongest will have an incredibly difficult time. As long as there are no internal issues amongst the Northern lords, the North would crush most armies that marched on Northern soil. Only if most of the southern armies attack together would they have a chance of defeating the North through conquest and there are ways to turn southern lords against each other and ruin their cohesion. With the help of his skinchangers, it should be easy to turn Southern Lords against one another. The biggest problem would be from traitors. His skinchangers would help deal with them though.

So while Harry was a bit worried about the reaction of the King and Jon Arryn towards the North gaining Giants and Children of the Forest, he isn’t too worried about them. Jon Arryn and Robert Baratheon should know that the Baratheon Dynasty can’t afford to make enemies of House Stark, especially so early into the start of their Dynasty. They already have enough enemies.

Hadrian decided that he would push the construction of the fleet, army and defences as fast as he could though, just in case. As while he doesn’t think the King would be foolish enough to start a war with the North, there are definitely Southern Lords who would be happy to try.

Then there are the Maesters.

Over the last fortnight, Hadrian has spent some time in the small library the Mormonts have. At first glance, the library itself was not very impressive, having only a fraction of the books that Winterfell does. It wasn’t until Hadrian started inspecting the books properly that he discovered a few books about legends of Bear Island and beyond The Wall that wasn’t available in Winterfell.

This acted as confirmation of a theory for him. The books themselves weren’t that old, written a little under a century ago. Why then were there no copies in Winterfell? It confirmed a trend he noticed when speaking to Lord Manderly about their respective libraries. Many books about the North are not found in the Library of Winterfell, when they by all rights should be. So far Hadrian hasn’t found any gaps in the books about the South, only books about the North seem to be missing. This led him to believe the Maesters were stealing those books and slowly trying to destroy First Men culture. Either through the destruction of knowledge or through them rewriting history as they see fit.

The Maesters will definitely try and pull as many strings as possible in both the North and the South to try and do as much damage as they can against the Children of the Forest or the Giants as fast as they can. Hadrian would have to make sure he stays aware of any plots from them while working to remove them from the North.

Unfortunately creating an institution like the Citadel will also be very expensive and time consuming. It will be years before he is close to having a viable replacement for Maesters in the North.

Another option he thought of, is instead of looking South for more people, he could look East, towards Essos.

Hadrian really dislikes slavery. No, it is more accurate to say that he has a hatred for slavery. When thinking of how to increase the population of the North, he quickly thought about freeing slaves and letting them live in the North. There are many slaves who have skills that most Westerosi smallfolk lack, those people would be boon to the North as they would bring some much needed skills that would help with Northern development. Another advantage of looking towards freeing slaves was that they were much more likely to be grateful for the opportunity than southerners will.

While Southerners would bring their religion North and would probably create issues with infighting among the smallfolk, slaves from Essos won’t have that problem. Most slaves would probably happily take up the worship of the Old Gods once they are free. Freed slaves would also be much more loyal towards House Stark, out of gratitude if nothing else, than a thief from Flea Bottom ever would.

The problem is freeing slaves isn’t so simple. For a short amount of time, Hadrian thought of having his uncle just buy the slaves and then release them immediately and offer them a place in the North if they want it. The problem with that, is that he will be paying gold to slavers. So while he may free a few slaves, the slaver will use that gold to purchase more. That wasn’t an option that sat very well with him.

Still, there are other options to free slaves. Once his uncle had returned from Yi-Ti, he would question Benjen about each city and their slaves. Perhaps on the second trip to Yi-Ti he could have the fleet smuggle a few slaves to freedom? Or maybe he can set up a system similar to the Underground Railroad from the American Civil War?

He would need someone in charge of operations somewhere in Essos if he was going to free slaves in any decent amount though. As doing so would be neither cheap nor easy.

For now he would just have to build up slowly as his population slowly increased.

Harry shook his head to clear his thoughts. There would be time to think of those issues later. For now, he should just enjoy his last day on the island before he makes his way back to Winterfell.

Harry cheered as his uncle disarmed Dacey before putting his sword to her throat. He turned to Maege when she spoke. “I think they will be good for each other. “

When Harry looked at his uncle and saw the smile on his face as he laughed at something Dacey said he replied. “Aye I think they will be.”

Next chapter Thursday 4 May 2023.

Sorry for such a late update guys. As always criticism is welcome as long as it’s constructive.

To read ahead of the update schedule: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.

Bear Island

Bear Island

Bear Island -289 AC

A moon after arriving at Sea Dragon Point Hadrian and his uncle took a few of the captured Ironborn ships and left for the next destination of his journey.

While he would love to go back to Winterfell and spend some relaxing time with his cousins after so many moons away, he unfortunately still has a few important projects for the North that he would like to start getting off of the ground.

His time at Sea Dragon Point was very productive in Harrys opinion. While the castle was still a very long way off towards being completed, some decent progress had been made. The sewers and docks had begun proper construction, the castles grounds were almost halfway flattened and some basic shelters had already been set up for the smallfolk with more on the way. There were also a few small farms that were getting close to planting their first crops.

Overall, Harry was happy with the progress. While there was still a lot of work to do, he wasn’t required to be there for most of it. Westerosi have been building far larger and more complex castles than the one he designed for thousands of years. As long as most of his plans for the infrastructure such as the sewers, walls and docks were followed, as well as his plans regarding the layout of the town, then the settlement should continue to grow in a more organised fashion than pretty much any other town or settlement in Westeros. Harry wouldn’t be able to oversee every stage of the growth of the town, with how busy he is expecting to be and his uncle wasn’t really capable of spending the entirety of the next few years overlooking the construction either. He still had to spend some time in White Harbour to learn how to run a port city and he still had to go on the sailing trip with the fleet that Hadrian was busy arranging with the Manderlys.

So Hadrian needed to find someone trustworthy and educated enough, whom could watch after the beginning stages of the construction. He doubts the construction of even the castle itself would be close to finished before Benjen got back from the trip. The actual town itself would probably have started taking shape by then but as long as it grows in the layout he designed it would be easy enough for Benjen to influence its future growth.

In the end he decided that now that Benjen is a Lord with a keep he needs to get married and his wife would be a good person to overlook the construction when Benjen wasn’t there.

He didn’t have too many plans for the growth of the city currently. Harry had never done anything remotely similar to designing and building a city before so he wasn’t sure of everything he had to plan for. He would probably keep finding new problems he would have to fix as time went by. For now, the city would be divided into sections. Harry wanted the houses to be located closest to the castle walls in case of an attack as it would allow the citizens to be evacuated into the castle to safety far more easily. All the shops would be located in one area fairly close to the docks while all brothels and taverns would be located in another. Blacksmiths, goldsmiths, tailors and any other such profession would be found in another part of the city while any trades that might cause harm those around them, such as leatherworkers, would be moved outside of the walls.

Harry believed that Sea Dragon Point had taken major steps forward, towards being the centre of trade on the Western coast of the North that he knew it could be. In a decade he doubts he will be able to even recognise this place.

Still there were a few things he had to take care of before his uncle left for White Harbour.

For one, his uncle had to pick a new name for his new House. The only rule that Harry had towards the name was that it could not have the word Stark in it. House Stark had allowed members to form new houses before and repeatedly made the mistake of allowing them to use the word Stark in their names.

History had shown Hadrian that doing so was a bad idea. Future generations could try and replace the main branch of House Stark as the rulers of the North, as House Greystark tried to do. Even if they don’t try and overthrow House Stark, they might believe they’re bigger and more important than they actually are and might see themselves as deserving of certain privileges or statuses that are not available to other lords of the North.  The Karstarks have been guilty of that in the past.

Hadrian would rather not leave any messes with a chance of civil war for his descendants.

Actually deciding on a name for his new House was something that was proven to be incredibly difficult for his uncle, so on Harrys recommendation he decided to wait and hear the opinion of his soon to be wife. Actually deciding on a wife for Benjen was surprisingly easy. There were a few unmarried noble woman around his age in the North that would make for decent wives.

Harry wasn’t very happy to be deciding such a thing for a member of his family. It just didn’t really feel right. Unfortunately he knew that this world was different from Earth and that it was expected of him to marry family members off for the good of his House and the North. Hadrian decided that he would do everything in his power to make sure that the other person had a good heart at the very least and that his family agrees to the match. He would never force any member of his family to marry someone they didn’t like, no matter the circumstances.

In the end there was a clear choice who would make the best wife for Benjen in these circumstances. Even better in Hadrians opinion, is that the marriage would help him lay the groundwork to start on his next project for the North. The next journey of his trip would allow him to kill a few birds with one stone.

A short while after leaving the shores of Sea Dragon Point Harry and Benjen come upon their destination.

The rowing boat hit the side of the small dock with a thump. Harry wasted no time in hopping off of the boat and onto the dock before walking towards where he saw the people in charge of the island waiting for him with the classical greeting of bread and salt.

As he got closer the Mormonts all dropped onto one knee. Harry really should have been more surprised than he was at the action. As it was he barely raised an eyebrow.

Dropping to your knees like that is generally reserved for the king. It didn’t really surprise Harry that the Mormonts would do so.  While House Stark bent the knee to the Iron Throne three centuries ago, for many in the North nothing changed. The North barely had any interactions with the Seven Kingdoms over the centuries and as a result most of the older, more remote Houses still treat the Starks as if they were Kings. As if House Stark either never bent the knee or their bending the knee meant nothing to those Houses in the first place.

The mountain clans were who immediately came to mind when Harry started think along those lines. For the Mountain Clans he is ‘The Hadrian’. He is the Stark of Winterfell and that is all that matters to them, as that was all that mattered to all their ancestors. They couldn’t care less about what some southern king said. If Robert Baratheon went to the home of the Mountain Clans and tried to command them, he would quickly find himself being brutally killed. The only ones they will listen to, the only ones they have ever listened to, is the Stark of Winterfell. They are some of Hadrians poorest and most savage people. Despite that, they are also possibly one of the most loyal.

The Mormonts were another House that never really changed the way they treated the Starks. They may have stopped calling them ‘Your Grace’ and showing all deference’s that were supposed to be given to royalty but they never stopped taking the words of the Stark of Winterfell as law. Ahead of even what the Iron Throne says. The same can be said for almost every House in the North, even after almost three centuries of being ruled by the Iron Throne. It doesn’t surprise him that they are extra respectful with him due to what he has done for the North so far.

For most Houses in the North, The Stark of Winterfell was King in the North in all but name and the few Houses that don’t treat the Starks like that, such as House Bolton or Whitehill, would probably end up being a problem one way or another in the future.

As Harry and his uncle finally stopped in front of the gathered crowd he spoke. “Rise.” All those present did so without hesitation.

Of House Mormont, only the women were present. Jeor and Jorah Mormont travelled South with the army. He was told that some of the Mormont woman wanted to join in on the battles but Hadrian guesses that Jeor decided to leave them at home to look after Bear Island in the end.

Maege Mormont was an older woman with broad shoulders and large muscles. She was a warrior through and through, much like many of the women of Bear Island. Despite this though, she was still very attractive for her age and was no doubt even better looking in her youth if her daughters are anything to go by.

As she stood she towered over Hadrian. “ I have bread and salt prepared for you and your men my Lord.”

Harry smiled at her before taking a small piece of bread, rolling it in salt and eating it. Afterwards he went to great the rest of the Mormont woman before the oldest, Dacey showed him and his uncle Benjen the rooms that they would be staying in.

The Mormont keep was a simple place. It was a decent size, comparable to the size he was building the castle at Sea Dragon Point, but it was made of wood while that castle was going to be built of stone from the start.

Harry knew the Mormonts were a poor House. One of the poorer Houses in the North even. They were extremely loyal though and had been since the founding of their House thousands of years ago. Harry would see this loyalty rewarded and that the Mormonts soon had enough gold to upgrade their keep to stone and improve some of the other defences on the island.

Later that night, after he and his uncle had dinner in the main hall, they found themselves seated in the main solar of the Lord of Bear Island in front of a large oak desk. On the other side of the desk sat Maege Mormont who was fidgeting slightly as she seemed extremely uncomfortable behind said desk.

Harry took a sip of water from the wooden cup he had before he decided to start the conversation on a topic he knows lady Mormont would probably be more comfortable with than the main reason he came to Bear Island. After taking his last gulp he spoke. “My Lady, we have been away from any source of news for over a moon now. Would you happen to have had any news in regards to the war with the Ironborn? “

Harry felt a slight smile threaten to break free from his face as he saw Maege Mormont start to relax her tensed shoulders now that the topic was on something she was comfortable discussing and she could put off acting as a lord about to be burdened with important decisions for a few moments longer.

She released a breath she was holding before speaking. “The last letter we received arrived three days ago. My brother Jeor wrote to speak about the war and about what is happening so far. It’s the least the bastard can do after leaving me here to rule while he gets to go fight. Damned idiot. “

She took a deep breath before continuing. “My apologies, that was unbe-“

Harry interrupted what she was going to say by waving his hand and speaking. “Nonsense my Lady. I find it quite refreshing actually. Don’t hold your words on my account.“

She smiled slightly. “Very well. Then my idiot brother wrote me a letter that arrived three days ago. From what he can gather, the Redwyn fleet was destroyed by Euron Greyjoy in the Ironborns opening raid against The Arbour. While Rodrick Greyjoy was attacking Moat Cailin, Victarion Greyjoy successfully destroyed the Mallisters Fleet and Euron Greyjoy damaged the Hightower Fleet. None of these victories were without costs for the Ironborn and their victories would only get more expensive. The combined forces of those two Greyjoy brothers descended on the Lannister fleet. Unfortunately for them, Tywin Lannister is as cunning as he is cruel and laid a trap for them. Jeor writes many of the Lannister ships were hidden in secret coves near Casterly Rock and that when the Ironborn attacked what ships were visible, they ambushed the Ironborn from behind. He says Lord Lannister lost most of his ships and Euron and Victarion escaped in the end. They lost most of the ships they had left though. The Ironborn won’t stand a chance against the Royal Fleet now.”

Harry feels a tension in his shoulders that he didn’t even know was there start to drain away at her words. While he expected the news that the Ironborn were losing the war, he still had some fear for his uncle in the South. So it was a relief to hear the war was going even worse for the Ironborn than he expected. They had lost most of their ships and probably thousands of experienced men by now and they still have to face the might of the Royal Fleet. Hadrian doubts the Ironborn even have enough ships left over to give the Royal Fleet an actual fight after all of their losses. The war should be over in a few more moons.

Harry responded. “That’s good to hear. The Ironborn have been a nuisance for long enough. It’s about time they faced some consequences. Still, there numbers will grow and they will come back and continue being a plague on the North unless we use this opportunity to strengthen our coasts. To that end there are a number of things being done. Sea Dragon Point is well on its way to being developed and once it is my uncle Benjen will become its Lord. Still, that leaves a question of whom his wife shall be. That is why we are here my lady. After some discussion between myself and -” He looked over at Benjen who was staring at the table, blushing to the tips of his ears. He smirked slightly. “-my uncle, we have decided that there was one candidate that was ahead of the others. So as the Stark of Winterfell I would like to arrange a betrothal agreement between my uncle Benjen and your daughter Dacey.”

She leaned back in her seat with a slightly stunned look on her face. “I would have to speak to Dacey about it before I can confirm the betrothal but I believe she will be just as honoured by the offer as I am. “

Harry smiled. “Of course my lady. I wouldn’t want to force either of them into a miserable marriage. Speak to Dacey and find out what she thinks. If she is in agreement then I would like for the marriage to take place in about six moons or so, depending on when the war ends. In a little under a year Benjen will be making a trip for me with some of the Manderlys and I would like it if he was married by then. Preferably with a child on its way.”

Maege Mormont smiled slightly. “Aye, I don’t see there being any problems with that. As long as Dacey agrees.”

Harry nodded. “Excellent. I look forward to hearing her answer.”

He looked back at his uncle who was still staring at the table as if hoping that we will disappear if he ignores us hard enough. He never expected his uncle to be so shy.

Harry shook his head before looking back at Maege Mormont and deciding they should speak of some other topics. “We will come back to discussing the smaller details involved in the wedding once Jeor gets back from the war. There were some other reasons that I decided to make the trip to Bear Island.”

She leaned forward, looking intrigued. “Oh?”

Harry relaxed into the back of his chair. “I’m not sure if you have heard or not yet but I have begun to make preparations to make use of some of the new resources and wealth the North will begin building over the next few years to start to develop a proper professional Northern Army.”

She nodded her head. “Aye, Jeor wrote about it. He didn’t really explain in many details but he said it sounds like a sound idea to increase the strength and protection of the North. “

Harry smiled. “I’m glad to know Lord Mormont agrees with me. Right now the final structure of the army has not been decided yet. All that really has been decided is that there will be an army. All the Lords of the North will gather at Winterfell a few moons after the war with the Ironborn is over, in order to give their advice and opinions on how such an army will be structured.”

Harry continued speaking before Lady Mormont could say anything. “This is only slightly relevant to the other reason that I am here. The army will be important no doubt, but it will only consist of one part of the Norths protection. The army will handle conflicts on land with the south but we need more than that. So I am also going to be creating a proper navy. It will be a part of the army. The main reason I came all the way to Bear Island when I could have just sent a raven offering the betrothal, is because Bear Island is so far looking like the best place to station such a navy and I wanted to see the Island with my own eyes and speak to you and your family in person before I start making up proper long term plans for creating such a navy.”

She shifted slightly in her chair. Understandably nervous of the idea of having an army not under the direct control of their House stationed on the island. Hadrian already considered this and he had several things planned to make the Mormonts more comfortable with the idea. Perhaps to even make them embrace the idea.

He spoke again. “I understand how it might make one uncomfortable to have a force not under their direct control stationed so close to home. That is why I would also like to start investing in a training academy.”

She scrunched her eyebrows together. “A training academy?”

Harry tried to think of how to make his explanation as simple as possible. He would need to keep his explanations simple for most lords unfortunately. “When my uncle Benjen goes travelling with the fleet one of the tasks I will have for him will be in the finding and hiring of experienced and well learned men. It is my hope he can find several experienced sailors and perhaps even a retired naval commander who might be willing to travel to Bear Island and teach what they know to our navy in the form of an academy. I want this academy to give the best possible training. It is my hope that the sailors that come out of it will be some of the best in the world. Now the Navy and Army will largely promote based on skill. It will also teach how to lead to certain promising students. It is my hope that House Mormont has some members of their House, male or female go to this academy. Then I have no doubt that you Bears will be leading the Navy. It is not my goal to have an army you are uncomfortable with on your shores, I would much rather your House leads the army. I just want to make sure that they are the best when they do.”

It was even true. Wherever he put the military academies, they would be bound to be influenced by the Houses whose lands they found themselves on. The military itself might not be beholden to those Houses over the entire North but those Houses would still exert some amount of influence just based off the fact they own the land. That’s why he decided not to have the Navy stationed at Sea Dragon Point. The area is already bound to grow wealthy in the future. He can’t afford to grant them too much power. As even though the militaries will be mostly merit based in the future, nobles will still get ahead quicker just off the fact they can afford a superior education and the fact that they will constantly be looked at for leading positions. So he chose Bear Island as the place for the Navy and the Naval Academy. That way the rising powers of Bear Island and Sea Dragon Point should balance each other out. The Mormonts would be probably be leading the Navy on this side of the North for at least a few generations. The army should strengthen them immensely but it will not be there army and they shouldn’t be able to use it to rebel against House Stark.

He could see Maege relax her shoulders slightly now that she was starting to understand what he was getting at. In fact now that she seemed to comprehend that House Mormont would either be put in charge or at the very least have some influence over such an army she seemed to start getting quite exited.

He held up a hand before she could speak and spoke. “This is just a basic outline. I will need to go over the details with the entirety of your House and Lord Manderly to find compromises we can all accept.”

He watched her reign herself in. She bowed her head. “Very well my Lord.”

Harry stood. “Thank you for this meeting my lady. We will speak more in the morning once we are all rested. This is going to be a long term project my lady and there will no doubt be many ideas exchanged and discarded before we are done. In the next few days you can show me around Bear Island for good locations to build a military port and a naval academy..“

She smirked. “Understood my lord. I look forward to seeing what the future holds. Goodnight My Lord. Goodnight Lord Benjen. I am going to tell Dacey about the proposal now. “

Benjen stuttered. “ G-Goodnight My lady.” Before fleeing out the door.

Harry laughed while following.

Next chapter Thursday 27 April 2023. 

As always criticism is welcome as long as it’s constructive.

To read ahead of the update schedule: Pat_reon(dot)com(slash) TheLifeandTimes19.